Expert Cut Reference Manual (EN) PDF

CUT
REFERENCE
MANUAL
Copyright
The contents of this user manual and graphics are
protected by Spanish law regarding the intellectual
and industrial property right of Lantek. The
Parque Tecnológico de Álava reproduction, distribution, public communication

and transformation wholly or partially of the
Ferdinand Zeppelin 2, Ed. Lantek
information contained herein, is forbidden without
01510 Miñano - Álava (ESPAÑA) the express authorization of Lantek.
www.lanteksms.com
info@lanteksms.com Disclaimer
The information contained herein is subject to
change. While every effort has been taken to
Parque Tecnológico de Álava provide accurate information, Lantek is not liable for
any errors or damage resulting from incorrect use of
Ferdinand Zeppelin 2, Ed.Lantek
the information contained herein. All product names
01510 Miñano - Álava (ESPAÑA) used in this manual are the property of Lantek.
www.lanteksms.com
info@lanteksms.com
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 CONFIGURE CUTTING MACHINES & TOOLS ....................................................................... 13
MULTIHEAD DATA ................................................................................................ 13

GRID ............................................................................................................ 17
SHEET CLAMPS ................................................................................................... 21
Position ..................................................................................................... 21
Clamp Zone ................................................................................................. 24
Auxiliar ...................................................................................................... 25
FIXTURES ........................................................................................................ 26
EXTRACTIONS .................................................................................................... 27
LIFT/GRIP ........................................................................................................ 29
UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD SHEETS ..................................................................................... 33
WORK ZONE ..................................................................................................... 34
FROM POINT ..................................................................................................... 35
REPOSITION ...................................................................................................... 36
General .................................................................................................. 36
Advanced ................................................................................................ 38
Device .................................................................................................... 38
Strategy .................................................................................................. 39
SHEET PARAMETERS .............................................................................................. 41
SHEET TURN OVER................................................................................................ 43
BEVEL HEAD DATA................................................................................................ 45
Head Data ............................................................................................... 45
Bevels Management .................................................................................... 46
GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 49
Geometry ................................................................................................ 49
Part Changes ............................................................................................ 52
Auxiliar ................................................................................................... 53
Cut ....................................................................................................... 54
STARTUP ......................................................................................................... 55
General .................................................................................................. 55
Pre-initialization ......................................................................................... 56
Feed Rates ............................................................................................... 57
3
Table of Contents
CNC............................................................................................................. 58
SHEET REMNANTS ................................................................................................ 59
SAVE OPTIONS ................................................................................................... 61
General .................................................................................................. 61
Subprograms ............................................................................................ 62
Part Saving .............................................................................................. 63
Execution Nesting Module .............................................................................. 65
MATERIAL/THICKNESS DEPENDENT DATA .......................................................................... 70
Cutting Parameters ..................................................................................... 70
Sheets Parameters ...................................................................................... 72
Automatic Technology .................................................................................. 72
Head Raising Test ....................................................................................... 74
Machining Order ........................................................................................ 75
Lead-in/Lead-out Values ................................................................................ 75
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values ................................................................... 76
Micro-Joint Values ...................................................................................... 79
Automatic Micro-Joint Values .......................................................................... 80
Loop Values .............................................................................................. 81
Bevel Values ............................................................................................. 82
Bridge Values ............................................................................................ 82
Bevels Management .................................................................................... 83
Sheet Remnants ......................................................................................... 83
CUTTING PARAMETERS ............................................................................................ 83
General .................................................................................................. 83
Auxiliar Parameters ..................................................................................... 86
Contour Attributes ...................................................................................... 87
Compensations by Quality .............................................................................. 88
COMMON CUTTING PARAMETERS.................................................................................. 89
TECHNOLOGY .................................................................................................... 92
Lead-in/Lead-out Values ................................................................................ 92
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values ................................................................... 93
Micro-joint Values ....................................................................................... 97
Automatic Micro-Joint Values .......................................................................... 97
Loop Values .............................................................................................. 99
Bevel Values ............................................................................................ 100
Bridge Values ........................................................................................... 101
4
Table of Contents
Tables of Technology................................................................................... 102

AUTOMATIC NESTING ............................................................................................ 104
General ................................................................................................. 104
Advanced ............................................................................................... 112
Unitary .................................................................................................. 118
AUTOMATIC MACHINING......................................................................................... 119
Cut ...................................................................................................... 119
Machining by Zones .................................................................................... 141
Component Removal ................................................................................... 145
TIME CALCULATION .............................................................................................. 147
Cutting Parameters .................................................................................... 147
Reposition / Extractions ............................................................................... 151
Rapid Accelerations .................................................................................... 152
Linear Cut Accelerations ............................................................................... 152
Circular Cut Accelerations ............................................................................. 153
No Cut................................................................................................... 154
Upload/Download Sheets.............................................................................. 155
COST CALCULATION .............................................................................................. 155
INK-JET ......................................................................................................... 157
POSTPROCESSOR ................................................................................................ 158
General ................................................................................................. 158
Block Numbering ....................................................................................... 160
Free Tape ............................................................................................... 161
Specifics of Cut ......................................................................................... 161
Reserved ................................................................................................ 164
2 JOBS (CAM) MODULE ..............................................................................................165
JOBS ........................................................................................................... 165

Close ....................................................................................................... 165
Recents .................................................................................................... 166
Jobs ........................................................................................................ 166
Kits ......................................................................................................... 169
Information ................................................................................................ 170
Help ........................................................................................................ 172
Print ........................................................................................................ 173
Configuration Options .................................................................................... 173
5
Table of Contents
Exit ......................................................................................................... 217

HOME ......................................................................................................... 218
Modules.................................................................................................... 218
Import ...................................................................................................... 218
Edit ......................................................................................................... 234
Contextual Menu .......................................................................................... 235
MANAGE ...................................................................................................... 236
Components ............................................................................................... 236
Drills ........................................................................................................ 243
UTILITIES ...................................................................................................... 252
Export ...................................................................................................... 252
Nestings.................................................................................................... 253
Databases ................................................................................................. 256
VIEW .......................................................................................................... 258
Job Explorer ................................................................................................ 258
Kit Explorer ................................................................................................ 259
Product List ................................................................................................ 259
Product View .............................................................................................. 259
Sheet List................................................................................................... 259
Sheet View ................................................................................................. 260
ADD-INS ....................................................................................................... 260
Processes .................................................................................................. 260
Parametric Editor ......................................................................................... 261
3 DRAWING MODULE................................................................................................263
DRAWING WINDOW ............................................................................................. 263

STATUS BAR..................................................................................................... 264
CUSTOMIZE QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR ............................................................................. 264
CONTEXTUAL MENU ............................................................................................. 265
PARTS .......................................................................................................... 267
New ........................................................................................................ 267
Open ....................................................................................................... 267
Open Parts ................................................................................................. 268
Part Properties ............................................................................................ 268
Nesting and Machining ................................................................................... 269
Select Machine ............................................................................................ 269
6
Table of Contents
Save ........................................................................................................ 269

Import ...................................................................................................... 279
Machining Macros ........................................................................................ 282
Lead-in/Lead-outs ...................................................................................... 283
Remnants ............................................................................................... 283
Duct Holes .............................................................................................. 285
Mosaics ................................................................................................. 286
Help ..................................................................................................... 289
Print ..................................................................................................... 289
Configuration Options ................................................................................. 289
Exit ...................................................................................................... 314
HOME .......................................................................................................... 314
Draw ....................................................................................................... 314
Modify ..................................................................................................... 317
One Touch Figures ........................................................................................ 323
Transform .................................................................................................. 331
Review ..................................................................................................... 344
Orthogonal ................................................................................................ 357
Macros ..................................................................................................... 358
TECHNOLOGY ................................................................................................... 359
Lead-in/Lead-outs ......................................................................................... 359
Micro-Joints ............................................................................................... 363
Loops ....................................................................................................... 364
Standard Bevel ............................................................................................ 366
3D Bevel ................................................................................................... 368
Cut Technology ............................................................................................ 369
Text ........................................................................................................ 372
MACHINING ..................................................................................................... 375
Machining ................................................................................................. 375
Contours ................................................................................................... 376
Cycles ...................................................................................................... 383
Modify ..................................................................................................... 394
Options..................................................................................................... 404
Component Removal ...................................................................................... 413
View ........................................................................................................ 416
VIEW ........................................................................................................... 417
7
Table of Contents
Display ..................................................................................................... 417

Zoom ....................................................................................................... 426
SIMULATION .................................................................................................... 428
Simulate ................................................................................................ 428
NOTES .......................................................................................................... 432
Dimension Notes ....................................................................................... 432
Text ..................................................................................................... 437
View ..................................................................................................... 438
UTILITIES........................................................................................................ 439
Cut of Double or Triple Bevels ......................................................................... 439
Partial Cut or a Contour ................................................................................ 439
Open Drafting .......................................................................................... 440
Compare Geometries .................................................................................. 441
Bitmap .................................................................................................. 441
DRAGGING OPTIONS ............................................................................................. 441
SELECTION OPTIONS ............................................................................................. 442
4 NESTING AND MACHINING MODULE ............................................................................444
TITLE BAR ....................................................................................................... 444

DRAWING WINDOW ............................................................................................. 445
STATUS BAR..................................................................................................... 445
CUSTOMIZE QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR ............................................................................. 446
CONTEXTUAL MENU ............................................................................................. 447
New ........................................................................................................ 447
Open ....................................................................................................... 447
Open Parts ................................................................................................. 447
Block ....................................................................................................... 447
Delete ...................................................................................................... 447
Import ...................................................................................................... 448
Quantity ................................................................................................... 449
Priority ..................................................................................................... 449
Information ................................................................................................ 450
Part Rotations .......................................................................................... 450
Properties ............................................................................................... 451
Group ................................................................................................... 453
Order .................................................................................................... 453
8
Table of Contents
View ..................................................................................................... 453

Size ...................................................................................................... 453
Cancel ................................................................................................... 453
SUBJOBS ........................................................................................................ 453
Open ....................................................................................................... 453
Previous .................................................................................................... 454
Next ........................................................................................................ 454
Save ........................................................................................................ 454
Save All .................................................................................................... 455
Save As ..................................................................................................... 455
Drawing .................................................................................................... 455
Import Stored Nesting .................................................................................... 455
Store Nesting .............................................................................................. 459
Export Nestings to File ................................................................................. 459
Import................................................................................................... 460
Help ..................................................................................................... 462
Print ..................................................................................................... 462
Configuration Options ................................................................................. 465
Exit ...................................................................................................... 487
HOME .......................................................................................................... 487
Sheets ...................................................................................................... 487
Nesting ..................................................................................................... 493
Transform .................................................................................................. 496
Remnants .................................................................................................. 503
Review ..................................................................................................... 508
Orthogonal ................................................................................................ 515
Macros ..................................................................................................... 515
TECHNOLOGY ................................................................................................... 516
Lead-in/Lead-outs ......................................................................................... 516
Micro-Joints ............................................................................................... 524
Loops ....................................................................................................... 527
Bridges ..................................................................................................... 529
Cut Technology ............................................................................................ 531
Text ........................................................................................................ 534
MACHINING ..................................................................................................... 539
Machining ................................................................................................. 539
9
Table of Contents
Contours ................................................................................................... 545

Cycles ...................................................................................................... 558
Modify ..................................................................................................... 564
Options..................................................................................................... 579
Component Removal ...................................................................................... 580
View ........................................................................................................ 580
Sheet ....................................................................................................... 583
VIEW ........................................................................................................... 585
Display .................................................................................................. 585
Zoom .................................................................................................... 592
SIMULATION .................................................................................................... 594
Program ................................................................................................ 594
ISN Position ............................................................................................. 594
Mouse Positioning ..................................................................................... 594
Begin .................................................................................................... 594
Previous ................................................................................................. 594
Next ..................................................................................................... 594
End ...................................................................................................... 594
Run ...................................................................................................... 594
Previous Tool ........................................................................................... 594
Next Tool ............................................................................................... 595
Previous Reposition .................................................................................... 595
Next Reposition ........................................................................................ 595
Previous Multihead .................................................................................... 595
Next Multihead ......................................................................................... 595
Previous Chute ......................................................................................... 595
Next Chute .............................................................................................. 595
Simulate CNC ........................................................................................... 595
APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................... 596
Assign Palletization Suction Cups ..................................................................... 596
Assign Download Point to Pallet ...................................................................... 596
Machining of a Part with 2 Heads ..................................................................... 596
Machining of the Out of a Part with Multihead ...................................................... 596
Common Cut with Multihead .......................................................................... 597
Linear Common Cut with Multihead .................................................................. 598
Parts Evacuation by Lift after Machining ............................................................. 598
10
Table of Contents
Evacuation of All the Parts by Lift after Machining .................................................. 600

Remnant to Part........................................................................................ 601
UTILITIES........................................................................................................ 601
Open Drafting .......................................................................................... 601
DRAGGING OPTIONS ............................................................................................. 602
SELECTION OPTIONS ............................................................................................. 602
5 CUTTING EXAMPLE ................................................................................................603
11
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
Welcome to Lantek Expert Cut Reference Manual. This manual introduces all the important
modules, basic concepts, and important functionalities of software. We recommend
the user to go through this manual to use the software effectively.
After reading this manual, the user will be familiar with the different modules and concepts of Expert
II to use it proficiently, making the management process a pleasant activity.
What is ?
Lantek Expert Cut is a CAD/CAM nesting software specially designed to automate the CNC
programming of sheet metal cutting machines (oxycut, plasma, laser, water jet). All the applications
related to cutting such as creating part, nesting, generating the CNC, and so on are fully integrated
into a single program.
It is the result of more than 25 years’ experience in close collaboration with both manufacturers and
users of these types of machines. It perfectly combines machine technology with customer´s
programming and management requirements.
The current manual is structured into the following five chapters, which are organized
following the logical execution order:
Configure Cutting Machines and Tools

• Configure the machine to be managed by Lantek
Jobs (CAM) Module

• Create a job, import parts, manage parts/materials/sheets, manage
Databases, customize ribbon.
Drawing Module
• Design your parts
Nesting and Machining Module

• Position the parts on the sheet, calculate the machining sequence
and create the CNC program
Cutting Example
• Practice your skills
12
Configure Cutting Machines & Tools
1 CONFIGURE CUTTING MACHINES & TOOLS

The main step to take prior to working with Lantek is to configure properly the machine that we are
going to manage as well as its tools. It is essential that the user configures all the parameters
appropriately so that the system works as per our requirements.
Figure 1: Configure Machine window
Multihead Data
The configuration of the multihead of the selected machine appears in the present window.
13
Figure 2: Multihead data configuration
 Number of heads: It shows and allows configuring the number of heads of the machine. The
system supports to use up to 20 heads at the same time.
 Head capabilities: Each head may have different capabilities for cut, mark or for machine
bevels or notches. In this dialogue box, the user can choose the capabilities of each head:
Figure 3: Heads table
In the example, the first head can be used for all kinds of machines, but the second, third or the
fourth can only be used for normal cut.
 Multihead on axis Y: Depending on each machine, the heads can be placed on X axis (by
default), or in Y axis. It is important to specify to system which kind of heads placement the
machine uses.
 Control head: It establishes the reference head. The CNC program is built for this head and
the other heads follow the movements of this head. The options depend on the previous
14
parameter. If the heads are on axis X, the possible movements are Right and Left. If the
heads are on axis Y, the possible movements are Up and Down.
 Minimum distance between heads: This is the minimum distance allowed between two
heads.
 Maximum distance between heads: This is the maximum distance allowed between two
heads.
 View configuration in "Do all": The multihead configuration is shown each time the user
clicks Do All option in the Nesting module, which makes the nesting and machining process
automatically for all jobs depending on the configurations of Automatic Nesting and
Automatic Machining. This dialogue box is shown when the user uses Sheets / Multihead too.
In the dialogue box, the list of heads along with the capabilities and distances of each head is
displayed:
The capabilities of each head are shown with icons:
It is possible to activate the heads that the user would like to use. If the icon near the number is in
red color ( ), the system can use that head. The user can deactivate head by clicking this icon. The
icon is turned to black color ( ). Click the black colored icon to activate the head again.
 Positioning: When clicking this button, Heads positions dialogue box with following
parameters is displayed:
15
Figure 4: Heads positions dialog box
 Test this data before machining: Select this to test the possibility of doing multihead cutting
by position when the system detects multihead cutting. The system verifies if the heads can
reach the specified position before performing the machining or not. If the part is not
correct, then the system exploits the part and its corresponding multihead parts.
 Index of the reference head: The reference head is the head with the motor, and the rest of
them depend on this head. It is possible to set the index of the master head here.
 Initial position of the reference head: The reference head is fixed in the carriage. It cannot
be moved. It is possible to set the position of the reference head with the value that the user
enters here.
 Minimal position of heads with respect to zero point of the carriage: The rest of the heads
(other than the reference head) can be placed along the carriage but they must keep some
distance from the reference head. The nearest to the reference head can be placed at the
distance specified here. The distance is referred to the zero point of the head.
 Maximal position of heads with respect to zero point of the carriage: The maximal position
along the carriage where the farthest head to the reference head can be placed. The distance
is referred to the zero point of the head.
 Maximum length that can move to negative the zero of the carriage: The carriage can be
placed in different positions between the physical limits. This value is the maximum length to
which the zero point of the carriage can be moved towards negative direction.
16
 Maximum length that can move to positive the zero of the carriage: It is the maximum
distance to which the zero point of the carriage can be moved towards positive direction.
 Coordinates of the zero of the carriage respect the zero of the sheet: This value is the
distance between the zero point of the sheet and the zero point of the carriage. If the
reference head is placed in the middle of the carriage, and the sheet is placed in the work
zone, this is the distance between the reference head and the zero point of the sheet.
 Head movement length: Select whether the head movement length should be independent
of the separation (the distance between two heads) or depend on that.
 Independent of the separation: It allows cutting parts even when any of the heads is out of
its Maximal position of the heads with respect to the zero point of the carriage.
 Dependent of the separation: If any of the heads is out of its Maximal position of the
heads respect of the zero point of the carriage, the parts are not cut (even if the part
keeps the minimum distance with the previous one).
 Assignation of the dimensions of the contour:
 By contours: The system decides, depending on the carriage limits, which heads to use for
machining problematic contours.
 By Parts: The part is always machined with the same head (interior and exterior contours).
Grid
This is used for cutting machines that have a work support grid. It is possible to specify the
visualization parameters for the support grid.
17
Figure 5: Grid configuration
 The machine has grid: First of all, the user must check this option for enabling the rest of grid
configuration parameters:
 Visualize: Select this check box to simulate the grid. It is also possible to see the positions of
the parts and modify them, if required.
The parameters to configure are 2D Points and Continuous Line/Arc.
 X and Y: the coordinates of the first point.
 d1 and d2: the horizontal and vertical distances between points respectively.
 n1 and n2: the number of horizontal and vertical points respectively.
18
The other parameter to configure is File. The user has an option to define the grid with his own
parameters in MEC format. The grid in MEC format with the desired geometry can be imported to
the system. Select File check box to import your MEC file. Use the Navigation button to select the
particular MEC file.
 Parameters for destroying holes: This option is for cutting or combination machines with
grid. The system executes a process for destroying the holes on the sheet. The sheet is
placed over the table's grid. Depending on the distance of the grid's lines, sometimes while
cutting a hole, it may remain on the table instead of falling down. If it remains in horizontal
position there is no problem, but if it inclines between two grid lines, it may stand out and
the head can collide with it resulting in head damage.
To prevent this, the system provides the option of cutting the holes into small parts to ensure they
always fall down the grid.
The following four parameters delimit the size of the holes to be destroyed:
 Maximum length of the hole
 Minimum length of the hole
 Maximum width of the hole
 Minimum width of the hole
The following example explains how to use this option. In the nesting, there are some parts with big
holes. The grid lines are shown in violet color:
19
The hole of the upper-left part is bigger than the values given (X:150-450, Y:150-450), and the smaller
holes are not between the defined lengths and widths.
So, if the user executes the order for destroying the holes from the CAM module before doing the
machining in Machining / Contours / Destroy sheet holes, it asks for confirmation of previously
entered data, and also the length and the width of the grid lines.
The system calculates and introduces the required machining orders, which destroy the problematic
holes:
Figure 6: Problematic holes example
The big hole of the part is too big and stays over the grid without problems, and the other holes are
too small fall into the table without problems.
 Automatic micro-joints in unstable contours: It is possible to configure automatic micro-

joints. The user will be provided with the following options:
 No: Do not place any micro-joint.
 The part has no support on the grid: The micro-joints are only placed on parts without grid
anchorage.
 The part can be partially overturned: The part may finish partially overturned.
 Both: Both previous options will be selected.
20
Sheet Clamps
Position
Figure 7: Sheet clamps – Position configuration
 Number of clamps: The user can select the number of clamps from the drop-down list.
 Positions: Positions indicate the distance between different clamp positions.
 Offset: The offset is the minimum distance where the clamp can be placed from the side of
the sheet. For example, if the value is 70mm, and the clamp is to be placed at 40 mm, the
system places it at 70 mm. The clamp must have a sensor for executing this.
 Positioning: The user can set up the positions of the clamps in this section.
21
 Any: When selecting this, the clamps can be placed anywhere. This option is used for
machines whose clamps must be placed manually with screws.
 Fixed: When the clamps are placed into the linear turret, they take positions with fixed
distance increments between them. In this case, the position of the clamps can be
configured easily with the following parameters:
 First position variable: Although the turret has fixed positions, if the user selects this, the
first clamp site can be in different position each time, and the rest of the clamps are placed
after it.
 First position: The distance between the first clamp position and the reference point. From
this first position, the rest of the clamps are placed as per the next two parameters:
 Number of positions: Total number of positions of the linear turret.
 Position distance: Distance between each turret position. The system calculates every
clamp position adding to the first position the value given here.
For example:
Figure 8: Sheet clamps position distance example
 Reference point: The user will be able to select between the following options:
 Left sheet: The reference point is the left side of the sheet.
22
 Right sheet: The reference point is the right side of the sheet.
 Left work zone: The left side of the work zone is the reference point.
 Right work zone: The right side of the work zone is the reference point.
 Place the clamps automatically: If enabled, the system will calculate the position of the
clamps automatically during the machining initialization.
 Place the clamps with the mouse: This is used frequently when the user works with the
whole sheet without using lower sheet margin. In this case, it is normal to have parts or holes
to avoid, and this is difficult, if the clamp placement was done inserting distances with the
keyboard. But if the placement is done with the mouse, it is possible to slide the clamps and
place them in a position which allows machining the whole part of the sheet. With this,
reposition orders will be avoided.
The system prompts to place the clamps with the mouse when the Machining / Initialize order is
selected.
 Prompt for this data when initializing: When selecting this option, the system shows the
Sheet Clamps - Position dialogue box when the initialization instruction is executed. Please
refer Machining / Initialize.
 More: When clicking More button, a dialog box is displayed, where it is possible to configure
each clamp's properties like Minimum position, Maximum position, Minimum distance, and
Maximum distance. It is possible to indicate whether the clamp has sensor or not. The user
can also select the Type of the clamp from the drop-down list. The options available in the
drop-down list are Fixed, Movable, Auto-retractable, and Movable - 2positions. When
selecting Movable - 2positions, Distance field is activated, and it is possible to define the
distance the clamps can move.
23
Clamp Zone
Figure 9: Sheet clamps – Clamp zone configuration
 Clamp zone: It is possible to set up the measurements of the clamp zone.
 Clamp size: The clamp size can be set up here based on the three parameters: L, R, and U.
These settings configure the real clamps size, which are used for the automatic repositions.
The system tests if the clamp is to be placed in a hole or not. If the clamp is to be placed in a
hole, the clamp cannot take the sheet properly.
 Simulation: When clicking the Simulation button, a dialog box is displayed. The system
simulates the clamps size depending on the values given in the following dialog box:
24
Figure 10: Clamp zone simulation
 Offset of clamps zone: When clicking the Offset of clamps zone button, a dialog box is
displayed. It is possible to add the safety distance required to the clamp's work zone.
 Prompt for this data when initializing: When selecting this option, the system shows the
Sheet Clamps - Clamp zone dialogue box when the initialization instruction is executed.
Please refer Machining / Initialize.
Auxiliar
It is possible to configure the auxiliary details of the clamps here.
Figure 11: Sheet Clamps – Auxiliar configuration
 Move from point interactively: Select this checkbox to change the from point of the
machining.
25
 The clamps take up turret position: With this option, the clamps are placed in the turret.
 Maximum length of the sheet to enable the pin 2 automatically: Enter the required value to
enable the pin2 automatically.
 Initial offset of the work zone: Enter the Initial offset value of the work zone.
 Offset to avoid the clamps: Enter the Offset value for the punch to avoid the clamps.
 Pin 2: Select this checkbox to activate the minimum length of the sheet, clicking on
Navigation button. The user can configure Move from point interactively in the window
displayed. It will be possible to configure the Move from point interactively (Center, Left,
Right) and define the Offset.
 Allow collision test for clamps: Select this checkbox to allow collision test.
 Apply clamp check: Select this checkbox to apply clamp check.
 Prompt for this data when initializing: When selecting this option, the system will show the
Sheet Clamps - Auxiliar dialogue box when the initialization instruction is executed. Refer
Machining / Initialize.
Fixtures
With this option, it is possible to configure the fixtures or the fixed clamps of the machine. The fixed
clamps work similar to the clamps. The machine will only have clamps or fixed clamps, they will never
be together in the same machine. To configure the fixed clamps, the clamps number must be 0
otherwise the Fixtures option will not be displayed. If after configuring the fixed clamps, the user
modifies the number of clamps bigger than 0, the fixed clamps parameters will be avoided.
During the machining initialization, it is possible to configure the fixed clamps with the keyboard and
with the mouse. The changes made during the initialization with the keyboard (using the
configuration panel) will be saved as standard in machine configuration parameters.
 Positions.
 Number of fixtures: The clamps can be located in any position. This option is used for
machines whose clamps can be placed automatically.
26
Figure 12: Fixtures dialog box
 Fixture zone: When the machine is initialized, this is the clamp zone which the system will use
before starting the machining.
 Place the fixtures with the mouse: This is used frequently when the user is working with the
whole sheet without using lower sheet margin. In this case, is normal to have parts or holes
to avoid, and this is difficult if the clamp placement was done inserting distances with the
keyboard. But if the placement is done with the mouse, the user can slide the clamps and
place them in a correct position which allows to machining the most part of the sheet. The
user can avoid reposition orders thanks to this option.
 Prompt for this data when initializing: The machine initialization process must be done
always before making any machine instruction.
Extractions
Extractions is used for cutting machines with clamps to fix the sheet, because in these machines the
sheet moves and the parts must be evacuated. If the cutting head moves alone on the sheet, there is
no need to evacuate the parts and the traps configuration is not required.
27
Figure 13: Extractions configuration
 Number of traps: The user can configure here the number of traps of the machine.
Depending on this number, the system shows the boxes needed to specify the respective
coordinates (all the distances are referred to the cutting/punching center):
 Minimum X & Minimum Y: These are the coordinates for the lower left corner of the trap.
 Maximum X & Maximum Y: These are the coordinates for the upper-right corner of the trap.
 Increment X & Increment Y: The machine makes one movement after receiving one trap
open instruction while trying to center the part into the trap. This increment of movement
is configured here.
 The machine has an extraction hammer: If the machine has an extraction hammer and
extraction hammer2, these must be configured here. This hammer is used to hit the trap to
make sure it opens properly. The hammer is defined by the coordinates X and Y and the
radius.
 Extraction hammer 2: This option will be enabled when the machine has an extraction
hammer is activated. Here the user can specify the X, Y coordinates and the radius of
extraction hammer 2.
28
Lift/Grip
Figure 14: Lift/Grip configuration
 The machine has up/downloading by lift: The machine uses lift system for uploading and
downloading sheets and/or parts. When enabled, many other options will be displayed:
 MEC file with suction cups carriage geometry: The system allows defining a maximum of five
movable strips with suction cups to load/download and evacuate parts by lift. Each strip is
movable in X and Y directions and it is placed in the desired position.
 There are movable strips in the suction cups carriage: The system allows defining a
maximum of five movable strips with suction cups to load/download and evacuate parts by
lift. Each strip is movable in X and Y directions and it is placed in the desired position.
 Number of strips: When the previous checkbox is enabled, this one is displayed. Here the
user is able to select the number of strips.
 Number of suction cups: Number of suction cups of the lift system. The maximum of suction
cups groups is six and each group can have up to twelve suction cups.
29
 Lift could rotate: This option manages the lift evacuations where the lift can be moved. If this
parameter is configured, the system will ask for the rotation angle of the lift for the specific
evacuation during manual or semiautomatic evacuation.
 X displacement of the suction cups while uploading: This is the offset between the cutting
head and the cups carriage.
 Y displacement of the suction cups while uploading: This is the Y offset for the suction cups
while loading the sheet.
 Minimum X position of the suction cups: This is the minimum position in X where the
carriage can physically arrive.
 Minimum X and Maximum X position while downloading: This is the minimum and
maximum X position where the carriage can download a part.
 Minimum Y and Maximum Y position while downloading: This is the minimum and maximum
Y position where the carriage can download a part.
 The machining has downloading by grip: The machine uses lift system for downloading
parts.
 More: Click this button to display additional parameters related to lift system. Configure
these details in the dialog box which is displayed:
Figure 15: Lift dialog box
30
 Speed & Acceleration: The speed and the acceleration that the lift system applies for
uploading the sheet.
 Pressing position: X position where the lift picks the sheet.
 Waiting position: At the beginning, the lift goes to sheet pallet and gets one carries it to the
machine. The second time, the sheet cannot be located in the same place because the
previous has not been machined yet and it has not yet been evacuated from the machine. In
this case, the lift places the sheet in a wait position whose objective is to make the upload
faster. The next sheet can be uploaded as soon as the previous sheet has been evacuated.
 Cycle of unstuck of sheets: Sometimes the lift gets two sheets instead of just one because of
suction. When selecting this parameter, the lift, after getting the sheet makes up and down
movements to unstuck the sheets.
 Control of double sheets: If this parameter is selected, the sensor measures the width of the
part being carried. If the width is not correct, the machine will execute the Cycle of unstuck
of sheets again and will remove the extra sheets. It is a security level related to the previous
parameter, but a step higher than that.
 Transfer position: The position in the pallet where the sheet is to be left.
 Use a percentage of sheet length: Enabled, the user will be able to define a percentage of
sheet length.
 Use a percentage of sheet width: Enabled, the user will be able to define a percentage of
sheet width.
 Speed & Acceleration: The speed and the acceleration that the system applies for
downloading the sheet.
 Head up/down: The user should select this to have the head raised while moving the part for
security purpose.
 Press on the table of the machine: This option allows leaving the part on the table instead of
the pallet.
31
 Downloading with ejection: When selecting this, the lift leaves the part from a certain height
specified in the following parameters.
 Show pressing cylinders: If the user has selected Move the pressing point interactively, this
parameter will be displayed. Select this option to display the cylinders and/or the pressing
head at the evacuation point.
 Move the pressing point interactively: Select this option to define the zone to avoid
collisions. When selecting the Navigation button, Suction cups carriage data dialog box will
be displayed.
 Ejection height: When the system tries to download parts on the pallet, if there are a few
parts already places, the lift cannot arrive to the surface of the pallet. In this case, this
parameter is the height to which the lift leaves the part to the pallet.
 Pressing position (X): This is the X distance of the lift zero point where the lift leaves the
part.
 Pressing position (Y): The Y distance of the zero point for getting the part. This parameter is
for lift systemts which has movement in Y axis.
 Copy nesting: Select this option to copy the nesting during evacuation.
 Downloading position offset (X and Y): With this option, it is possible to define the point
from where the copying of nesting is performed.
 Scale factor (X and Y): If the download zone is bigger than the working zone, a scale factor
can be defined (in X and/or Y) to get more distance between parts on the pallet.
32
Upload/Download Sheets
Figure 16: Upload/Download Sheets configuration
 Process the number of sheets automatically: If the loading is automatic, the system will
calculate the number of sheets and will order them to load whenever it is required.
 Number of sheets: By means of this option the user can choose the number of sheets which
will be loaded into the machine instead of using the previous parameter.
 Upload sheets: If activated, Sheet uploading parameter will become activated, where the
user will be able to select between Manual, Automatic and Lift.
 Manual: The system will not use the loader. The process must be done manually.
 Lift: If the machine is equipped with a lift system, the sheet upload can be executed with it.
o Suction cups are selected automatically: The system will calculate which cups are the
best for uploading the sheet.
o Suction cups: In order to select them manually, Suction cups button will display a
window where the user will be able to select the required ones.
 Automatic: If this option is selected, the following parameters will become enabled:
33
o Store station: If the loader system allows it, it is possible to specify the station from
which the sheet will be taken.
o Sheet peeling: Sometimes, when loading a sheet, the loader gets two sheets instead
of just one. With this active, the loader will execute a cycle of movements to unstuck
the sheets.
o Control of double sheets: In some loader systems there is a sensor for the sheet
width. This can detect if there is more than one sheet. If this occurs, the sheet
peeling cycle will be executed again.
 Sheet downloading: If activated, Sheet downloading parameter will become activated,
where the user will be able to select between Manual, Automatic and Lift, as well as
introducing the X and Y values.
always before making any machine instruction. With this option enabled, the system will
show the upload/download sheet dialog always when the initialization instruction is
executed.
Work Zone
Figure 17: Work zone configuration
34
 The machine has a work zone: Maximum area the machine is able to process without doing
any sheet reposition. The user will be able to define the Length and the Width. It is necessary
to enable this option so as to display the rest of options.
 Margins: The user will be able to introduce the Left, Right, Upper and Lower margins of the
sheet.
 Fitting: Related to the previous parameters, places/fits the work zone to the Origin, Left,
Right or Center, as required.
If the user selects to Center a sheet that is bigger than the Work Center, the system will adjust the
sheet automatically to the border and the user can select between the following two options:
From Point
Figure 18: From Point configuration
 Zero point of the CNC equal to from point: Select this option to enable the zero point of the
CNC as from point.
 Prompt for this data when initializing: As for other parameters, the system can show this
configuration window when the Initialization process is executed.
35
Reposition
General
Figure 19: Reposition – General configuration
 Retract value in Y: This is the back off distance in Y when opening the clamps. It is applied
before the X carriage is moved providing a clearance between the clamps and the edge of
the sheet.
 Advance value in Y: This is the value that the Y axis moves back after repositioning. Normally
is the same as retract value, but sometimes is smaller to prevent the sheet being "nudged"
by the work clamps if the edge of the sheet is uneven.
 Speed in X: It defines the feed rate in X of the machine when moving the sheet during
repositioning.
 Speed in Y: The feed rate applied to the back off move.
 Fixed value of repositions and value: With this option enabled, the user can specify the
distance to move in a reposition. If this value is bigger than the work zone, the system will
not do any reposition.
36
 X position of reposition: Using this parameter, the user is allowed to define the sheet fixture
point during the automatic repositions. It is only valid when the sheet is fixed by the head or
the pistons. This parameter has the following two options:
 Fit to the edge of active work zone
 Sheet center
 X position offset: The user will be able to define the X position offset.
 Y position of reposition is fixed: The user will be able to select between Fit to the edge of
active work zone and Sheet center.
 Look for a correct Y position of reposition: The system will check for an appropriate position
of the Y axis. It is important to hold the sheet strongly while the clamps are relocated, for
this, the pistons must be in contact with the sheet and not placed over a previously cut hole.
If the user configures upper and lower margin and an increment, the system will scan between these
limits for a valid position, altering the Y value each time by the stated until a suitable position is
found.
 Test for sheet clamps in holes when repositioning: When doing repositions, sometimes the
clamps are placed inside holes resulting in a bad sheet catch. With this parameter enabled,
the system will test each clamp position before placing it on the sheet. The distance
increment for testing must be set up in “Increment of search of correct position” option.
The system will not allow reposition movements if there is not a Minimum number of clamps
catching the sheet properly.
 Minimum number of sheet clamps to grip the sheet: Here the user will be able to set the
minimum number of sheet clamps that will grip the sheet.
 Maximum number of reposition & Maximum increment of reposition: The user can specify
the number repositions to do while machining and the maximum length for any reposition.
The machining will be stopped after reaching the number in maximum number of reposition
instead of making more repositions.
37
Advanced
Figure 20: Reposition – Advanced configuration
 Sheet hold mode when displacing movable clamps: Using this option the user can fit the
sheet with the turret head and with the pistons while moving clamps. The user can select
between: No hold and Pistons.
 Y minimum position: This configuration parameter, which defines Y minimum position,

avoids or shows a warning when the user executes a manual reposition below this Y. The
user will be able to select between: No, Avoid and Ask.
Device
Figure 21: Reposition – Device configuration
38
 Type of reposition: There are three different types of repositions: Pistons, Head or Both of
them. When selecting Pistons, the user will be able to define the Number of pistons and
Coordinates:
 Number of pistons: The user will be able to introduce the required number of pistons.
 Coordinates: Defines the X and Y position of each piston, and the radius values must be
configured here. These values are measured from the cut head center. When selecting Head,
the head will go down to catch the sheet for performing reposition. The system will need to
know the Head radius:
 Head radius: Introduce here the required value in millimeters. If the user selects Both of
them, the reposition will be done with pistons and with head at the same time. The
parameters to configure are Number of pistons and Head radius.
Strategy
Figure 22: Reposition – Strategy configuration
 Mode: The user will be able to select between the following options:
 Normal: Standard one for the machine.
 Go home: This mode will perform the repositions as the standard way, but at the end of the
machining the machine will make another reposition to go back to the home position.
 Inverse: Selecting this mode changes the direction of the sheet. Clicking on Inverse mode
displays four parameters:
39
o Edge of sheet and not go home: The reposition is made to the edge of the sheet first
and when the machine finishes the cut it will not make any reposition at the home
point.
o Not edge of sheet and not go home: The machine goes and cuts the parts directly.
Here home point and edge of the sheet are not considered for reposition.
o Edge of sheet and go home: The machine moves to the edge of the sheet when the
parts have been cut and the head goes back to the home point.
o Not edge of sheet and go home: The head moves directly when the machine starts to
cut the parts and when it finishes the reposition goes to home point.
 Strategy:
 Normal: The system will perform machining of all the work zone and the rest after the
reposition.
 Maximum rigidity: The system will perform one small percent of the work zone and the
rest after the reposition. Using this reposition strategy with maximum rigidity, the
repositions can be improved for all the combined machines. It is possible to configure the
length up to the end of the machining or up to the sheet’s edge. In case of combined
machines, the system can configure the strategy with maximum rigidity in order to use it
for cutting, punching or both.
o Maximum rigidity: The user will be able to select between By parts or By length.
o Maximum length: The user will be able to select between Machining and Sheet
borders.
40
Sheet Parameters
Figure 23: Sheet Parameters configuration
 Sheet margins: This allows the user to specify margins around the sheet. This ensures the
machine is not going to cut out of the sheet and leave enough material to support the parts.
 Point 0 of the sheet: Proceed to select the 0,0 point of the sheet between the four corners
highlighted. This will be the reference point for the coordinates. The selected corner will be
displayed in red color as shown below:
 X & Y: In these fields the user may introduce a displacement in X and Y for the previously
detailed point 0 of the sheet.
 Remnant margin: When a remnant is generated from the current sheet, if there is any value
here, the remnant will be created with these margins.
41
 Respect sheet margins on remnants: This dialogue allows the user to specify margins around
the sheet. This ensures the machine is not going to cut or punch out of the sheet and leave
enough material to support the parts. In the example shown, the lower margin is larger to
avoid the clamp zone. The X and Y values are the coordinates that the system will take for
the selected red point. Normally this point is the 0,0 because it is the point where the head
will be placed before cutting.
 Display sheet reference in status bar: If this parameter is activated, the reference of the
sheet will be displayed in the status area while working on the nesting.
 Sheet status: Indicate the fold status of the sheet through one of the numbers in the list. (0 =
completely flat, 9 = very irregular). This parameter may be useful if the postprocessor uses it
to calculate the distance that the head must come down in order to cut/punch for trying to
avoid collisions with sheet.
 Anti-scratch: This parameter's objective is that the rapid movements are done at a higher
distance for not scratching the sheet. When the movement is from one hole to another with
the head down, instead of the normal height, with this enabled it will go a little higher.
 Rotation: With this option the user can visualize the sheet rotated 900, 1800, and 2700. It also
allows making sheet symmetry around the X or Y axis. This parameter is not configurable
through the system yet. It is possible to configure it modifying the parameter A266 of the
selected machine CT file.
 Minimum length and width: Using these parameters the user can limit the minimum
dimensions of a sheet.
 Maximum length and width: Using this parameter the user can limit the maximum
dimensions of a sheet.
42
Sheet Turn Over
Figure 24: Sheet Turn Over configuration
 The machine has automatic turn over device: If enabled, many other parameters will become
activated.
 Center of rotation: With this parameter the user can configure the Center of rotation point in
X and Y direction.
 Rotation sense: The user can select between three options: Clock wise, Counter clock wise and
Both of them.
 Pistons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5: The user can select the piston position as Circular or Rectangular. The X
and Y position of each piston. In case of circular pistons, the user will have to introduce the
Radius and Angle, while rectangular ones will require the Length and Width. These values are
measured from the cut head center.
 Turn over type: The user can select between the following options: Request, Manual rotation
of 180°, Manual rotation of 90°, Manual symmetry, Automatic rotation of 180° and Automatic
rotation of 90°.
43
 Rotation sense: The user can select between three options: Request, Clock wise and Counter
clock wise.
 Pressing position: The user can select between three options: Request, Fixed and Sheet
center.
 Sheet rotation point: The user can select between four options: Request, Fixed, Equal to
pressing point and Avoiding collisions with clamps.
 Previous position point to turn over: The user can select between the following options:
 Request: It allows the user to select the previous position point to turn over.
 Fixed point of the sheet: The user can specify the Fixed point in X and Y direction.
 From point: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Lower left corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Lower right corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Upper right corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Upper left corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Sheet center: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Cancel repositions when executing the turn over: Using this option the user can cancel
reposition. If there were any reposition before the sheet turnover, after executing it, all the
reposition will be cancelled keeping the working zone as it was at the beginning.
44
Bevel Head Data
Head Data
Figure 25: Bevel Head Data- Head Data configuration
 Type: Using this option it is possible to specify the head type that the user will use. The head
bevel data will be of a different type depending on its use.
 Normal: With this option it is possible to make straight cuts in 3 axes only without any
inclination.
 Triple head: As in Normal, the machine is configured with three heads in order to work with
three heads at once.
 5 Axis: In this, it is possible to define two angles to rotate head part depending upon the
type of head that the user has selected.
o When selecting Type A the AB corresponds to X axis and CC to Z axis.
o When selecting Type B the AB corresponds to Y axis and CC to Z axis.
When selecting Others then the AB and CC correspond to the axis that the user indicates.
 Tangential: Using this option, it is possible to rotate the head only over one axis, and it is
also possible to define the maximum and the minimum angle of the rotation.
45
 Tangential 5X: This option is the same as 5 axis with a tangential sensor that measure the
height of the sheet, because of that the head can cut only in one direction.
 Tangential as triple: This is for bevel machines with one head that work tangentially. In this
type of machines, the coordinates required for each pass are the same.
 Use machining dimension on nesting: When selecting Three heads, this option is displayed. It
enables selecting between No, Yes and Orthogonal.
Bevels Management
Figure 26: Bevel Head Data – Bevels Management configuration
 Type of cut: Depending on the type of cut, three different options are specified:
 By elements: Using this option, the user can cut the edges of the part separately (Finish all
the cut of a segment before beginning with the next one).
 Group by same type: This option allows the user to join the edges with the same kind of
bevel (For example: upper with upper and lower with lower).
 Group by same angle: This option allows the user to join the consecutive edges with the
same type of angle (For example: 30º with 30º, 45º with 45º, etc.).
46
 Discretization length:
 On segments: This option defines the distance to discretize a segment when the initial
vector and the final vector are not the same.
 On arcs: This option defines the distance to discretize an arc when the initial vector and the
final vector are not the same.
 On variable arcs: This option defines the distance to discretize a variable arc when the initial
vector and the final vector are not same. If the distance defined is bigger than the size of
the segment, the machine divides this segment in two parts.
 Compensation:
 Default: The compensation is based on the default configuration of the machine.
 System (all elements): The compensation is based on the system configuration.
 System (bevel elements): Only bevel elements will be compensated by system (total or
variable). The system will not compensate orthogonal elements of the contour.
 System (variable bevel elements): Only variable bevel elements will be compensated by
system. It will not compensate neither orthogonal elements nor total bevel elements.
 Auxiliary elements:
 Minimum length on loops: The machine cuts more of the normal line, if there will be a loop.
 Length for auxiliary lead in: Select the auxiliary lead-in length of the loop to cut the part.
 Length for auxiliary lead out: Select the auxiliary lead-out length to cut the lines of a part.
 Angle to avoid double cut: In some cases, if the user has to make double or triple bevel the
lead out of one of the cuts, coincide with the lead in of the other, to avoid this problem the
user can select this angle and it will be applied in one of them.
47
 Order of loops: With this option, it is possible to define the order in which the user wants to
cut a segment with different bevels. The machine will cut the bevel in a fixed order such as
Lower, Orthogonal and Upper. The order of the loops will get changed based on the options
selected. For example, when selecting an option as orthogonal then the second and third will
get modified to upper and lower or vice versa.
 Angle for tangential cut: To join two consecutive bevels, introduce 90 degrees, which is the
maximum angle between the perpendicular line and the bisector. This is very important for
tangential machines.
 Limit angle on bevels: To join two consecutive bevels, introduce 80 degrees, which is the
maximum angle of the straight line between both (the inclination of the line that merge both
bevels to make it continuously), and it considers the maximum inclination that is to be cut by
the machine.
 Join without lead in when same line: When changing the inclination of a cutting line, instead
of introducing a lead out or lead in we can make a joined cut to change this inclination.
 Compensation by type of bevel: Using this option, we will able to configure the
compensation for each type of bevel in material thickness dependent data.
 Special management of loops: This parameter enables a special loop for those parts with
inner bevels and prevents the head from passing over the parts.
 Prompt for data before automatic machining: This configuration parameter allows showing
and modifying the bevel management data prior to machining the part.
 Tangential mode: The main reasons to work tangentially are two. First, between the two
solutions that each vector of a 5-axis machine has, to avoid the solution in which the heat
produced by the cut directly affects the cutting head. Secondly, to ensure that the side of the
cutting head that runs around the part is always the same. In order to do so, the user can
select between the following options in the drop-down list:
 Normal: It refers to the closest AB vector to the direction.
 Inverse: It refers to the furthest AB vector to the direction.
48
 Tangential mode for straight cutting: By means of this checkbox the user will be able to
establish whether straight cuts will be executed in tangential mode or not.
 Remove micro-joints on last loop: By means of this parameter, the user can configure not to
take into account the micro-joint on the last loop.
 Round the corners: This parameter allows rounding the corners of bevel elements. The
radius of this rounding will be specified using a percentage of the cutter radius and it will be
applied to all contours or only to inside or outside contours.
 Distance to position the angle of the next corner: This parameter allows specifying a
particular distance in order to position the head in the angle of the next corner. If no distance
is defined, the system will use all the distance of the geometric element to position the head
in the next angle. If a distance is defined, this will be used to position the head in the next
angle.
General
Geometry
Figure 27: General – Geometry configuration
 Linear tolerance & Angular tolerance: Necessary values for the system to make calculations.
 Use the minimum rectangle of parts: If this parameter is enabled, the parts will be turned so
that the rectangle formed by the corners of the selected part has the minimum area. The
user can define the Favorite position for the minimal rectangle, where it is possible to choose
between Any, Horizontal and Vertical.
49
 Process lead-in/lead-out, loops and micro-joints in automatic nesting: If this parameter is

activated, the space needed for leads, loops and micro-joints will be considered in Automatic
Nesting. The space left between parts could be enough but the system is not going to
guarantee avoiding the overlapping of parts with leads, loops or micro-joints unless this
option is enabled. All the lead-in/lead-outs, loops and micro-joints will be considered
regardless of how they have been introduced of if they have been modified in the sheet.
 Automatic lead-in/lead-out position dependent on the part rotation: If the previous

parameter is enabled, and the lead-in/lead-outs are placed in the sheet automatically, these
lead-in/lead-outs will not be taken into account neither in the automatic nesting nor when
introducing parts on the sheet, since the lead-in/lead-outs are placed once the parts have
been already introduced in the sheet. In order to avoid this problem, this parameter allows
introducing lead-ins/lead-outs automatically in the part when inserting the part in the sheet.
This way, these lead-in/lead-outs will be considered in the automatic nesting and when
inserting parts on the sheet, meanwhile their position will be the one corresponding to the
side or corner configured in the Automatic lead-in/lead-outs of the machine. Depending on
the rotation of the part placed on the sheet, the lead-in/lead-outs will be introduced in
different positions to respect the configured side or corner. The user can select any of the
following values:
 No: Depending on the rotation whenever inserting the part in the sheet, the system will not
introduce lead-ins/lead-outs automatically.
 Only in interiors: The system will introduce lead-in/lead-outs automatically depending on

the rotation of the part exterior.
50
 Big interiors and exteriors: The system will introduce lead-in/lead-outs automatically
depending on the big interiors of the part, as well as the exteriors. Interiors shall be
considered big when it is possible to nest parts inside them. In order to determine this, the
user must make use of the separation between parts and Minimum area to insert part holes
parameter located in automatic nesting configuration.
 Interiors and exteriors: The system will introduce lead-in/lead-outs automatically depending
on the rotation of all the contours of the part.
In order to enable this parameter, “Process lead-in/lead-outs, loops and micro-joints in

automatic nesting” parameter must be enabled.
 Calculate the part dimensions without any auxiliary geometry: Auxiliary geometries are
those which are included with the part for the machining process: leads, loops, micro-joints.
If this option is enabled, the system will use the real part dimension without these
geometries.
 Restrict rotations in manual mode: If enabled, the system will either allow or not using a
determined rotation if defined like that in the part properties. The user will be able to select
between the following options:
 No: The system will not allow using a determined rotation.
 Use the same rotations as in the automatic nesting: The system will use the rotations
defined in the automatic nesting.
 Use the rotations defined in the part properties: The system will use the rotations defined
in the part properties.
 Prompt for data when ordering contours: The system will assign automatically cutting order
to the contours when saving the part or when the nesting module is executed. When this
option is enabled, the system will display Contour Ordering dialog box, where the user will be
able to set the required order for both interior and exterior contours.
51
Part Changes
Figure 28: General – Part changes configuration
 Replace punch with cut: If enabled, the system will replace all the punching of the part by
cutting.
 Mark: It will only be enabled if the previous parameter is activated, and the user will be able
to replace the punching of a part by the desired type of marking: No, Powder, Drill, Pen or Cut.
 Prompt for this data: If enabled, the system will show a window allowing the configuration
of the previous parameters in the case of entering in the nesting module after changing a
nested part.
 Do in case of part change: Once the nesting has been executed, if a part is changed, the
system can execute one of the following actions: Nothing, Keep the nesting and Remake the
nesting. If the user selects Keep the nesting, the following option will be enabled:
 Show on sheet the machining modifications made on parts: If enabled, this option will keep
the existing machining on the part. On the contrary, if not, all the machining in the sheet will
be deleted. If the user selects Remake the nesting, the following options will be enabled:
 Warn in case that the parts don’t fit on the nesting: If due to modifications all the previous
nested parts do not fit on the sheet, the program will show a warning message if this
parameter is enabled.
52
 Insert more parts if it is possible: Due to the changes made on the part, there may be more
space on sheet that the system can use for placing more parts. Enabling this parameter will
make the system to test this.
Auxiliar
Figure 29: General - Auxiliar configuration
 Parts template name: Name of the file that has the parameter to print the list of parts.
 Sheets template name: Name of the file that has the parameter to print the list of boxes.
 Part time: It refers to the cut time that will be calculated in the Drawing module. The user can
select between the following three options:
 System: The system will calculate the time internally.
 Time calculation: The calculation will be done using the required postprocessor. Take into
account that the sheet upload and download times configured in the machine will be added
to the part time. However, the user can configure not to take them into account.
 Postprocessor: The calculation will be done using the postprocessor of the current machine.
This option is used in water machines where the speed changes frequently.
53
 Generate information for labels: If enabled, the system will create a label for each part and
this information will be stored in the database. If not, all the label reports will be empty.
 Work only with unitary parts (fast entry to nesting module): If enabled, each geometry part
that is machined will be considered as an independent part. With this parameter enabled, the
user will only be able to work with unitary parts. Take into account that unitary parts cannot
be used when working in multipart mode.
Cut
Figure 30: General – Cut configuration
 Automatic contours - Warn if there is interior geometry not machined when cutting: If
enabled the user will be warned when there is no machined geometry inside a contour when
using Automatic contours option.
 No
 Yes, and cut the contour
 Yes, and not to cut the contour
54
Startup
General
Figure 31: Startup – General configuration
 Execute every rapid with head up: If enabled, the machine will be instructed to raise the
cutting head before every rapid movement. This parameter is used for safety, to prevent
head damages.
 The machine has laser-eye: The laser-eye is a device of some laser machines used to detect
and avoid possible collisions with the head. If enabled, the system will use it. When clicking
Navigation ( ) button the system will display a dialog box, where it is possible to select
between the following laser-eye methods: Don´t use it, Measure 1 sheet border, Measure 2
holes, Measure 3 points (third point in X) and Measure 3 points (third point in Y).
 PartNo: The CNC file will take the same name assigned to the PartNo. Which is the internal
name of the CNC files and can be assigned in different ways through the following
parameters:
 Default: The Part No. will be assigned by default using the value introduced in the box
PartNo.
 Automatic: The Part No. will take an automatic value that will increase for subsequent
CNCs. Six additional parameters will be displayed:
55
 Reset PartNo: This option will reset the CNC's counter.
 Minimum: PartNo: Minimum number of characters for the PartNo.
 Maximum: PartNo: Maximum number of characters for the PartNo.
 Step of the PartNo: The number of steps used for the PartNo.
 Number of characters (e.g. 8): Number of characters for the PartNo.
 Previous text (e.g. P): The first characters of the PartNo.
Pre-initialization
Figure 32: Startup – Pre-initialization configuration
 Explode modules: With this option, the user can execute the machining pre-initialization. It
allows exploding all the modules before the machining initialization.
 Delete the machining totally outside of the sheet: This option will delete the machining done
outside of the sheet. It will be configurable if the parameter "Prompt for the data when
initializing" from Startup menu is active, or when the user initializes the sheet.
56
 Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: By this option, the remnant line will be
created automatically and with the shape configured by the user. The following two
parameters will become activated:
 Delete existing remnants: By using this option, the user can delete the existing remnants
that are created by the cutting line of the remnant automatically. If any remnant exists and
there is no configuration to delete them, it will not be possible to delete the remnant line
nor generate a new one.
 Delete existing remnant line: The user can use this option for the deletion of existing
remnants line. If any remnant line exists and there is no configuration to delete it, will not
be possible to create a new one.
Feed Rates
Figure 33: Startup – Feed rates configuration
 Feed rates: The machine speeds can be configured in this section, which comprises Cut speed,
Beveled speed, Powder mark speed, Drill mark speed, Pen mark speed, Cut mark speed, Wheel-
tool speed, Rapid speed and Prompt for this data when initializing.
57
CNC
Figure 34: CNC configuration
 Prompt for CNC reference: This option is used when a nesting module or nesting part is
saved. There are four options: No, Only if the sheet is new and the file already exists, Only if the
sheet is new and Always.
 CNC name = Job: If this parameter is enabled, the name of the CNC file will start with the
name of the manufacturing order. When selecting this, it will be possible to select the
number of characters, as well as to enable Allow large names and Add job reference options.
 CNC name = PartNo: The CNC file will take the same name assigned to the PartNo which is
the internal name of the CNC files.
 Directory of CNC files: All the CNC code files will be stored in the directory set here.
 Extension of CNC files: This file will display the extension of CNC parameters. The extension
of the file can be configured in the final CNC operation.
 Group CNC files in folders: This parameter allows grouping the CNC files of a specific
machine according to certain criteria, which is very useful when working with large amounts
of files. It allows combining a series of fields that will determine the folder structure.
58
Sheet Remnants
When the machining for a sheet only takes up a small part of the total area, sometimes there is a
piece of the sheet we are interested in keeping for future use, which is referred as remnant. The
system can automatically generate these remnants and manage them in the database. This is very
useful when the user wants to use one of these remnants for another order. The system can be
configured to recognize these remnants and store them in the sheets database when saving the
nest.
Figure 35: Sheet Remnants configuration
 Generate remnants when you save: If enabled, the system will automatically generate a
remnant for the current sheet when saving.
 Generate remnants with the completed sheets: The system will keep on the database the
whole sheet after cutting the parts. Sometimes this is useful if the sheet has been machined
with a few parts and is better not to cut it for remnants. The user can get this sheet for
nesting and machining more parts taking advantage of the remaining space of the sheet.
 Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: This option allows generating
remnants with different shapes depending on the area value. The different shapes available
are shown below:
59
 Offset between the parts and the line: This value will determine the distance between the
remnant´s cutting line and every part nested on the sheet.
Figure 36: Offset between the parts and the remnant line example
 Minimum width: The value of this parameter is the minimum allowed for using a little space
of the sheet that is between parts in the limit of the remnant's cutting line.
Figure 37: Minimum width of hollows example
 Round the remnant line: With this option the user can round the remnant line automatically
when it is generated. The first parameter allows activating this option, while the second one
asks the value for the round radius. This option is also available for combined machines.
 Delete the remnant area around parts: If enabled, the system will not take into account
those remnants generated between the part and the remnant line or between parts.
 Minimum area of remnants: This value indicates the minimum area of the remnants to be
considered as such.
 Consider the auxiliary geometry: If enabled, remnants will be generated taking into account
auxiliary geometry. This option is configurable and the user will be able to select between the
following options:
60
 0: the base has a value 10 times linear tolerance.
 Cutter diameter: the base has this value.
 Remnants can be rotated: The remnant will be generated as configured, but with this
parameter enabled, the system will look for the best position of the remnant for placing the
cutting head (from-point) of the machine into the sheet. The user will be able to choose
between Not allow rotations, Allow rotations, Prioritize horizontal and Prioritize vertically.
 Allow to turn over the remnant: This option makes possible the rotation for the remnants.
 Prompt for references when generating remnants: The system generates a reference
automatically for each remnant. But if this checkbox is enabled, at the moment of generating
a new remnant from the sheet, the system will ask for the reference.
Save Options
General
Figure 38: Save options – General configuration
 Generate labels automatically: When machining parts automatically or by parts, the system
generates automatically one Begin span and one End span for each part. Then verifies what is
between the spans and if there are equal codes, one subprogram will be generated.
If the user executes the machining of the part by contours, spans will not be generated and,
because of this, no subprograms will be used for the CNC. Enabling this parameter will force the system
to verify the machining code inserting spans between the beginning and the end of equal code. Then will
generate subprograms for these codes although they are only for contours, not for whole parts.
61
Subprograms
When there is one part nested many times in the sheet, the CNC code generated for this
aforementioned part can be used for the rest of equal parts that have to be nested. Using
subprograms will result in smaller CNC codes, which is very useful when the numeric control of the
machine has limited memory.
Figure 39: Save options – Subprograms configuration
 Generate subprograms: The system will try to generate subprograms.
 Linear subprograms: If possible, the system will detect and apply linear subprograms in the
CNC.
 Subprogram rotation: If there is a possibility to use subprograms with rotations, the system
will apply them generating the proper CNC code.
 Grid subprograms: The grid subprograms generation will be supported using this option.
 Linear tolerance & Angular tolerance: These values are the linear and angular tolerance for
calculations of the system.
 Subprograms by contours: If enabled, the system will create subprograms for each different
contour, and then will execute them in the same order.
 Only subprograms by reference: If enabled, the system will automatically repeat the
subprogram when performing equal parts. Therefore, the subprogram will only be generated
once.
62
 Delete subprograms which are executed once: If enabled, the groups of instructions that are
only executed as a subprogram once will not be considered.
 Definition point: The definition point is the reference point taken by the subprogram. This
reference will be used for generating the rest of the equal parts from the first one.
Part Saving
There are some options that can be executed automatically when the user saves a part. This is a
powerful feature for saving time.
Figure 40: Save options – Part saving configuration
 Verify part: This option will verify the part immediately after saving the part. When clicking
the Navigation button, a dialog box is displayed.
 Contour ordering: If this option is activated before saving the part or the nesting, the system
will keep the direction of the contours as they were before nesting.
 Automatic technology: Automatic technology will be applied depending on the configuration

previously set.
 Automatic loops: The Loop values previously set in configuration will be applied.
63
 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out: The automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values previously set in

configuration will be applied.
 Automatic machining: This parameter allows machining the part automatically when saving
it. The user may machine the part completely of finish machining it after having executed
manually or semi-automatically part of the machining. This parameter allows, alternatively,
assigning “No cut” technology to those geometric elements that are not machined and have
no technology assigned. Find detailed below the different values available:
 No: Do not execute automatic machining.
 Yes: Machine everything feasible that has not been machined yet.
 Only if there is machining: The system will finish machining the part only if there is already
something machined in it.
 Ask: The system will always ask what is required to be machined. Whenever saving the part,
the system will display a dialog box where the user will be able to select the required
option.
 Ask only if there is machining: The system will ask what is required to be machined.
Whenever saving the part, the system will display a dialog box where the user will be able
to select the required option.
 Assign no cut technology: If No option is selected, “Assign no cut technology” parameter

will be displayed. If enabled, given the case there is something machined on the part, the
system will assign “No cut” technology to all those elements that are not machined and
have no technology assigned.
64
Execution Nesting Module

When the nesting module is executed, there are some options that can be applied automatically.
Figure 41: Save options – Execution nesting module configuration
 Delete existent machining: With this option the user can delete existent machining features.
When this parameter is enabled, the user can select between the following features by
selecting the navigation button: Machining, Auxiliary geometry, Technology and No cut
technology.
 Automatic mark: When entering to the Nesting module, the system will introduce the name
of the part inside their geometry and will assign marking technology. With this, the identifier
for each part can be automatically marked into the part. When selecting the navigation
button, the Automatic mark dialog box is displayed.
65
Figure 42: Automatic mark dialog box
 Text: The text given here will be marked into the part. Using “#” symbol followed by a
number will make the system introduce the identifier. Depending on the number #0: Part
reference, #1: Customer, #2: Order number, #3: Plan number. And "\" character will finish
the line and insert a new one.
 Mark although they are machined: If this parameter is enabled, the system will execute the
marking even if the parts have already been machined.
 Technology: Once the user has determined which text and identifiers will be marked, the
next step is to specify which marking technology the machine will use: Powder, Drill, Pen or
Cut.
 Height of one character: This is the height of the text that will be marked.
 Vertical separation: The value given here is the vertical separation between lines.
 Automatic separation between characters: If this parameter is enabled, the system will
separate the characters automatically.
66
 Horizontal separation between characters: This parameter will only be enabled if

“Automatic separation between characters” is disabled. It allows introducing manually the
horizontal separation between characters.
 Correct position: The values of the offset will determine the distance between the external
contour of the part and the marked text.
o Offset {X (e.g. 10,000), Y (e.g. 20,000)}: Introduce the required offset in X and in Y.
o Search step {X (e.g. 5,000), Y (e.g. 5,000)}: In this example, Expert will test every 5
mm if the position for the text is good or not.
 Angle step: When the system is searching for the correct position for an automatic text, if
the correct position is not fount by means of the initial angle, it is possible to configure the
system to rotate the text based on an angle step to search for the required position.
 Initial angle: The user must introduce the initial angle in which the system will try to
position the text when looking for a correct position.
 Step for height: Apart from rotating the text, it is also possible to configure the system to
modify the size of the text in order to search for the correct position with the new size. In
order to do this, the user will have to configure the step for height.
 Minimum height: As previously mentioned, it is possible to modify the size of the text in
order to search for the correct position with the new size. In order to do this, the user will
have to configure the minimum height of the text.
 Thickness: This is the distance between marked lines. If this value is higher than 0, then the
user can obtain different style characters. The drawn schema is the way Expert will mark
the "O" character:
67
 Automatic position: using the values introduced in Correct position section of this window,
Expert will try to select automatically the best position possible. If disabled, the user will be
able to choose the position to place the marked text:
 Continuous text: Given the case this parameter is enabled, the system will introduce
continuous text. As soon as it is enabled, a navigation button will be displayed on the right
side, which will direct the user to Continuous text dialog box as shown below:
Figure 43: Continuous text dialog box
o % Text size (D): Introduce the required text size percentage.
o Angle (W): Introduce the required angle.
 Reference text: With this option the user can define the reference text for the automatic
marking. If in any part there is a reference text, it will be changed by the one defined for the
automatic marking. This new text will be placed in the same place (central point), and with
the same reference angle.
 Delete the text if it does not fit in the part: This option deletes the text that does not fit in
the part.
 Contour ordering: If this option is activated before saving the part or the nesting, the system
will keep the direction of the contours as they were before nesting.
 Automatic technology: Automatic technology will be applied depending of the configuration

previously set.
68
 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out: The system will apply automatically the settings of Automatic
Lead-in/Lead-out configuration.
 Automatic round angles: This parameter is used to avoid sharp or abrupt changes in
direction. The system will apply automatically the settings of Loop values previously set.
Depending on the angle of change, it might be interesting either to introduce a loop or to
round angles.
 Automatic loops: The system will apply automatically the settings of Loop values previously
set.
 Automatic micro-joints: The system will apply automatically the configuration previously set
in Automatic micro-joints values.
 Automatic micro-joints at end of contour: The system will insert automatic micro-joints at
the end of the contour. When clicking the navigation button, the Automatic micro-joints at
end of contour dialog box is displayed.
 Change micro-joints into micro-joints with lead-ins: The system will automatically change the
micro-joints into micro-joints with lead-ins.
 Redefine lead-ins/outs depending on machine configuration: As the name of the parameter

says, the system will redefine the lead-in/outs depending on machine configuration.
 Redefine micro-joints depending on machine configuration: As the name of the parameter

says, the system will redefine the micro-joints depending on machine configuration.
 Check if parts are completely machined: This parameter allows defining if, when entering
Nesting and Machining module, the system will test whether a part has been completely
machined or not. The aim of this test is to provide a more detailed information regarding the
status of the parts in the list of parts of Nesting and Machining module. This information will
be displayed both in the title bar of the parts “Not completely machined” and in their tooltips.
69
Material/Thickness Dependent Data

Obviously, the machining process will not always be the same when using different materials and
thickness. Therefore, some of the machining parameters will need to change when choosing
different materials or specify a different thickness.
Before configuring any parameter, the user must create pairs of material-thickness limits, and from
there, all the changes made to the values of each section will be associated to that material.
Figure 44: Material/Thickness dependent data configuration
Cutting Parameters
 Cutter radius: For the specified material between the given thickness, the system will use the
value given here as the radius for the cutter.
 Piercing radius: This parameter allows the user to define the piercing radius depending on
quality, thickness and material.
 Corrector for holes: Some numeric controls have different corrector for interiors or
exteriors. Here, the user can configure the corrector number which the numeric control is
going to use for interior contours.
 Corrector for exteriors: In this case, the numeric control will use this number of corrector for
exterior contours. The numeric control corrector values must be programmed for using this
properly.
70
 Level of optimization: Optimization level can be configured as per the material/thickness. If

the option <> is selected, the configuration of the corresponding machine is considered
applied, as the one defined in CT, otherwise the level chosen will be applied. Different part
rotations per material/thickness can be defined, and blocked if required (only 0º rotation
should exist). This will require the definition of rotation angle parameter optimization level of
parts at 360º.
 Separation of parts: Here the user will have to introduce the value of separation between
parts in millimeters.
 Allow different separation in Y: The system will allow different separation in Y depending on
the specified material.
 Cut speed: This cut speed will be applied for any job done in the specified material.
 Beveled speed: This speed will be applied for making bevels for any job done in the specified
material. This value will be used only for machines with bevel cutting possibilities.
 Management by material/thickness: If enabled the cutting parameters will be managed by

material/thickness.
 User fast cut mode in holes (flying cut): In case of enabled, the parameters involved in the
implementation will be obtained from the general configuration.
 Compensations by quality: Using this parameter the user can apply system compensation
and/or control corrections depending on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of cut.
This option will allow defining the following parameters with different data for each quality:
Corrector for holes, Corrector for exteriors, Compensation radius for holes and
Compensation radius for exteriors.
 Compensation by angle: By clicking this option, you will get Compensation by angle dialog
box, where you can view Angle, Theoretical, CNC angle and Compensation field. Using this
parameter, the following options can be configured: Add angle, Delete, Recalc all and View all.
71
Sheets Parameters
 Sheet status: Indicate the fold status of the sheet through one of the numbers in the list. (0 =
completely flat, 9 = very irregular). This parameter may be useful if the postprocessor uses it
to calculate the distance that the head must come down in order to cut for trying to avoid
collisions with sheet.
 Remnant margin: When a remnant is generated from the current sheet, if there is any value
here, the remnant will be created with these margins.
 Sheet margins: This allows the user to specify margins around the sheet. This ensures the
machine is not going to cut out of the sheet and leave enough material to support the parts.
Automatic Technology
The system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 45: Automatic technology dialog box
Find detailed below the different fields provided:
 Minimum and maximum radius: The parts are classified here by area. The system calculates
the area of a part, and then generates internally the circle with the same area. Minimum and
maximum radiuses designate the areas of the circles that correspond to the areas of the
contours.
72
 Cutting quality: The color which will be used for each cutting quality can be configured too.
The user can configure the cutting quality of each contour.
 Apply in contours: Here the user can select to which contours will be the automatic
technology applied. The user can select between the following options in the drop-down list:
All contours, Inside, Outside, Circular internal contours, Rectangular internal contours and
Obround internal contours. The last three types of contours are the most restrictive.
 New: This button will create a new entry on the cutting quality assignation table.
 Delete: This button will delete the selected entry on the cutting quality assignation table.
 Dot small contours: The system will assign a dot cycle to all the contours whose radius is
below the minimum radius, but only if the configured minimum radius is bigger than 0. The
action to take on each dot cycle should be previously configured on Dot cycles by default.
 Mark small contours: If the minimum radius is bigger than 0, the mark technology chosen
here (powder, drill, pen, cut) will be applied automatically to all the contours whose radius is
below the minimum ones.
With the aim to show more information to those users that work with different values depending on
the cutting qualities, a new mark has been included in those qualities that will be assigned by means
of this option. Given the case that automatic qualities have been assigned in the previous window,
the system will display extra information in some of the system options where it is possible to assign
different values per quality. For instance, the system will add a “*” in the tabs of the following
option:
Figure 46: Compensations by quality dialog box
73
Head Raising Test

 Management by material/thickness: It is necessary to enable this parameter in order to
visualize the rest, which allows managing the Head raising test by each material and
thickness.
 Head raising test: This indicates that the system will have special care with the machine head,
if disabled, the automatic machining process will not manage the head movement.
 Make the head raising test while saving: The system will test even if the system has been
configured for making all the rapid movements with the head up.
 Maximum hollow & Offset: When moving over a hole, the head may result damaged. The
distance may have different values depending on the chosen option:
 Maximum hollow: Is the maximum distance inside the hole that the system will allow the
head to pass over.
 Offset: Is the minimum distance between the hole and the head movement.
 Maximum length with head down: This is the maximum trajectory in mm described by the
head when is down.
 Maximum number of rapid tracts: The system will try the given number of tracts to avoid
holes.
 Modify lead-in/outs: The system will allow changing the situation of the lead-in/outs to
optimize the head management of the machining process. The user will be able to select
between: No, By parts and By contours.
 Apply head up at end of each part: When the machining process of a part has been done, the
system will send an order to the machine for lifting the head.
 Head up for common cut elements: The special case of common cut elements is what this
option configures. When a common cut element has been finalized, the head will go up.
74
Machining Order
 Management by material/thickness: This check must be activated in order to activate the
rest of parameters.
 Machining order: There are three options available: By parts, By contours and By minimum
heat.
 By parts: By selecting this option, it will be possible to configure Order mode of the
holes, which offers the following options: None, By proximity and By direction. If the user
selects By proximity, it will be possible to configure Path optimization and Method. The
method can be Normal or Optimized. If the user selects Optimized, it will be also
possible to introduce Number of passes. If the user selects By direction, it will be possible
to configure the Direction of the machining order. The direction can be Horizontal and
Vertical. It will also be possible to configure options like Cut in zig zag and Cut small
holes first and Orthogonality tolerance.
 By contours: If the user selects By contours, the machining will be ordered by contours.
Here the user can select between the following options: By zones, Start point and
direction, By size (largest to smallest) and By size (smallest to largest).
 Minimum heat: If the user selects Minimum heat, the system will distribute the cut zones
with the objective of not to cut the same area consecutively. This option can be based
on the following criteria: By zones, By parts and By contours.
Lead-in/Lead-out Values
 Lead-in/Lead-out values: With this option you can configure a machine’s approach
parameters. The user can assign manually leads for each part, this can be done with the leads
toolbar which appears if choosing the Technology - Lead in-Lead out option of the menu in
both drawing and nesting module.
75
 Special lead-in/lead-outs for circular holes: It is possible to select this check box to enable
special lead-in/lead-outs for holes. When selecting this, the Lead-in/lead-out values dialog box
allows the user to set the parameters for the special lead-in/lead-outs. Enter the distance in
‘D’ field, radius values in ‘R1’, ‘R2’, and ‘R3’ fields. It is also possible to enter the additional
distance value in ‘H’ field.
 Circle angles: If the user wants to place the lead manually, sometimes happen that this lead
cannot be placed in the exact clicked point. The value of this parameter will help to system to
decide where to put it. The meaning is the angle step the system will use for placing the lead.
For example, with a 90 circles angle value, the lead will be placed in the nearest quadrant
point to clicked one: 0, 90, 180, 270. If the system cannot place on nearest position, it will try
on next 90-degree point. For a value of 30, the system is going to try to put the lead on every
30 degrees from the clicked point: 0, 30, 60, 90, 120.
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values

If the user selects to assign the leads automatically, it is necessary to configure some parameters.
1. To use snap in order to place the lead in or lead out. With this the user will be able to dynamically
drag lead in with the mouse. To define the lead in, the user should define a line (2 points option)
crossing the contour where the lead in is going to be placed. There are two different ways to define
this lead in: Automatic, which take the values from the automatic lead in option, and Manual where
the user has to define the type for the lead in. There is an orthogonal selection mode (F2), which
allows moving the lead only in horizontal or vertical to the coordinate system.
2. If the user configures it in the Save options section of the machine configuration. In these
dialogues, the user can choose if it will insert lead-in/lead-out automatically when saving the part,
or when entering on the nesting module.
76
3. In both drawing and nesting modules, the user can select Technology -> Lead-in/Lead-outs ->
Automatic option to execute automatic lead-in/lead-out assignation or by using the automatic
toolbar button.
 Management by qualities: If the cutting qualities are used for the job, the system allows
configuring different values for the Lead-in/Lead-out when using the automatic assignation.
With this checkbox enabled, the window will show twelve tabs which are related to each of
the twelve available cutting qualities.
From Material-thickness dependent data - Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out, the cutting qualities

checkbox is not enabled. If the user wants to configure them depending on material-thickness, first the
Management by qualities checkbox must be enabled on Configure Machine - Cutting machine -
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out.
 Zone: When using automatic leads, the user can choose the place where the system will try
first placing the lead. It is possible to select different positions for exterior contours of parts
and for holes.
Figure 47: Automatic lead-in/lead-out zones
77
Find briefly detailed below the different types of contours:
All the circular holes
All the circular exteriors
All the squared and

rectangled holes
All the squared and

rectangled exteriors
All the obround holes
All the irregular exteriors
 Modify button: A different Lead-in/out type can be assigned per each contour, as shown in
the images provided below:
78
Figure 48: Lead-in/lead-out types
 Constraints button: Click this button to configure restrictions for the lead-in and lead-out.
You can configure the following parameters:
 Minimum length: This is the minimum length in which one lead can be placed.
 Minimum radius: The meaning is the same as the previous parameter, is for security on
placing leads on big enough segments. In this case, the system will look for the radius and if
is not bigger than this value will look for another segment.
 Maximum angle: If the lead is for a corner, if the two segments constitute an angle bigger
than this value, the system will not place the lead and will try with different type of lead.
 Minimum angle: When the lead is for an interior contour, the system will test the angle
between these segments and if is smaller than the value given here, will not place it.
 Maximum angle: The same as previous one, if the angle of the interior contour's segments
is bigger that the value of this parameter, the system will not place the lead.
Micro-Joint Values
 Lead-in/Lead-out values (A, D, S & Radius): Specify A, D, S, and Radius values here for lead-in
and lead-out.
79
 Circle angles: When the micro-joint is assigned manually, the system will try to put it in the
exact clicked point, but this is not always possible. With this parameter, the system will
decide where to put it. The value meaning is the angle step the system will use for placing
the micro-joint in relation to clicked point.
Automatic Micro-Joint Values

 Micro-joint types: The system supports automatically different types of micro-joints. For each
one, there are some parameters that must be configured. Introduce D, A, S and Radius
parameters.
Figure 49: Micro-joint types
 Circle angles: This value is used in order to test positions for placing micro-joints. The
meaning is the angle step the system will use for placing the micro-joints near the clicked
point.
 Distance between micro-joints: This is the minimum distance between micro-joints. The
system will not allow placing a micro-joint at a distance lower than this value.
 Minimum number of micro-joint for each contour & Maximum number of micro-joint for
each contour: Using this option, if the contour has a very big perimeter and the maximum
number of micro-joints has been added, the system will distribute the microjoints halfway
(without taking care to the minimum separation). If the contour is small and the micro-joints
are too close, the system will redefine them and will locate them halfway on the contour.
80
Loop Values
This option allows the user to configure the parameters of the Loop values section in a machine. The
loops are used for improving the quality of the corners of the parts.
The system tries to use loops for corners:
1. If the user configures it in the Save options section of the machine configuration . In these
dialogues, the user can choose if the system inserts loops automatically when saving the part, or
when entering on the nesting module.
2. In Drawing Module, the user can get the Loops toolbar, and execute automatic loops assignation
using the automatic button.
 Maximum angle (W): For the angle round process, the system looks for the segments whose
angle is less than the value entered here for (0-W) section.
 Loops: Loops can also be applied automatically. The user will have to introduce the loop
values.
 Round angles: With this feature, the machine uses soft movement without hard trajectory
changes on corners. The result is better part machining. Depending on the degrees, the angle
is rounded using the R value. There are two different kinds of contours where a round angle
can be applied:
Figure 50: Round angle contours
 Limit angle (Z): It sets the limit to round angles. When the option group (W-Z) is selected, the
action is executed for all the angles fulfilling the following characteristics:
Maximum angle (W) < Angle < Limit Angle (Z).
 Radii: There are two Radii buttons. The first one is for (0-W) fields and the second one is for
(W-Z) fields. Clicking this button takes you to another dialog box, where you can assign
round angles to various cutting qualities. Select ‘Management by qualities’ to manage the
loop based on qualities.
81
Bevel Values
 Bevel values: This option allows the user to configure the parameters of the Bevel values of
the machines. In order to create bevels, the machine must have a rotation head that allows
cutting in different angles. There are two different kinds of bevels that can be executed
depending on the parameters:
 Upper bevel: It will be executed on the upper side of the sheet. For this bevels, only d and a
parameters will be used, the rest must be 0.
 Lower bevel: This kind of bevel will be executed in the lower side of the sheet and as in the
previous case, only d and parameters will be used.
Bridge Values
Bridges are used to join various contours cut with less piercings.
 Maximum length: This value is the maximum distance allowed for creating a bridge between
contours.
 Maximum number: This value is the limit of maximum number of bridges you can have at a
time. The default value is zero, which means there is no limit.
 Parts area (maximum & minimum): With this option the user can define the maximum and
minimum area of parts to have bridges automatically.
82
Bevels Management
 Auxiliar elements: The following are the auxiliary elements that the bevels management
consider:
 Minimum length on loops
 Length for auxiliary lead-in
 Length for Auxiliar lead-out
Sheet Remnants
 Management by material/thickness: By means of this checkbox the user can decide whether
to manage the sheet remnants depending of material/thickness related parameters or not.
 Minimum area of remnants: This value indicates the minimum area of the remnants to be
considered as such.
Cutting Parameters
General
Figure 51: Cutting parameters – General configuration
 Type of cut: The cut technology of the machine can be selected here: Oxycut, Plasma, High
definition plasma, Laser and Water.
83
 Cutter radius: This value indicates the cutter radius of the machine in millimeters.
 Piercing radius: Here it is possible to define the piercing radius depending of quality,
thickness and material. This is the area around the piercing point where the system will keep
as not usable for security reasons. The system will use the value given here as the radius of
the circle around the piercing point of non-usable sheet.
 Compensation mode: The three drawings shown below are a visual representation of each
compensation mode. Choosing one of them will determine how the system will apply the
compensation.
Figure 52: Compensation mode
 Number of sheets: Introduce the number of sheets to work with.
 Deal with number of sheets in the system: If enabled, the number of sheets given in the
system will be used. When selecting this option, it is possible to define the Gap between
sheets and Total limit between sheets.
 Gap between sheets: This option will be enabled if the previous one is selected. The user will
be able to define the gap between sheets in millimeters.
 Total limit between sheets: This option will be enabled if Deal with number of sheets in the
system one is selected. The user will be able to define the total limit between sheets in
millimeters.
 Test collision in the margins of the sheet: The system does not check by default if any part
collides with the margins of the sheet. If enabled, the system will detect such situations while
verifying the machining.
84
 Automatic control of the focal distance: The focal distance is referred as the position of the
laser beam focus in relation to the top of the plate to be cut. If the machine supports it, if
enabled, the system will use the Automatic control of the focal distance feature.
 Ignore non cut contours: The system allows using non-cut technology, which can be assigned
to geometries that the user does not want to machine like auxiliary geometries. This
parameter is most useful in the nesting module, where if enabled, the nesting will be
executed without using the non-cut contours getting only the rest of the geometries. But if is
disabled and some non-cut contours are included, the nesting will be done using these
contours too although they are not going to be machined.
 There are special cycles: This checkbox determines the way the drawing module will handle
the cycles. If enabled, the user will be able to perform simple, lineal and circular cycles by a
right click in the Drawing window. If disabled, the special cycles options of the drawing
module will be disabled too.
 Table height offset: The cutting head must respect this offset for working on a higher height.
Sometimes the sheet is not placed directly over the table because, for example, a special
support is placed in between. In this case, the system should know the necessary height to
avoid collisions with the sheet.
 Texts angular tolerance: Some machines cannot mark text in any angle. With this parameter,
the system is told in which angle the machine can mark texts. The nesting module will
orientate the text depending on the machine limitations. It will be possible to enable the
Angle step option.
always before making any machine instruction. With this option enabled, the system will
show the Cutting Parameters dialog always when the initialization instruction is executed.
If the user changes the Technology, the existing Tables of Technology may get lost in such a way
that the values return to zero.
85
Auxiliar Parameters
Figure 53: Cutting Parameters – Auxiliar parameters
 Reference gas: Here the user can select the gas that is going to be used in the laser machine.
Possible gases are Nitrogen, Compressed air or Oxygen. Like in the rest of the system, the < >
symbol indicates any of the elements.
 Nominal power of machine: In order to set up properly the machine the user will have to
introduce the value of the machine power in Watts in this field.
 Use default values of tables of technology: With this parameter, the user can indicate
whether we want to use the default values of the technology tables. If we activate this
parameter from inside the nesting we can see that the corresponding fields change for the
values of the technology tables, if it is activated, while initializing the machining the system
will take the default values without going to the configuration window. Once this field is
activated we have direct access to the technology tables window to make the appropriate
changes. This parameter will only be shown if the corresponding A0465 parameter is
activated in the CF file. It will be used as default field when there are various lines with the
same machine, material and thickness.
86
Contour Attributes
Figure 54: Cutting parameters – Contour Attributes configuration
 General attributes: The object of all the variables of this dialog is to associate values to
contours, and then these values will be read by the postprocessor in order to execute the
actions properly.
 Corner management: The value will be assigned to all the corners of the contour.
 Micro-joint at contour´s end: The value will be applied at contours micro-joint if exists.
 By quality: There is the possibility to filter what micro-joints are going to be valued
depending on quality.
 User attributes (1, 2, 3, 4, 5): These values will be applied to all the contours. Establishing
these values from here will apply them to all the contours of parts in automatic mode.
87
Compensations by Quality
Using this parameter, the user can apply system compensation and/or control corrections depending
on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of cut. This option will allow to define the following
parameters with different for each quality.
Figure 55: Cutting Parameters – Compensations by quality
 Corrector for holes
 Corrector for exteriors
 Compensation radius for holes
 Compensation radius for exteriors
The user will also be able to distinguish between:
 Main contours in no common cut
 Main contours in common cut
 Auxiliary contours in common cut
 Assign this data automatically in the sheet: If enabled, the data set will be assigned
automatically in the sheet. Whenever enabled, the system will display Main contours in no
common cut, Main contours in common cut and Auxiliary contours in common cut fields.
88
Common Cutting Parameters
Figure 56: Common Cutting Parameters configuration
 Common cut: This parameter configures how the common cut is going to be executed. The
user can select between No, Between two parts and Between several parts. Using ( )
button the user can configure the Lead-in/Lead-out values of the main and auxiliary contours
in common cut.
 Factor for insignificant length: The given value for this factor is the maximum distance the
system will leave without cutting when using the common cut feature.
 Length of pre-cutting elements: This option is enabled when selecting Common cut between
Several parts. If the system is cutting parts together sometimes it happens that already cut
parts should move or incline a little, which is dangerous for the head because of collision. To
avoid this kind of situations, the system allows introducing a security value that will be used
so that there are no collisions.
89
 It is allowed to reverse contours: This option is enabled when selecting Common cut
between several parts. If enabled, the system will reverse the contour sense of the cut if it
suits the process.
 Order by lead-in/lead-out position: This option is enabled when selecting Common cut
between Several parts. When making common cuts among various parts, it is possible to
order these cuts so that the last part cut finishes in the same area where the automatic
placement of part lead-ins/lead-outs are configured. If this parameter is enabled, it arranges
the part cutting order with the common cut in order to optimize the number of startups so
that the part cut always finishes in the same side or corner of the part. This option is mainly
used to get an optimum position for evacuation when part cutting is finished.
 Execution mode: This option allows selecting the common-cut order that the machine will
follow.
Figure 57: Common cut execution mode
 Nesting for common cut: The related options modify the nesting process, allowing the
automatic placement of the parts on the sheet. For working automatically properly, the user
should configure the same settings on nesting for common cut and on common cut, and
then, use automatic nesting and machining. The other way is to place the parts manually on
the sheet and, if the common cut is enabled, the user can make the automatic machining
allowing the system to try to apply the common cut to the manual nesting. The user will be
able to select between No, Between two parts and Between several parts.
 Minimum length: The value given here is the minimum length that the contours must have to
apply the common cut.
 Only between same length elements: The common cut will only be applied if the common
contours have the same length.
90
 Only place on nesting direction: If enabled, the nesting will be done optimizing the common
cut instead of lower sheet usage. For example:
Figure 58: Only place on nesting direction example
In the sheet of the left, the system tries to use the sheet at most placing the two right parts.
down on the sheet. However, on the sheet of the right, the system detects that the common cut
is better and places the part properly.
 Always respect the distance between parts: If enabled, this option makes the system test
the minimum separation between parts among certain elements when performing the
common cut. This option also tests whether the other elements not involved in the common
cut respect the minimum separation between parts. In some cases, it is more restrictive than
the user might expect, since two elements not respecting this minimum distance, prevent
parts entering the common cut, when the user had no problem in bringing these elements
closer than that separation between parts.
 System compensation: The user can select to apply system compensation between No, Main
contours and All the contours.
 Islands: Due to the use of common cut, some holes may appear between the parts. The
system provides different treatments for them. The user will be able to select between; No
treatment, Cut the parts inside the islands first, Cut all the islands first and Cut islands when
cutting the parts.
91
Technology
Lead-in/Lead-out Values
With this option the user can configure the approach parameters of the machine. The user can assign
manually leads for each part, which can be done with the Lead-in/Lead-out toolbar provided both in
drawing and nesting module.
Figure 59: Lead-in/Lead-out values configuration
 Lead-in/Lead-out distances: The following options will be applied to any lead inserted
manually for all the jobs of the specified material between the thicknesses given. All the
parameters are related to the length and shape of the leads:
Figure 60: Lead-in/lead-out distances
The user will be able to specify D, A, R and S distances for the Lead-ins and Lead-outs.
 Special Lead-in/Lead-outs for circular holes: Select this checkbox in order to enable special
Lead-in/Lead-outs for holes and set their parameters. The user can enter the distance in ‘D’
92
field, radius values in ‘R1’, ‘R2’, and ‘R3’ fields. It is also possible to enter the additional
distance value in ‘H’ field.
 Circle angles: If the user wants to place the lead manually, sometimes can happen that this
lead cannot be placed in the exact clicked point. The value of this parameter will help to
system to decide where to put it. The meaning is the angle step the system will use for
placing the lead.
 Cut the contour: If enabled the system will machine the contour just after the lead is placed.
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values

If the user selects to assign the leads automatically, some parameters must be configured.
Figure 61: Technology – Automatic Lead-in/lead-out values configuration
 Management by qualities: If the cutting qualities are used for the job, the system allows to
configure different values for the Lead-in/Lead-out when using the automatic assignation.
With this checkbox enabled, the window will display twelve tabs which are related to each
one of the twelve available cutting qualities.
93
placing the lead first. It is possible to select different positions for the exterior contours of
parts and holes. There are different types of contours which the system can distinguish. The
system will try to insert the chosen lead type, if this is not possible, will try with second and
last with third type. This is a way of configure different leads for irregular exteriors and let
system place the best one in each case.
Figure 62: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out zones and types
 Modify button: For each contour type, one lead-in/lead-out type can be assigned. The first
type will not assign any lead-in/lead-out to the contour. There are some values to be specified
that define the dimensions of each Lead-in/Lead-out.
Figure 63: Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box
 Piercing radius: This option allows the user defining the piercing radius depending on quality,
thickness and material. These values can be defined depending on the default piercing
radius, as a percentage of it, or as an absolute value. Whenever one of these values changes,
the other one gets updated.
94
 Constraints button: Click this button in order to configure restrictions for the Lead-ins and
Lead-outs. The user will be able to configure the following Elements where Lead-in/Lead-outs
are placed:
 Minimum length: This is the minimum length is which a lead can be placed.
 Minimum radius: In order to make sure that the leads are placed on big enough segments,
the system will look for the radius and if is not bigger than this value, it will look for
another one.
 Maximum angle: In the case of a corner, if the two segments constitute an angle bigger
than this value, the system will not place the lead and will try with a different type of lead.
 Minimum angle: When the lead is for an interior contour, the system will test the angle
between these segments and if it is smaller than the value given here, will not place it.
 Maximum angle: The same as previous one, if the angle of the interior contour's segments
is bigger that the value of this parameter, the system will not place the lead.
 Change position in part: This option allows the user to change the position of the lead-in or
lead-out in the part. There are two options: No and Along the cutting sequence.
 No: The system leaves the leads-in/leads-out just as they were defined in the corners of
Holes and Parts.
 Along the cutting sequence: The leads-in/leads-out is modified. In order to avoid it, it is
placed in the nearest hole.
 Change position in sheet: This option allows the user to change the position of the lead-in or
lead-out in the sheet. There are three options: No, Along the cutting sequence, and Avoiding
the oxycut effect.
 Along the cutting sequence: The leads-in/leads-out is modified by selecting this option. They
are placed in the nearest hole in order to avoid them. At the same time, it is also possible to
select only for inside or only for inside and outside option.
95
 Avoid the oxycut effect: It works as the interrogation mark option. This option places the
lead-ins/lead-outs so that the last part cut of the part has enough material to hold it and it
does not suffer any deformation.
 Overlapping test: It is possible to configure checking the overlaps in the automatic lead-ins.
This test will take into account if there will be a pre-punching or a cycle in order to know if
the lead-in is overlapped or not. In case of overlapping, the system will perform the action
previously selected between the following:
 Shorten: The lead-in/lead-out geometry will be shortened trying to avoid the overlapping.
The value is the maximum shortening allowed.
 Change position: The lead-in/lead-out will be placed in other position, and system will try as
different positions as the number given on Number of attempts.
 Change position and shorten: This solution is a combination of the previous. The system will
try on each position to short the lead-in/lead-out geometries and if this not solved the
overlapping, will change the position.
 Change quality: In this case, system will try changing the cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-
out. With this, the configuration for lead-in/lead-out will change getting the values
configured of the new cutting quality.
 Change position and quality: On each position, the system is going to try to change the
cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-out, and if not, change position as many times as
specified attempts.
 Change position, quality and shorten: For each position, the system will try changing the
cutting quality, and shorten the lead-in/lead-out on each position, and if the problem
persists, change position as many times as the value given.
 Change quality and shorten: First, the quality will be changed and if still there are overlaps,
the lead-in/lead-out geometries will be shortened.
96
Micro-joint Values
Figure 64: Technology – Micro-joints Values configuration
 Lead-in/Lead-out Values (A, D, S & Radius): Specify A, D, S and Radius values here for Lead-
in/Lead-outs, so that the system uses them whenever placing them.
 Circle Angles: When the micro-joint is assigned manually, the system will try to put it in the
exact clicked point, but this is not always possible. With this parameter, the system will
decide where to put it. The value meaning is the angle step the system will use for placing
the micro-joint in relation to clicked point.
Automatic Micro-Joint Values
Figure 65: Technology – Automatic micro-joints values configuration
configuring different values for the micro-joint when using the automatic assignation. With
97
this checkbox enabled, the window will show twelve tabs which are related to each of the
twelve available cutting qualities.
 Micro-joint types: These are all the micro-joints the system supports automatically. For each
one, there are some parameters to configure as shown on the graphs. Enter D, A, S, and
Radius parameters for lead-ins and lead-outs.
Figure 66: Micro-joint types
 Circle angles: This value is used for system to test positions for placing micro-joints. The
point.
 Distance between micro-joints: This is the minimum distance; the system will not allow
placing a micro-joint at a distance lower than this value.
 Minimum number of micro-joints for each contour: Using this option, if the contour has a
very big perimeter and the maximum number of micro-joints has been added, the system will
distribute the micro-joints halfway (without taking care to the minimum separation).
 Maximum number of micro-joints for each contour: If the contour is small and the micro-
joints are too close, the system will redefine them and will locate them halfway on the
contour.
 Copy button: Because there are 12 possible cutting qualities, the same parameter must be
configured many times. For making the data entry easier, Expert provides this button which
permit to copy the automatic micro-joint configuration from existing cutting quality values.
98
Loop Values
Figure 67: Technology – Loop values configuration
 Maximum angle (W): Maximum angle permitted by the system for Loops.
 Loops: here the user can select the type of automatic Loops and introduce “r” value. For
automatic machining, the loops can be applied in:
 Only in bevel elements: In automatic mode, the loops are applied only to the bevels of the
contours.
 Only in round angles: The automatic loops will just be applied to angles.
 In bevels or in round angles: The automatic machining applies loops in bevels and angles.
 Round angles: With this feature, the machine uses soft movement without hard trajectory
changes on corners. The result is better part machining. Depending on the degrees, the angle
is rounded using the R value. There are four different kinds of contours where to apply the
angle round; two in (0-W) section and another two in (W-Z) section. If none of them are
chosen, the settings may not have any effect.
99
 Radii button: There are two Radii buttons. The first one is for (0-W) fields and the second one
is for (W-Z) fields. Clicking this button takes the user to another dialog box, where it is
possible to assign round angles to various cutting qualities. Select Management by qualities
to manage the loop based on qualities.
 Limit angle (Z): It sets the limit to round angles. When the option group (W-Z) is selected, the
action is executed for all the angles fulfilling the following characteristics:
Maximum angle (W) < Angle < Limit Angle (Z).
Bevel Values
Figure 68: Technology – Bevel values configuration
 Bevel values: This option allows the user to configure the parameters of the Bevel values of
the machines. In order to create bevels, the machine must have a rotation head that allows
cutting in different angles. There are two different kinds of bevels that can be executed
depending on the parameters:
 Upper bevel: It will be executed on the upper side of the sheet. For this bevels, only the d
and a parameters will be used, the rest must be 0.
100
 Lower bevel: This kind of bevel will be executed in the lower side of the sheet and as in
the previous case, only d and parameters will be used.
Bridge Values
Bridges are used to join various contours cut with less piercings.
Figure 69: Technology – Bridge values configuration
 Maximum length: This value is the maximum distance allowed for creating a bridge between
contours.
 Maximum number: This value is the limit of maximum number of bridges the user can have
at a time. The default value is zero, which means there is no limit.
 Parts area (maximum & minimum): With this option the user can define the maximum and
minimum area of parts to have bridges automatically.
 Bridge fitting: This portion deals with the position of the bridges.
 On Corners: The bridges are applied on part's corners. In the example, there are bridges on
corners that allow the user to make all the machining without raising the head.
101
 Fitting: It is possible to place the bridge on the Left side or the Right side as per your
requirement.
Tables of Technology
With all the information recovered on the Nesting - Machining process, the system generates a CNC
program. There are some parameters related to machining which can be configured and assigned to
the different contours of the parts. All of these kinds of parameters which affect the CNC program
are grouped into Cutting qualities. Depending on the cutting quality, each contour will be cut with
different settings.
By default, all the contours have a cutting quality assigned. The tables of technology are structured
in different parameter categories which depend on the configuration made on the filter parameters.
Figure 70: Technology -Tables of technology
The filter parameters may be different depending on the postprocessor configuration, and the
parameters contained into the categories are different for each postprocessor.
102
The system will test if the contours have a specific cutting quality assigned, and if so, it will take into
account this table. Depending on the Material, Thickness 1-2, Lens, Gas, Power, Default and Auxiliar
fields, it will apply the values configured in the different categories.
Auxiliar field is editable. In order to edit it, the user will have to edit the CT file of the machine
and indicate in A210 parameter the name required to be displayed.
In this window it will be possible to create a New entry, as well as Delete, Copy…, Import and filter it
by Criteria option located on the filter parameters.
 New: This will create a new entry on the filter parameters.
 Delete: This will delete the current row together with all the given values for the parameters.
 Copy: This will duplicate the current row allowing a faster configuration.
 Import: The system will provide the possibility of importing a previous backup of the
technological tables’ configuration.
 Criteria: The system will display a window where the user can choose which rows will be
shown on the screen for making the searching process faster and easier.
 Configure: This allows the user to configure the variables for a particular material and
thickness range defined.
103
Automatic Nesting
General
Figure 71:Automatic Nesting – General configuration
 Level of optimization: In this field the user can select any of the predefined levels of
optimization from the drop-down list provided. The system provides five predefined levels,
each one with their own set of parameters. The execution time and result of these
predefined levels is balanced, that is, the longer the execution time, the better result. Every
one of the predefined levels corresponds to a predefined Level of optimization
configuration. The user can modify the configuration of any of the existing predefined levels
and save it as a user defined level of optimization. The configuration of the existing
predefined levels will not be modified. In order to visualize the parameters of any of the
predefined levels or to modify them and save them as user customized level of optimization,
it will be necessary to click on the arrow button provided next to the drop-down list ( ). If
this button is selected, the system will display Level of optimization window. In this window
the user can configure all parameters related to the level of optimization. Between the fields
provided in this window, the user will only find enabled the ones that correspond to the user
optimization and not system optimization.
104
Figure 72: Level of optimization window
 Use modules: If the user enables this parameter, the system will generate modules of two
parts in Nesting module whenever it is possible. However, the parts in question must fit
together very well so that the system considers them as a module. The system will only use
those ones that provide a good performance.
 Test starting from a different corner for each part: If the user enables this parameter, the
system will use a specific algorithm that places the parts automatically in the different
corners of the sheet. If this parameter is disabled, this is how these parts would be placed in
the sheet.
If this parameter is enabled, it will place each part in a different corner of the sheet, achieving an
exceptional efficiency.
105
 Rotate parts to maximize holes between them: As the name indicates, this parameter will
rotate in order to try creating bigger holes between them. This way, if there is any part that
may fit in the gap created, the user will be able to place more parts and therefore will get a
better efficiency.
If this parameter is disabled, parts are not being rotated and therefore the space that may be formed
inside is clearly not being exploited fully.
If this parameter is enabled, the system will rotate the parts, maximizing the hole between them.
This way it is possible to introduce another part inside and increase the efficiency of the nesting.
 Define the number of irregular methods to apply: The bigger number specified by the user,
the more methods the system will test in order to place the parts and look for the best
result. The system will try several algorithms looking for the best sheet advantage and will
use the ones on which the space profit is best. The number of methods applied will depend
on the number of irregular methods to apply defined by user, which will consequently
106
result in a longer execution time. Setting a higher value ensures a better result. There are
eighteen irregular methods. The user must try with different values and check the
efficiency percentage in order to select the most suitable one. This option is useful for those
cases in which there are different parts with irregular geometries and small quantities.
 Use regularity method: This parameter adds regular methods to the previous irregular ones.
Both parameters can be enabled at the same time if required. As in the previous case, the
bigger the level selected, the more possibilities to get a better nesting. However, it adds
more testing time to the nesting. This method basically looks for part modules towards a
better sheet efficiency. This parameter is useful for those cases in which there is a big
quantity of the same part (at least to fill half the sheet).
 Level 1: The system will create column modules and apply them with basic criteria.
 Level 2: The system will modify the column modules created initially, looking for a better
sheet advantage.
 Level 3: The system will create different column sizes. This level will suppose more testing;
therefore, the automatic nesting will take more execution time.
 No regularity: Without any regularity method, the nesting of the following part would be as
shown below:
 Level 1: Once Regularity method level 1 is activated, the difference would be remarkable.
107
 Try to nest in horizontal and vertical: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheets by
rows) or vertically (nesting the sheet by columns). If this parameter is activated, the system
will test both horizontally and vertically and will use the one on which the best efficiency is
reached.
 Force a specific precision: If this parameter is enabled, the system will force the precision set
in this field by the user. Whenever activated, the system will display a drop-down list with the
following options:
 Very low (fastest)
 Low
 Normal
 High
 Very high (slowest)
 Value: In this case, the user will be provided with a precision bar in order to set the required
value:
Figure 73: Precision bar
108
 Force a specific rotation angle: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will display
the following fields:
 Rotation angle for parts: Select between the provided options in the drop-down list (15, 30,
45, 90 and 180).
 Search special rotation angles for the parts: If enabled, the system will execute various tests
and search for the most appropriate rotation angle for the parts, which will result in a
better efficiency.
 Force a specific type of modules: If this parameter is enabled, the arrow ( ) button
located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever the user selects this button,
the system will display Modules window. Here the user can select between the provided
options, which are divided into Simple modules, Complex modules and Special modules.
Once the user has defined the required parameters in Level of optimization window, it is possible to
save them for a later use by means of Save as… button located at the bottom of the window. The
system will display New reference window where the user will have to introduce the required name
for the level of optimization that has been defined and click OK button in order to save it.
 Maximum time to calculate the best efficiency: Here the user must introduce the maximum
time that will be taken to test the methods (that have been previously set). Remember that
the time must be introduced in seconds. During the automatic nesting execution, once the
time here specified is reached, the system will stop testing methods and will choose the best
one (most efficient) found up to that moment.
 Precision: This field allows the user setting the required exactitude or preciseness of the
automatic nesting. The user will be provided with a drop-down list with the following five
options:
 Very low (fastest): In the case of all those elements that are not neither horizontal nor
vertical, the less precision applied, the system will apply more distance between parts.
 Low
 Normal
109
 High
 Very high (slowest): With more precision, the distance between parts will be closer to the
minimum distance between parts.
The higher the precision level selected, the longer it will take for the system to execute the
automatic nesting.
 Allow part rotations: Depending on the shape of the part it may be very useful to rotate it in
order to get a better nesting. For example, in case of circles, it would not make any sense
since their output is the same whichever the angle the user chooses.
 Rotations: Here the user can select the rotation angle required. The drop-down list provides
the following options: 15, 30, 45, 90 and 180 degrees. For example, given the case 15 degrees
is selected, the system will test placing the part on every 15 degrees’ position, which will
result in 24 tries.
 Search special rotation angles for the parts: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the
system will look for special angles that may be useful for the parts as well as result in a
better sheet efficiency. This parameter will test more rotation angles than in the previous
case, and therefore will result in a longer execution time.
 Separation of parts: Here the user must introduce the required value to use as separation
between parts. This separation value is intended to safeguard the quality of parts. Usually,
this value is defined by the restrictions of the machine that is being used.
 Allow different separation in Y: This parameter is aimed at those cases in which the user
works with big thicknesses. It allows setting a different separation in Y in order to avoid
putting a disadvantage (penalizing) both dimensions due to the auxiliary elements (such as
lead-in/lead-outs, loops and micro-joints).
If this parameter is disabled, the separation between parts either in X or in Y is exactly the same. The
separation between parts will correspond with the value introduced in the previous field.
110
Whenever the user enables this parameter and introduces a different value for the separation in Y
axis, after performing the automatic nesting the difference will be very obvious (as shown in the
image below).
 Allow mirroring: If this parameter is enabled, the system can place the parts in the nesting
with symmetries. However, this parameter is usually restricted by the material that is being
used since the quality is not always the same in both sides of the sheet.
 Fit every part to sheet borders: If this parameter is enabled, as the name indicates, parts will
be fitted to sheet borders. If disabled, the system will always maintain half of the separation
set between parts (based on the value given in Separation of parts field). However, this
condition may be restricted by the machine that is being used.
If this parameter is enabled, the part will adjust either to the sheet margin (in case there is any) or to
the sheet border. If it is disabled, the system will always leave half of the separation between parts
(half of the value given in Separation of parts field).
 Create equal sheets: Here the user will be able to select the required option between the
three options provided in the drop-down list: No, Yes and Ask. Given the case either Yes or
Ask option is selected, the system will check whether it is possible to generate repetitions of
the current nesting (which is already very efficient) if the existing quantity of parts and
sheets so permits.
111
 Corner: Here the user will be able to select the required corner from which the system will
start placing the parts. The nesting process will start from the selected corner and continue
in the opposite direction.
Advanced
Figure 74: Automatic Nesting – Advanced configuration
 Calculate modules for parts: Whenever the user activates this parameter, the system will
calculate modules of two parts always looking for the best efficiency. Once this parameter
has been enabled, the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also become enabled.
Whenever this button is selected the system will display Modules window. Modules window
displays the existing types of modules, which are divided into three different groups: Simple
modules, Complex modules and Special modules:
112
Figure 75: Modules window
 Simple modules:
 Basic: It is formed by the same part.
 Advanced: It is formed by a basic module and other parts. Once the basic module has been
calculated, the system will fill in the holes left in the nesting with other parts.
 Complex modules:
 Multi-part: It is formed by several parts, which also tries fitting the parts together.
 Staggered: It consists in a staggered combination of the parts.
 Special modules:
 Multihead: This type of module is specific for machinery with multihead and will only be
displayed whenever the machine that is being configured has them.
 Nesting priority direction: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheet by rows) or
vertically (nesting the sheets by columns). Depending on the measures of the sheet it might
be more efficient to nest in one direction or the other. This parameter provides a drop-down
list and allows the user selecting between Horizontal and Vertical.
 Horizontal: As shown in the nesting below, parts will be placed horizontally.
113
 Vertical: In this case, parts will be placed vertically.
 Rectangular mode is allowed: By means of this parameter, the system allows treating those
parts that are almost rectangular in order to improve the speed of nesting calculations. Given
the case this parameter is enabled; it would be the very first algorithm to execute whenever
performing an automatic nesting. Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow button
( ) located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is selected,
the system will display Rectangular nesting setup window:
Figure 76: Rectangular nesting setup window
 Type: It provides a drop-down list where the user can select the type of rectangular nesting
 Normal: The system will treat parts as rectangles as will search for the best combination of
those rectangles (the ones that meet the Squareness percentage) in the sheet.
 Optimize for linear cut of parts: In order to optimize linear part cutting, the user must get
the largest number of parts of the same size (both length and width) nested in columns.
114
This parameter aims to look for part columns with the same width and is very useful for
machines with common cut. Once this option has been selected, the arrow ( ) button
located on the right side will be enabled. If the user selects this button, the system will
display Optimize for linear cut of parts window, where it will be possible to set the
following parameters: Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet and the
Separation of parts in millimeters.
 Optimize for chain cut: In order to optimize chain cutting, nesting will be done in columns
by parts of the same length. The system will apply special bridges between the parts so that
the parts remain in the sheet until the last vertical cut is executed. Once this option has
been selected, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will be enabled. If the user
selects this button, the system will display Optimize for chain cut window, where the user
will have to configure the following parameters:
 Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet: Here the user must introduce the
minimum height of the column by introducing a percentage. This percentage will be applied
to the sheet measures in order to calculate the value in question.
 Separation of parts: The separation of parts can be set either by the Default value, the
Cutter diameter (multiplied by a number) or a fixed Value. Remember that this separation
must be set in millimeters.
 Part type: The user will be provided with the following four options:
 Bridges automatically: If this parameter is enabled, the user can select between the
following two options:
115
 Bridge width: This parameter will also be enabled. Here the user will be able to select
between The semi-separation of part, Cutter radius (multiplied by a number) and a fixed
Value. Remember that this separation must be set in millimeters.
 Squareness percentage: The user can introduce the required Squareness percentage which
will be used in the system to consider parts as rectangular. If a part does not reach the
percentage set, it will not be considered as rectangular.
 Optimize remnant of the last sheet: Thanks to his parameter, parts can be placed using the
minimum X in order to generate the best remnant possible. Usually, when there is a big job
which includes more than one sheet, this optimization is applied to the last sheet of the job.
 Calculation level: This field provides a drop-down list where the user can select between 0,
1, 2 and 3.
 Minimum usable area to insert parts in apertures: Whenever the area of a hole is big
enough, if possible, the system places parts inside them. In this field, the user can introduce
the minimum area required in order to consider a hole as valid for placing parts inside.
 Nesting for kits: This parameter allows prioritizing those parts that compose kits during the
automatic nesting execution. Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow ( ) button
located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the
system will display Nesting for kits window:
Figure 77: Nesting for kits window
 Mix different kits in same sheet: If this parameter is disabled, the system will wait until the
whole kit has been nested in order to start nesting the following kit. On the other hand, the
system will incorporate parts which belong to different kits in the same sheet.
116
 Use nestings of original kits as modules: Thanks to this parameter if a kit has already
nestings which are very efficient, given the case the measure of the existing sheets and the
number of parts allows it, the previous nestings will be used as modules.
 Part order in nesting: This parameter set how parts will be placed in the nesting. It provides a
drop-down list where the user will be able to select between the following options:
 By area: From the biggest area to the smallest area.
 By rectangular area: Based on external area.
 By perimeter: From the biggest perimeter to the smallest perimeter.
 By length: From the longest to the shortest.
 Group parts with similar order value: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will
prioritize those methods that introduce the highest number of big parts instead of the ones
that place small parts, regardless of their efficiency.
 Block part rotation according to their dimensions: By means of this option, if a part has any
rotation (degree) in particular that may cause any problems, either because it may fall from
the table or because it does not fit in the smallest trap, the system would block that rotation
and nest the part in question in the most appropriate and secure rotation.
 Do not block if none of the part rotations meet the restrictions: Given the case none of the
parts meets the limits defined, there is an option that allows unblocking them, since the
part must be nested somehow.
117
Unitary
Figure 78: Automatic Nesting – Unitary configuration
 Sheet margins: Here the user can introduce the required margins for the sheets. These
margins will ensure that the machine does not work outside the sheet as well as leaving
enough material so as to support the parts. The value must be introduced in millimeters.
 Ignore open contours: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will not take into
account an open contour (such as, for example, lead-ins) in order to estimate the sheet
required.
 Create the sheet in database: If enabled, whenever creating a new sheet for the unitary
nesting, the system will introduce the sheet in question in the database and therefore, it will
be displayed in the sheets list.
 Prompt for this data: If this parameter is enabled, the system will prompt a window asking
for this data whenever automatic nesting option is selected and prior to executing it so that
the user can select the required parameters in each case.
118
Automatic Machining
Cut
Parts
Figure 79: Automatic Machining – Cut – Parts configuration
 Apply Lead in/outs in the part automatically: When the automatic machining option is
executed on drawing module, the system will insert lead in/outs automatically if this
parameter is enabled. The lead in/out will be placed depending on the configuration
previously made.
 Re-order machining sequence at part level: On drawing module, the system can optimize the
machining process trying to improve speed and movements. This option will make the
automatic machining better when executing it in a part on drawing module.
 Order mode of the holes: With this parameter, the user can order the internal machining of a
part. Until this moment the internal machining of a part was decided by the system by
proximity, the user will be able to define the following parameters:
119
 By proximity
 By direction
Figure 80: Order mode of the holes dialog box
 Start: The initial machining point will be one of the corners of the part; the selected one or
the closed to the current point before start the internal machining.
 Direction: The cutting direction can be Horizontal or Vertical.
 Orthogonality tolerance: It defines the maximum distance between two holes to be

considered in the same cutting line. This distance is referred to axe – horizontal or vertical.
 System compensation: If enabled the system will manage all the compensation settings.
There are some parameters that have to be properly configured for obtaining a good
compensation configuration. System compensation requires the Cutter radius.
 CN Compensation: If enabled the system will manage all the compensation settings. It will
prompt for the Compensation Index.
 Dwell time of cycles: When there is a cycle, the value given here is the time in second the
cycle will keep on.
 Type of cycle: The user will be able to select between the following options:
 Default: If this option is selected, the system will use the type of cycle previously configured
in Configure machines / Postprocessor / Specifics of cut / Dot Cycle by default.
 Drill cycles: All the cycles applied on automatic machining will be drill cycles.
120
 Switch on/off: All the cycles on automatic machining will be switch on/off cycles.
 Configure: Execution of fixed cycles: If the machine has special cycles (should be configured
on Configure machine / Cutting parameters / There are special cycles) the system can use
them automatically.
Figure 81: Configure: Execution of fixed cycles dialog box
 Use cut cycles in automatic: When the part which is going to be machined has a big number
of holes, the system may take some calculation time for making the automatic machining.
Activating this checkbox will make the system to use cut cycles for enhancing the process
speed. But if the area of the contour is very big, is no convenient to use macros. The
“Maximum area for cutting macros in automatic mode” parameter allows limiting the
maximum size for applying macros.
 Maximum area for cutting macros in automatic mode: This parameter allows limiting the
maximum size for applying macros.
 Prompt for the from point when machining the part: With this parameter the user can
define the FROM point when machining one part. If the parameter Prompt for the from point
when machining the part in automatic machining is ON, then, when machining one part the
FROM point will be asked. This parameter is also available for combined machines.
121
 Use fast cut mode in holes (flying cut): With this option the user can perform a new cutting
order for the internal holes of a part. There are some restrictions to define which element of
each hole can be cut in this mode, depending on the minimum radius to keep the arc
continuity and depending on the angular tolerance to join elements in the same cut. The
parameters of this option help the user to define the desired cutting sequence and the order
between them.
 Angular tolerance to join elements in the same cutting sequence: With this option, it is
possible to assign the angular tolerance to join the elements in the same cutting
sequence.
 Minimum radius to keep continuity in arcs: Using this option it is possible that small radius
will not be taken as continuous elements.
 Union among elements in the same cutting sequence:
o Elements of different type: It allows configuring the possibility to join different

elements (for instance = arcs and segments).
o Elements of same type: It allows configuring the possibility to define equal elements
(always keeping the minimum radius and angular tolerance restrictions) or only join
segments which are in the same line or arcs which are in the same circumference.
 Order mode among cutting sequences: Once the rest of parameters are defined the user
will be able to define the order and select between By Proximity and By parallelism and
concentrity.
 Apply quality: This option enables selecting the desired cutting quality.
 Also apply in circular contours: This option enables the user doing the flying cut of totally
circular contours.
 Changing cutting direction is allowed: This option enables the inversion of the cutting
direction of the circular contours in order to avoid passing above contours already cut.
122
 Start the fast cut from a specified corner: This option allows the user selecting the starting
corner for flying cut. It must be executed manually (by specifying contours). If this option is
not activated or is in automatic mode, the starting point for flying cut will be the nearest to
the machining point in which the system is.
Figure 82: Fast cut mode in holes (flying cut) dialog box
123
Sheets
Figure 83: Automatic Machining – Cut – Sheets configuration
 Cut the remnant line: When a remnant has been generated, this option allows the system to
insert the CNC code that will separate the remnant from the sheet. For this option it is
important to have a remnant line inserted, which can be configured automatically in
Configure machine / Sheet Remnant or made manually from nesting module. Click the
Navigation button and the system will display the following dialog box asking for the data
shown:
Figure 84: Cut the remnant line dialog box
124
 At the beginning and at the end of the machining: Depending on each option, the operation
will be done at the beginning or at the end of the machine process.
 At the beginning and at the end of each zone: The operation will be done at the beginning
or at the end of each zone.
Mode:
 Like contour: The remnant line is cut as any other regular contour, skipping the lines with
no cut technology.
 Like cut movements (from beginning to end): GO TO instructions are inserted between the
sides that are cut. The sides with cut technology are cut starting from one of the ends.
 Like cut movements (starting from the middle): GO TO instructions are inserted between
the sides that are cut. The sides with cut technology are cut starting from the middle
towards both ends.
Direction:
 Like the machining: The direction will be as the one in the machining.
 From bottom to top: The direction will be from bottom to top.
 From top to bottom: The direction will be from top to bottom.
 Apply Lead in/outs automatic during nesting: If the parts are placed on the sheet and the
Lead in/outs have not been placed yet, the system will check it and insert them depending on
the configuration previously set in Configure machine / Automatic Lead-in/out configuration.
 Apply automatic EcoPierce on sheet: If enabled, whenever the automatic machining of the
sheet is executed, the system will automatically generate the EcoPierce making use of the
parameters configured in the machine.
 Test for parts inside others: If enabled, the system will test whether there are parts inside
other parts or not, as shown in the example below:
125
Figure 85: Test for parts inside others example
 Cut the sheet framework: When the cutting process has finalized, the system provides
solutions for the sheet leavings. The Cut the sheet framework option makes the machine to
cut the scraps in horizontal and vertical cuts. The Navigation button will show a dialogue
where the user needs to enter some values for the following parameters:
Figure 86: Cut the sheet framework dialog box
 Only when the remnant line is cut: If enabled, it will force the script to be cut always after the
remnants have been cut.
 At the beginning or at the end of the machining: Depending on each option, the operation
will be done at the beginning or at the end of the machine process.
 Maximum length in X and Y: It determines the maximum rectangle that will be generated as
scrap.
 Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts
126
 Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge of the
sheet
 Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not
 Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the segments
will be cut from the middle to one side, and then it will go to the center again and to the
other side. It is possible to make a lead-in/lead-out in the middle of other types of cutting
segments which belong to a sheet framework such as In any cut, Cuts between parts, In cuts
outside parts and In all cuts.
 Order: Using this parameter the user can define the sheet skeleton (frame). The user can
select between:
 By proximity
 Horizontal + Vertical
 Vertical + Horizontal
 Destroy sheet holes: This option allows destroying sheet holes regardless of the sheet
framework.
Figure 87: Destroy sheet holes dialog box
127
 Maximum and minimum length/width of the hole: It is the size of the holes required to
destroy considering the maximum width and length.
 Offset in the parts: It is the distance required from the interior cut of the hole to the part
extreme.
 Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the segments
will be cut from the middle to one side, and then it will go to the center again and to the
other side.
 It is also possible to select the required instruction order: At the beginning of the
machining, At the end of the machining and Before cutting contours.
 This section will only be enabled if Before cutting contours is selected in the previous
section. It allows optimizing the cutting of part holes after executing the remnant
destruction. The user can select one of the following options:
o Do not optimize the hole cutting: In this case, the system will work as usual, that is to
say, it will place the lead-in automatically in the corresponding place.
o Optimize the lead-in position: The system will try to introduce the lead-in the closest
possible to the final point where the hole destruction has finished.
o Continuous cut from the last point: The system will continue cutting from the last
point where the system has finished cutting the hole.
 Cut full parts in work zones: This parameter affects to the internal contours. If enabled and a
part is located in the middle of a work zone, the system will not even perform the internal
contours. On the contrary, in case of disabled, the system would perform all those internal
contours in the current work zone, even if the part is in the middle.
 Cut contours partially in the zone: Whenever the system finds dynamic remnant lines inside a
work zone, if this option is enabled, the system will cut the parts up to that line, cut the
remnant line and continue with the machining.
 Cut contours partially in the clamps: By means of this parameter it is possible to cut part of
the contour located away from the clamps and leave for later the rest of the elements of the
128
contour. It allows selecting between breaking all the contours placed below at least one
clamp or on the contrary, only breaking those contours that are placed below two clamps.
 Clamp movements: In order to cut the elements of the contour placed under the clamps,
the user will be able to indicate whether it is required to move the clamps prior to
executing a reposition. To that end, clamps must be configured as movable clamps prior to
executing a reposition. Here the user can select between No move, At the end of each zone
and At the end moving back to its initial position.
 Display progress bar: When doing the automatic machining, the system must perform very
complicated internal calculations that may take some time. The user can know what the
system is doing on every moment with the progress bar.
 Delay after completion: After the automatic machining is over, the system can keep the
progress window for a while. This is what the Delay after completion parameter sets.
Head Raising Test
Figure 88: Automatic Machining – Cut – Head raising test configuration
 Head raising test: This indicates that the system will have special care with machine head, if
disabled, the automatic machining process will not manage the head movement.
 Make the head raising test while saving: When saving the machining, the system will make
several tests for avoid head collisions. This option can be enabled although the first one is
not. In this case, the treatment will be done only when saving, not when doing the automatic
machining.
129
 Make head test even with head always up: The system will make the test even if the system
has been configured for making all the rapid movements with the head up.
 Maximum hollow & offset: When moving over a hole, the head may result damaged. The
distance has different values depending on the chosen option.
 Maximum length with head down: This is the maximum trajectory in mm described by the
head when is down.
 Maximum number of rapid tracts: The system will try the given number of tracts to avoid
holes. In order to understand what is a tract, the following figures show two examples:
Figure 89: Rapid tracts example
 Modify Lead-in/outs: Selecting an option from here will allow the system to change the
situation of lead in/outs to optimize the head management of the machining process.
 By parts: Leads will be repositioned for avoiding cut parts in the rapids movement.
 By contours: The objective with this configuration is not to encounter any cut hole on the
rapid movements.
 Retain lead in/outs defined in part: If the part has Lead-in/outs previously assigned and this
option is enabled, the system will use them. If disabled, the system will erase them and look
for the best position in order to make easier the manual part removal.
 Apply head up at end of each part: When the machining process of a part has been done, the
system will send an order to the machine to lift the head.
 Head up for common cut elements: The special case of common cut elements is what this
option configures. When a common cut element has been finalized, the head will go up.
 Test only with the contours that are in the direction of the movement: If enabled, this
option will avoid already cut holes in the direction of the movement.
130
Machining Order
Figure 90: Automatic Machining – Cut – Machining order configuration
 Machining order: There are three options available:
 By parts: If the user selects this option, the machining will be ordered by parts. When
selecting this option, the system will provide the user with the following order options: By
zones, Start point and direction, By size (largest to smallest) and By size (smallest to
largest). If this option is selected, Order mode of the holes parameter will become enabled,
which offers the following options: None, By proximity, By direction and Minimum Heat.
 By contours: If the user selects this option, the machining will be ordered by contours.
When selecting By contours, the user will have to choose between By zones, Start point and
direction, By size (largest to smallest) and By size (smallest to largest) as order mode for
the contours. This option will also enable Cut holes first parameter, which as the name
indicates, will first cut the holes and then continue with the rest of the contours.
 Minimum heat: The user can choose between By zones, By parts and By contours.
 Order mode of the holes: This option will only be available whenever “By parts” machining
order has been previously selected. It allows configuring a new mode of holes’ distribution. It
enables cutting the small holes that are near larger holes in the first place. It will only be
possible to configure it in Proximity mode only if path optimization is not required. In order
131
to distinguish between large and small parts, it is necessary to indicate the minimum length
and width of the minimum rectangle of a contour to be considered as a large hole. It will be
enough to meet one of these two dimensions in order to consider the contour as a large
hole. It is also necessary to configure the offset in order to calculate the collision area around
large holes. This value will be added from all the sides of the minimum rectangle of the
contour and every small hole located inside that area or that collisions with it, will be cut
before the large hole. The user will be able to choose between the following options:
 None: Do not order the holes.
 By Proximity: The system will order the holes based on proximity.
 By Direction: The system will order the holes based on the direction.
 Minimum Heat: This parameter determines the sheet machining order by parts and by
minimum heat. It allows cutting the sheet part by part making sure the interiors of each
one of them are cut respecting the minimum heat. The user will be able to configure the
Offset of minimum heat in the dialog box displayed whenever selecting the navigation
button next to it.
Depending on the option that the user chooses, different options will be shown. For example, when
selecting None, the following dialog box will be displayed:
Figure 91: Machining order dialog box (None order mode of the holes)
When clicking the navigation button, Cut small holes first dialog box will be displayed:
132
Figure 92: Cut small holes first dialog box
On the other hand, given the case By proximity option is selected, the system will display the
following dialog box:
Figure 93: Machining order dialog box (By proximity order mode of the holes)
Here the user will be able to enable Path optimization parameter and select the required Method
between Normal and Optimized.
If the selected option is By direction, the dialog box displayed will be as shown below:
Figure 94: Order mode of the holes (By direction) dialog box
Finally, if the option selected is Minimum Heat, the system will display the following dialog box:
 Only cut holes: If enabled, the system will only cut the interior contours of the part.
133
 Put in order by qualities: By means of this option, the system provides a way to order the
machining depending on the cutting quality assigned to each contour.
 No: If selected, the system will not order the machining based on cutting qualities.
 By sheet: The machine will cut first all the contours whose cutting quality coincides with the
chosen list.
 By part: The selected order on the dialogue will be followed for each part. When one part
has been finished, the machine will go to order the qualities of another part.
Given the case any of the last 2 options is selected, the system will display the following dialog box in
order to select the desired quality to apply:
Figure 95: Put in order by qualities dialog box
 Cut contained contours by zones: This option is used by machines of two axis. One of these
axes allows arriving to all areas of the cutting machine and the other axis has a less course
though it is speeder. There are many machines whose speed movement axis can cover a
large area in the market so for this reason now it is possible to choose the exact moment to
cut those contours outside the area. This option provides a drop-down list with the following
options:
 No
 By path in X
 By path in Y
134
 Whenever either By path in X or By path in Y are selected the navigation button next to them
will be enabled and will display Zone position dialog box.
Figure 96: Zone position dialog box
Here the user can select Positions between Fixed, Minimum position and Maximum position options.
It is also possible to introduce the Length of the zone in millimeters. In addition, Order of the contours
that do not fit into the zone parameter provides two options; At the end and As soon as possible.
 Orthogonality tolerance: This parameter will become enabled whenever Start point and
direction option is selected (both in machining order By parts and By contours). It defines the
maximum distance between two holes to be considered in the same cutting line.
 Cut in zig-zag: Depending on the selected starting corner, the machining will go in the
selected direction, going back if cut in zigzag option is enabled. In the following table, there
are all the combinations between directions and zigzag for one corner.
 Corner: The point selected in this field will be the first corner of the machining process.
 Direction: The system will follow the direction selected in this field. The user will be able to
select between Horizontal and Vertical.
 Last side: If enabled, the figure of the sheet will be displayed and the selected side of the
sheet will be the last one to be machined.
 Number of zones: X and Y are the number of zones on which the sheet will be divided. The
user will be able to introduce an Offset percentage as well as to enable Visualize checkbox.
135
Mark and Cycles Sequence
Figure 97: Automatic Machining – Cut – Mark and cycles sequence
 Mark by parts: This option is used to select the text marking sequence. The usual marking
sequence is to mark at the beginning and after cutting all the parts. If enabled, this option
will activate all the following options.
 Mark when cutting the parts: If enabled the system will mark the parts when cutting them.
 Milling cycles execution order: This option allows establishing the order in which milling
cycles will be executed. It will be available after activating the “Cycles when cutting the
parts” option. The user can decide the moment in which each milling cycle associated to a
part should be executed.
The user can choose between the following options:
 Before cutting the holes: The system will execute milling cycles before cutting the interior
contours of a part. This option is equivalent to the previous functioning mode.
 After cutting the holes: The system will execute milling cycles after cutting the interior
contours of a part.
136
 At the same time as cutting the holes: The system will execute milling cycles at the same
time as it is cutting the interior contours of a part. The system will order the interior cutting
operations and milling operations according to the value set in the “Order mode of the
holes” field.
For example, if the By proximity criterion is selected (as shown in the image below), the system will
execute milling cycles and cut interior contours at the same time and, for the operations order, it will
take into account the distance existing between them.
Figure 98: Order mode of the holes option
 Inkjet texts when cutting the parts: This option allows the user modifying the marking
sequence, proceeding with the cut after the inkjet marking of each part. Therefore, the
sequence will be: mark part 1, cut part 1, mark part 2, cut part 2, and so on.
 Cycles when cutting the parts: This option allows the user to define the marking sequence to
be done in automatic machining. If the parameter is on, the cycles will be done before
finishing the machining of each part.
137
 Order cycles by: The user will be able to choose between X-Axis, Y-Axis and Nearest.
 Generate cycles before mark: If enabled, the system will generate cycles before marking.
 Generate cut and other technologies in the same subprogram: If enabled, and only if the
system is configured to generate the cutting and marking into the same subroutine, the
system will do so.
Advanced
Figure 99: Automatic Machining – Cut – Advanced configuration
 Group cycles on Lead-ins by rows/columns of parts: Thanks to this option, it is possible to

group some cycles by rows or by columns.
 Generation of labels: This parameter indicates whether labels will be generated or not, as
well as which one will be the label type. The user will be able to select between No generate,
By parts and By group.
 Orthogonality tolerance: This parameter indicates the maximum tolerance (respecting the X
or Y axis) between two parts to be considered as they are in the same column or row.
138
Modify Lead in/outs
1.24.1.7.1 General
Figure 100: Automatic Machining – Cut – Modify Lead-in/Lead-outs – General configuration
 Modify Lead-in/outs position: The user can select between the following options:
 No: If selected, the system will not perform any modification.
 Smooth tool path: This option allows to move the Lead-in/outs automatically in order to
avoid strong movements between them. Therefore, if after a Lead-out there is a rapid, the
system will try to smooth this movement by moving the rapid tangent to the Lead-out. The
user will have to introduce the Angular error tolerance, Number of passes, Number of test
for each contour and It is allowed to reverse contours checkbox.
 Place in one touch figures: This option allows modifying the Lead-in position and prioritizing
their placement in notches. When enabled, Number of test for each contour and It is
allowed to reverse contours options will be enabled.
 Place by proximity: By means of this option the user can place the Lead-in/outs in such a
way that the distance between the Lead-out and the next Lead-in is reduced to the
minimum.
 Modify Lead-in/outs data: The user will be able to select between the following options:
139
 Put the Lead-in/out in bisector ( ): This option modifies the Lead-in/out to the bisector of
the existing Lead-in/outs. When selecting the Navigation button, a dialog box will be
displayed.
 Put the Lead-out like the Lead-in ( ): This option modifies the Lead-out similar to the Lead-
in.
 Modify tangent arc Lead-in by 2 segments ( ): This option allows the user to convert a
tangent arc´s Lead-in to segments Lead-in.
1.24.1.7.2 Apply a GAP
Figure 101: Automatic Machining – Cut – Modify Lead-in/Lead-outs – Apply a GAP configuration
 Apply a GAP in Leads-in/Leads-out: With this option the user can apply a GAP (Micro-joints at
the end of the contour) in all the contours of the part. The system will leave a GAP before
ending each contour. There are two restrictions.
 Type of Lead-in/out: Select between the following options:
 Maximum angle to apply the GAP: Introduce the maximum angle to apply the GAP.
 Value (d1): Select between:
 Fixed: If the user wants the gap to be based on a fixed value then select Fixed value. It is
possible to enter the required fixed value in Value field.
140
 Percentage of sheet thickness: If the user wants the gap to be based on the sheet thickness
select this option. Introduce the sheet thickness percentage in Value field.
 Automatic depending on cutter radius: If the user wants the gap value to be calculated
automatically based on the radius value select this option. Set the Offset (d2) field.
 Offset (d2): The user will be able to select between the options shown below:
 No: Offset is not required.
 Fixed: Set a fixed offset distance.
 Percentage of cutter radius: Set the offset based on cutter radius percentage.
 Percentage of sheet thickness: Set the offset based on sheet thickness percentage.
Figure 102: Offset example
Machining by Zones
Figure 103: Automatic Machining – Machining by zones configuration
 Machining by zones: This option allows cutting the parts by zones and extracting their
remnants whenever finishing the cut. This is normally used in case of very big sheets which
are always moved in the same directions where it is necessary to cut and extract the sheet
framework at the same time. With this type of machines, it is also possible to nest by zones
141
and cut each zone separately. Working this way causes less sheet usage. Select the required
mode from the Machining by zones window, where you will also be able to indicate the
length per each zone.
 Length of the zones: Introduce the required length of the zones.
Inside the machine configuration of machining by zones it is necessary to configure a series of

parameters:
 Nesting by zones: When selecting this option, it is possible to nest the parts automatically
by zones. Click the navigation button attached to this option and Nesting by zone dialog
box will be displayed:
Figure 104: Nesting by zones dialog box
 Zone offset: Margin of the zone.
 Overlay zones: This option allows the user to overlap the different zones. If this option is
activated, the new zone will begin at a specific distance before the end of the previous
zone.
 Margin between zones: The margins between zones. The user will need to select between
The separation of parts, Twice the separation of parts and Value
 Minimum length for each zone: Here the user will be able to define the minimum length for
each zone.
142
 Minimum length for the last zone: Here the user will be able to define the minimum length
the last zone.
 Create a remnant line: By selecting this option, the user will be able to define the remnant
line. It will be possible to define the remnant line type (Linear, True Shape (Real), and True
Shape), Minimum width, Minimum length of the sheet to put the remnant line, as well as
the Distance from the parts (The separation of parts, The semi-separation of parts and
Value).
 The True shape remnant line that the system uses is the true shape line formed by
segments. The line does not make full use in all cases of the holes that exist between the
parts that delimit the line. However, the True shape (real) allows the user to choose as
remnant line the true shape line that tries to follow the shape of the contours of the parts
that it is delimiting. In this way, it is possible to gain material which may be usable for the
next zone.
 Cut by zones: This option allows cutting the parts by zones and extracting their remnants
whenever finishing the cut. It is useful for machines that use very big sheets, which are
always moved in the same directions and where it is necessary to cut and extract the sheet
framework at the same time.
With this type of machines, it is also possible to nest by zones and cut each zone separately. Working
this way causes less sheet usage. It is possible to select which one of the two modes available is
required from the Machining by zones window, where the user will also be able to indicate the
length per each zone. When selecting the Navigation button, the following dialog box is displayed:
143
Figure 105: Cut by zones dialog box
Configure the following parameters:
 Generate remnant line: This option indicated that it is required to cut the sheet framework
or, on the contrary, it is only required to cut the parts by zones.
 Previous offset to move to zone line (p): This is previous offset margin that the system will
use in order to find the best coordinate to carry out the cut of the remnant line.
 Next offset to move the zone line (n): It is the succeeding offset margin that the system will
use in order to find the best coordinate to carry out the cut of the remnant line.
 Vertical head offset: It indicates the distance from which the machine will start cutting
from the sheet edge. Normally, the distance is the half of the cutter radius, given that it will
be used to make sure that the cut is executed on the material.
 Maximum distance to eliminate the last cut line (m): This indicates the distance of the sheet
border from which it will be possible to cut the remnant line, given that the area of the
sheet left is considerably small.
144
Component Removal
This section allows assigning evacuators to all sheet parts. The system provides two different
configurations for evacuations of parts and holes, whose options will be shown in two different tabs.
All the parameters are the same but they will be applied for parts or for hole depending on which tab
the user configures them.
Figure 106: Automatic Machining – Component Removal
 Put a stop: After every evacuation movement, the machine can be stopped if this option is
enabled. If selected, some parameters must be configured.
 Micro-joints: If selected the system will automatically apply micro-joints as evacuation

method depending on the values given on the following parameters. When selecting the
Navigation button, the following dialog box is displayed:
Figure 107: Micro-joints dialog box
145
 The width of micro-joints is a thickness factor: If this parameter is enables, there are two
values to configure: Factor of thickness for corner micro-joints and Factor of thickness for
middle micro-joints.
 Maximum length without micro-joints: This is the maximum distance allowed to part
contours without micro-joints.
 Move the Lead-in/out: The system will try to move the Lead-in/out in order to improve the
manual part removal, always trying to leave the head in the best position.
 Number of attempts: The number here introduced refers to the number of attempts the
system will use in order to move the Lead-in/out.
 Lead-in/out placement: The user can choose where to place the Lead-in/out and the system
will calculate the best position for each part.
 Retain Lead-in/outs defined in part: If the part has Lead-in/outs previously assigned and this
option is enabled, the system will use them. If disabled, the system will erase them and look
for the best position in order to make easier the manual part removal.
 Minimum radius: If the part or hole to evacuate is smaller than this minimum radius, the
system will not remove it from the sheet.
 Removal speed: This parameter allows configuring the speed of the lift system removal.
 Dwell time: This is the delay time for closing the tramp. Sometimes the tramp closes early
and the part cannot go into the box. This value adjusts the time the tramp remains open.
146
Time Calculation
Cutting Parameters
General
Figure 108: Time calculation – Cutting parameters – General configuration
 Piercing time: This is the time the machine takes to perform a piercing. The user will be able
to select between three options:
 Fixed: Expert will add one second each time the machine executes a piercing.
 By thickness: The system will multiply the value here introduced (by default, 1,000 s) by the
thickness.
 Tables of technology: The system will get the value from the Tables of technology.
 Piercing time percentage for pre-cut or pre-punched points: Thanks to this parameter the
user is allowed to define the piercing time, when the piercing point is pre-cut or pre-punched,
in relation with the regular piercing time.
 Cut & mark speed: These are the speeds for making time calculations.
 Active: Means that Expert will make the time estimation with the current active speed.
 Tables of technology: Means the speed will be taken from the Tables of technology.
147
 Beveled speed: The time calculation can use different bevel speeds depending on the bevel
angle, material-thickness and technology table that is being used at each time. This
parameter may have the following values:
o Active: The system will always use the beveled speed of the machine.
o Tables of technology by angles: The system will use the cutting speed defined in the
tables of technology for the bevel angle that is being cut in every case. The user must
configure that the tables of technology can be defined by bevel angles (A036
parameter of the CF file of the machine ON) and configure the cutting speeds for the
different bevel angle ranges and tables of technology.
o Tables of technology by thickness: By means of this option, the system will use the
cutting speed defined in the tables of technology for the thickness that is being cut in
a particular element with bevel. That is to say, depending on the bevel angle, the
system will calculate the cutting thickness of such bevel and will use the cutting
speed defined for such particular thickness in the tables of technology. This way, it
will not be necessary to define the tables of technology by bevel angle (A036
parameter of the CF file of the machines OFF).
 Angle for beveled speed: Thanks to this parameter the user may configure the bevel angle
that will be used to determine the beveled speed:
 Final vector: The inclination angle of the head will be used at the end of the element.
 Initial vector: The inclination angle of the head will be used at the beginning of the element.
 Largest of the vectors: The highest inclination angle of the head will be used in the element.
 Final of the bevel: The angle of the defined level will be used at the end of the element.
 Initial of the bevel: The angle of the defined level will be used at the Initial point of the
element.
 Largest of the bevel: The system will use the largest bevel angle defined in the element.
148
 Cancellation time: This is the time the machine takes to stop everything after the machining
process. It is possible to define whether to calculate the cut stop time considering a fixed
value or those values given in the technology tables. Given that this parameter consists in cut
stop time calculation considering the values given in the technological tables, is only valid for
water machines and regards values such as: Final time (cutting) or Abrasive cancellation time.
 Axis accelerations with jerk limitation: This parameter indicates whether time calculation
needs to consider these limitations or not and which type of calculation will be made.
The user will be able to select between the following options in the drop-down list:
 No: The time calculation will not consider these limitations.
 Using kinematic models: For time calculation in progressive accelerations and

decelerations, the jerk kinematic formulas will be used.
 Using kinematic models with fixed time intervals: The system will use the same formulas as
the previous parameter, but in elements with small length it will be approximated to fixed
time intervals (execution time of a machine cycle) instead of using the time of the formula.
 Jerk in X and Y-axis: Jerk axis in X and Y-axis which specify how the accelerations and
decelerations increase and decrease gradually in each axis.
 Modify compensation for time calculation: In order to obtain an optimum time calculation, it
might be interesting for the time calculation to make use of a different compensation to the
one used in the system to generate the CNC. Here the user will be able to select any of the
following four options in the drop-down list:
 No: The time calculation will not use a different compensation.
 System compensation – By default: The time calculation will use the system compensation.
The compensation mode used will also be the one defined in the system.
 System compensation – Compensation mode: The time calculation will use the system
compensation. The compensation mode can be defined by the user in following
Compensation mode field.
149
Figure 109: Time compensation
 CN compensation: The time calculation will use Control compensation.
Technology Change
Figure 110: Time calculation – Cutting Parameters – Technology change configuration
 Times of technology changes: The following ones are the times the machine takes for
changing the current technology, which are normally very short time durations:
Quality Change
Figure 111: Time calculation – Cutting parameters – Quality change configuration
 Times of quality changes: When using different cutting qualities, the changing time between
each one should be set by filling the table previously shown.
150
Reposition / Extractions
Figure 112: Time calculation – Reposition / Extractions configuration
 Reposition: In this section the user can specify the time the machines take to perform a
reposition. It is divided into the following sections:
 Head: Down time and Up time are the times to lower and raise the head when doing a
reposition.
 Pistons: Down time and Up time are the times the pistons take for making down and up
movements.
 Auxiliar time: This value will be added to reposition time estimation. It depends on the way
each machine performs the repositions.
 Component removal: This section refers to the time the evacuation system will take in order
to get a component from the sheet.
 Extract time with lift: The time of evacuation by lift will take set up depending on the lift
and the movement it makes.
 Extract time using work chute: Here the user will be able to define the Dwell time, Opening
and Close for traps.
151
Rapid Accelerations
In this window the user will have to configure the speeds and accelerations of the machine in the
table provided.
Figure 113: Time calculation – Rapid Accelerations configuration
 New: Click this button to create new acceleration parameters.
 Delete: Click this button to delete the required acceleration parameter.
Linear Cut Accelerations

In this window the user can configure the speeds, accelerations and decelerations of the machine.
Figure 114: Time calculation – Linear cut Accelerations configuration
152
 Maximum speed (90º): The user will be able to select between Active and Tables of
technology.
 Speed: Here it is possible to define the maximum speed at which the machine can cut a
corner of 90º.
 New: Click this button to create new acceleration/deceleration parameters.
 Delete: Click this button to delete the required acceleration/deceleration parameters.
Circular Cut Accelerations

In this window the user will have to configure the acceleration/deceleration values of the machine in
the table provided.
Figure 115: Time calculation - Circular Cut Accelerations configuration
 New: Click this button to create new acceleration/deceleration parameters.
 Delete: Click this button to delete the required acceleration/deceleration parameter.
153
No Cut
This window allows setting up the time Expert will add to estimation when one of these
postprocessor words is going to be executed.
Figure 116: Time calculation – No cut configuration
 Optional stop time: Here the user can set the optional stop time.
 Unconditional stop time: Here the user can set the unconditional stop time.
 Refrigeration: Time the refrigeration system of the machine takes to work. The user can set
Activation time and Cancellation time.
 Head: When Head-up or Head-down words are found in the CNC code, Expert will use the
times set here in Up time and Down time fields.
 Consider head heights of the technological table: Whenever this parameter is enabled the
time calculation will calculate the up and down times according to the height of the cut, the
height of the rapids and the height of the piercings defined in the Table of Technology.
 Sheet Clamps: Here the user will be able to set the Blocking time, Up time, Down time,
Cancellation time (OUT), Cancellation time (OFF), Opening time and Closing time of the sheet
clamps.
154
Upload/Download Sheets
Figure 117: Time calculation – Upload / Download Sheets configuration
 Upload times: Here the user will be able to set the Manual upload time, Automatic upload
time, Clamps test time and Auxiliar time.
 Download times: Here the user will be able to set the Manual download time, Automatic
download time and Auxiliar time.
Cost Calculation
Lantek Expert will perform the sheet of job cost calculation if the following values are configured
properly. They will give a different cost to each different entity that is part of the sheet or job.
Figure 118: Cost calculation configuration
155
 Area: The following are the different options to configure the part area to be used in cost
calculation:
 Rectangle area: Minimum boundary box of the part.
 External area: External area of the part with internal holes.
 Real area: External area of the part without internal holes.
 Rectangle with offset: When selecting this option, the system will increase the size (offset)
of the element only for calculation of cost for the minimum boundary box of the part.
 External with offset: When selecting this option, the system will increase the size (offset) of
the element only for calculation of cost for external area of the part with internal holes.
 Real with offset: When selecting this option, the system will increase the size (offset) of the
element only for calculation of cost for the external area of the part without internal holes.
In order to work with offset the user will have to navigate to Cost of material window and
configure the required Offset and Minimum radius for holes.
The selected type of area is used to calculate the necessary material used to produce the part, which
in turn is used to calculate the cost of the part.
 New: Click this option to fill in the table with Material type and Thicknesses and create a new
record.
 Configure…: Click this button in order to access the table where the cost parameters for all
the machining operations can be set up. The system will display Costs consumables dialog box
when selecting Cost of consumables option or Cost of material dialog box when selecting
Cost of material option. Cost of consumables dialog box will display five parameters which
will determine how the calculation will be made:
 Operation: The operation selected here will be included into the cost calculation each time
the machining executes it. The operations will be different depending on the machine type.
156
 Mode: The mode determines how the cost given in the value parameter will be added into
the calculation.
 Consumables: The consumables can be defined together with the price of volume unit in
the Raw materials option of the system.
 Value: This parameter will increase the total expense of the machining process depending
on the calculation mode.
 Units: Number of units.
 Delete: Click this button in order to delete the selected record from the table.
 Copy: This option is very useful when the configuration of different materials and/or
thicknesses is similar. By means of this option the user can copy all the cost configuration
parameters into a new material/thickness assignation.
 Criteria: The list of materials and thicknesses can be filtered by means of this option. The
system will only show the range set in this window. The "< >" character means any material.
Ink-Jet
Figure 119: Ink-Jet configuration
 Automatic: If enabled, the system will introduce the Ink-jet text introduced here on every
part of the sheet automatically.
157
 Text data: The text given here will be marked into the part. Introduce the required values in
Length of one character, Height of one character, Horizontal separation between characters,
Vertical separation between characters and Correct position.
 Correct position: The values of the Offset (X and Y) will determine the distance between the
external contour of the part and the marked text. But if there is a hole where the marked
text should be, the user can configure the distance from the initial point at which the system
should try again. This distance will be introduced in Search Step field X and Y.
 Rotate the text with the part: The text will be marked in the part always in the same position
as the part is placed in the nesting.
 Delete the text if it does not fit in the part: If enabled, the system will delete the text that
does not fit in the part. This option will only be activated once Rotate the text with the part
checkbox is activated.
 Reference text: With this option the user can define the reference text for the Ink-jet
marking. Every time this reference text is found in a part, the system will replace it by the
text previously introduced in Text field.
Postprocessor
General
Figure 120: Postprocessor general configuration
158
 Machine tolerance: It refers to the precision of decimal numbers that the machine supports.
It is important to configure this parameter properly because if the system is sending
coordinates with different precision, the machine may not work correctly.
 Postprocessor configuration file: This is the name of the specific postprocessor file.
Manipulating this file will result in CNC code generation way changes. Also the user can edit
the PS parameters of the Postprocessor configuration file.
 Tables of technology file: This is the name where the technological tables’ values will be
stored. The user can edit PS parameters of this file.
 Time calculation file: This file will contain time calculation parameters, here the name of the
file can be configured. Also the user can edit the PS parameters of the time calculation file.
 Cost calculation file: The cost calculation parameters will be stored in this file, here the name
can be set up. The user can edit PS parameters of the file.
 Seed file: The user will be able to visualize the seed file of the active machine.
 Technological configuration file: The user will be able to visualize the Technological
configuration file which provides all the general data.
 Material/thickness dependent data: The user will be able to visualize all the
material/thickness dependent data, which is the same file as Technology table file, but can be
located in a different path. If the path coincides, this one will be enabled.
 Data for the postprocessor file: The user can visualize the Data for the postprocessor file.
 Communication configuration file: The user can visualize de Communication configuration

file.
 Pallet file: The user can visualize the Pallet file.
159
Block Numbering
Figure 121: Postprocessor Block Numbering Configuration
 Block number text: Each CNC block will start with the character given here. However, the
block number hast to be configured through the following parameters:
 Number of characters allowed for block number: It refers to the digits that the block
number will have. For example, if the text of block number is N:
 N00001…
 N00002…
 N00003…
 Strip leading zero´s: If enabled, the system will delete the zeros of the CNC block
numeration.
 First block number: The number of the first block can be set up here.
 Step between block numbers: The line for each block of the CNC code will start with the Text
of block numbers and the First block number for the first block, and the rest of lines will
increase the number of the value given here on this parameter.
160
Free Tape
Figure 122: Postprocessor Free tape configuration
 Number of null characters at beginning: Indicates the number of null characters at the
beginning of the file for synchronization.
 Number of null characters at end: This is the number of null characters at the end of the CNC
code which will be output from the system.
 ASCII code of null characters: American Standard Code for Information Interchange of null
characters.
Specifics of Cut
Figure 123: Postprocessor Specifics of cut configuration
161
 Default technology: This technology will be applied to the geometry. The user can select
between Cut and Mark.
 Dot cycle by default: The postprocessor is going to apply this default dot cycle if there is not
any specific cycle applied in Machining / Cycles section. For all the dots drawn on the drawing
module, the system will introduce the cycle type chosen here between Drill cycle or Cut on
and off.
 Technological index by default: Depending on the default technology, the index given here
will be applied to the geometry from the moment it has been generated. Clicking the
navigation button the system will show a dialogue with all the cutting qualities.
 Circles in one movement only: The Numeric Control needs a specific instruction in order to
generate a circle. Normally the system divides the circle into two arcs which execute two
instructions. This parameter should be enabled so that Numeric Controls work properly and
circles are created only in one movement.
 Modify the center of the circles: When the tolerance of the machine is small, the system
changes the center of the circles for making those points recognizable for the machine.
 Arcs in one movement only: When there is a micro-joint inserted in a circle, the resultant arc
is below 360º and, normally, is divided into two arcs. If enabled, the system will generate this
arc in just one instruction.
 Type of leading in circles: In this field the user will be able to select between the following
options:
 No: The postprocessor is going to use the configuration made in automatic lead-in/out on
circles.
 Linear: Independent of the configuration made in automatic lead-in/out on circles, the CNC
code will be generated placing a lineal lead-in whose length will be specified on the Length
of leading in circles parameter.
162
 Circular: The postprocessor will not take into account the configuration made on the
system, and it will place a circular lead-in on circles whose length will be taken from the
Length of leading in circles parameter.
 Linear tolerance: This value is the linear tolerance for calculations of the system. It should be
the same as the value configured in Utilities / Configure machines / General / Linear
tolerance.
 Angular tolerance: The system will use this angular tolerance value for calculations. It should
be the same as the value given in Utilities / Configure machines / General / Angular
tolerance.
 Length of leading in circles: If there are arc geometries smaller than the machine tolerance,
the system will decompose them into one or more segments whose length will be the
configured at Length of broken segments parameter.
 Minimum length of arc: If there are smaller arc geometries than the machine tolerance, the
system will decompose them into more segments whose length will be the one configured at
Length of broken segments parameter.
 Length of broken segments: The value introduced in this field will be the maximum length
for a segment.
 Process micro-joints like micro-welds: This option can be only used for those machines that
support micro-welding technology. If enabled, the system will order the machine to use
micro-welding instead of micro-joint instructions.
 Centre the multihead: When a machine is multihead, there is always one which is the Control
Head. All the heads follow the control head movement. If this control head is not placed on
corners, the system must know which head will be the control head. If enabled and if the
number of heads is odd, the system will take the head of the center. If the number of heads
is par, it will take the most centered one nearest to the position of the control head.
163
Reserved
Figure 124: Postprocessor Reserved Configuration
Do not modify these parameters without consulting a skilled technician, they are internal parameters
and may cause machine damage if they are changed without knowledge.
164
Jobs (CAM) Module
2 JOBS (CAM) MODULE

Jobs module, also known as CAM, is the first window that will be opened as soon as Lantek Expert is
launched. From here, the user can easily access to the rest of the Modules, create jobs and folders,
import parts, manage parts/sheets/materials, manage exporters, import and export nestings,
manage Databases and customize the ribbon between many other options. The main view is
provided with the Job Explorer, Product List and Sheet List sections as shown below:
Figure 125: Jobs (CAM) module
JOBS
Close
Close ( ) option allows the user to close the active job.
165
Jobs (CAM) Module
Recents
This section provides information about the Recent jobs and Recent kits opened. From here the user
can open any of them.
Jobs
New ( ) option allows the user creating new jobs. In order to Create a new job, perform the
following steps:
1. Click New option and the system will display Job dialog box as shown below:
Figure 126: Job dialog box
2. Introduce the required data in the fields provided. The different fields in this dialog box are briefly
described below:
 Reference: Unique reference code assigned to the job. The system assigns automatically this
code.
 Name: Name of the job.
166
Jobs (CAM) Module
 User data (1-5): Data of the job. The user can also navigate to the existing Data list and select
the required element or enter a new element, which will be added in the Data list for future
use.
 Description: Additional details of the job.
3. Click OK button in order to save the changes.
Open ( ) option allows the user opening an existing job. In order to open an existing job,
select the required job from the existing list and the system will open it.
Edit ( ) option allows the management of jobs so that the user can modify the required data.
Click this option and the system will display Jobs dialog box as shown below:
Figure 127: Jobs window
4. The different fields of this dialog box are briefly described in the following lines:
 Delete associated elements: If enabled, the associated elements of the job will be deleted.
167
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Delete parametric elements only: If enabled, the parametric elements of the job will be
deleted. This field will only be available when Delete associated elements checkbox is
selected.
 Delete the manufacturing order associated to the job: If enabled, the manufacturing order
associated to the job will be deleted.
 Export: Select this option in order to export a job. Perform the following steps:
5. Select the job that to be exported and click Export. The system will display Directory dialog box.
6. Select the required folder from this dialog box and click Select.
7. The selected job will be exported.
 Create: Select this option in order to create a new job. Perform the following steps:
1. Click Create button and the system will display Job dialog box.
2. Introduce the required details in the dialog box provided and click OK.
3. The created job will appear in the list of Jobs dialog box.
 Modify: Select this option to modify the information of an existing job. Perform the following
steps:
1. Select the job whose information is required to be modified. Click Modify and the system will
display Job dialog box.
2. Modify the required information and click OK button in order to save the changes.
 Delete: Select this option in order to delete a job. Perform the following steps:
1. Select the job that is required to be deleted. Click Delete button.

2. The system will display a warning message asking whether the user wants to delete the selected
job.
3. Click Yes and the selected job will be deleted.
 Close: Select this button in order to close Jobs dialog box.
168
Jobs (CAM) Module
Kits
New ( ) option allows the user creating new kits. In order to Create a new kit, perform the
following steps:
1. Click New option and the system will display Kit dialog box as shown below:
Figure 128: Kit dialog box
2. Introduce the required data in the fields provided. The different fields in this dialog box are briefly
described below:
 Reference: Unique reference code assigned to the kit. The system assigns automatically this
code.
 Name: Name of the kit.
 User data (1-5): Data of the kit. The user can also navigate to the existing Data list and select
the required element or enter a new element, which will be added in the Data list for future
use.
 Description: Additional details of the kit.
169
Jobs (CAM) Module
Open ( ) option allows the user opening an existing kit. In order to open an existing kit,
perform the following steps, select the required kit from the existing list and the system will open it.
Edit ( ) option allows the management of kits so that the user can modify the required data.
Click this option and the system will display Kits dialog box as shown below:
Figure 129: Kits dialog box
Information
Properties ( ) allows the user viewing and editing the information related to the active job.
When selected, the system will display Job dialog box, in which the user can introduce the reference,
name and user data, as well as the description of the job selected.
Export ( ) allows the user exporting the current job with all the necessary information, such as
parts, nestings and machining backup files between many others to the required directory.
In order to Export a job, perform the following steps:
170
Jobs (CAM) Module
1. Select the job to be exported and then click Export. The system will display Database dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 130: Database dialog box
2. Introduce the Directory in which the job will be exported, or click Navigation button in order to
select it.
3. Click OK button and the system will export the selected job (The user will be able to visualize
System is working loading window until the loading process is finished).
4. The selected job will be exported with all the necessary information such as parts, nesting,
machines back up files, etc.
Subjobs ( ) comprise the different parts that compose a job grouped by machine, material and
thickness. Therefore, a job will contain as many subjobs as machine-material-thickness combinations.
When selecting this option, the Subjob selection dialog box is displayed:
Figure 131: Subjob selection dialog box
 Modify: When clicking this button, the system will display a dialog box in which the user will
be able to modify the Machine, Material and Thickness of the selected job.
 Close: This button allows closing Subjob selection dialog box.
171
Jobs (CAM) Module
Help
In this section, the user will find useful information in Documents and Online Resources.
User Guide option enables getting instructions and suggestions to work more effectively and
proficiently. Whenever it is selected the user will be provided with two options in the drop-down list:
Contents of the help system option will open the online help designed to give assistance in the
use of the software application.
Tutorial option introduces all the important modules, basic concepts and relevant
functionalities of the software.
New Features option allows the user discovering all the new features and enhancements
included in this new software version.
Technical information option provides information related to specification and technical

requirements of the system.
Web Page option provides access to our Main Page and Product Home Page. The Main Page
displays all information related to our company, solutions, products, support, partners, news, events
and customers. On the other hand, the Product Home Page provides all the technical characteristics,
technology, advantages, specifications and management of the product.
Register option allows the user obtaining the rights to the guarantee and access to technical
information and support. There are two types of register:
 Web registration: The user can fill in the registry form in our Website.
 Manual registration: The user can introduce the required information, read the license
agreement in detail and accept it before sending it.
Send comments and suggestions option, as the name indicates, allows the user informing
Lantek of any comments and/or suggestions.
172
Jobs (CAM) Module
Contact technical support option will open support section of our website where the user will
be able to contact Technical Support Department and Customer Service.
In addition to the previous options, it is very important to mention that located on the right side of
the window, the user will be provided with information about the Version, Service Pack, Hotfix,
License, Serial Number of the Lantek key and active Server and Database.
Figure 132: About Lantek Expert
Print
This section allows the user printing the Most recent lists and All the installed lists. When clicking
Configure lists option, Lists dialog box is displayed, allowing the user to create new custom lists,
install them or remove them from the list.
Configuration Options
Configuration options section is used to configure different options that are used in Expert
software. By means of this option the user can get all the relevant configuration details at a glance.
173
Jobs (CAM) Module
The system will display the following:
Figure 133: Configuration options backstage page
All Configuration options will be displayed together with a brief description, which enables the user
to access the required option in a more user-friendly way.
General
Using this option, the user can configure different parameters related to the Nesting module. The
system will display Configure: System window as shown below:
174
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 134: Configure: System window (Main module)
 Units: The system will use the unit system selected as Metric or Imperial. Find below a couple
of tables that detail the units used by the system in each case:
Figure 135: Metric system
175
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 136: Imperial system
 Concurrency management: When either one or more users access to the same job, or the
same user does it from different computers, there is a lack of knowledge from the rest of
users about the fact that this job is being used, what may result in an undesirable behavior.
The aim of this section is to manage this concurrency and avoid this lack of knowledge.
 Display a warning when the job, kit or part is being used by another user: This parameter
allows configuring the management to detect concurrency of jobs (nestings), kits and parts
(figures).
 Allow to continue when the job, kit or part is being used by another user: This parameter
allows defining the system restrictions when there is concurrency management. If disabled,
the system will not allow accessing to those elements of the system that are being used by
other users.
This configuration must be executed by equipment. Each user can only have one job blocked.
 Work with automatic references: If enabled, the system will automatically create the
automatic references for the newly created parts/sheet. If Mandatory is activated the user
will not be able to edit the created reference.
 Visualize information about the management system: With this option, the user can view
the information related to the management system.
176
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Manage sheets only through Masterlink: This parameter is directed to Expert integrations so
that it is possible to manage sheets either through the system, through Expert or only by
means of Masterlink, executing the creation, modification and deletion of operations
through the engine provided by Masterlink. If activated, the options Create, Modify and
Delete will become disabled both in sheet management of the Main module and in New
sheet option locate in Nesting and Machining module.
 Allow to change the status of the nestings: In this section the user will be able to select
between No, Workshop, Available and Both of them. When any of the last three options is
selected, the option Save as… will be displayed in Nesting and Machining module.
 Allow to unblock available nestings or workshop nestings: If enabled, the system will
unblock all the remnants which have been generated when doing the nesting. This ensures
that the generated remnants will be used for future jobs.
Draw and Nest

This option enables the configuration of the parameters corresponding to Drawing and Nesting. The
system will display Configure: Draw and Nest window, which is composed of six different tabs that
separate the parameters per the following groups:
2.1.8.2.1 General
 Import parts that do not exist: Enable this option to import parts that do not exist.
 Overwrite quantity when importing existent parts: Select this option to overwrite the
quantity of the parts when importing the existent parts, or when a part already exists in the
database with a defined quantity and the user imports the same part again. The system can
be configured to add the quantity of the new part to the previous one or to replace the old
quantity by the new one.
 Warn in case of changing the material, thickness or machine of a machined part or with
technology or nested: Select this option to get a warning message while changing the
material, thickness or a machined part.
177
Jobs (CAM) Module
When modifying and/or importing a part, if it already had technology assigned or was machined, the
system will allow the user to create a new part coming from the original. If enabled, the system will
allow overwriting the part or creating a new one.
Now the system will warn if the part has been nested. Besides, when the warning is shown, it says
how the part is, whether it has been only machined, or it only has technology or whether it has the
three things. When selecting this option, the system allows selecting the Allow to create a copy of
the part option.
 Large icons: This option permits the visualization of the icons of the main window in a large
format.
 Warn parts without geometry detection entering nesting and machining module: Select this
option to get warning message if parts are detected without geometry.
 Put together equal parts in the nesting and machining module: It is possible to group the
parts with the same reference from a subjob. It may happen that a subjob could have the
same part reference several times because this parts needs to be manufactured for different
manufacturing orders (different sale order, customer, etc.). In such cases, it is possible to
group, visualize and manage these different manufactures like if they were just one in
Nesting and Machining module.
The part quantity to be nested will be the sum of the quantities of the manufacturing orders of the
part. The distribution of the parts in the nesting will be automatically made following some
configurable distribution criteria. The user can configure one of the following distribution options:
Labor ticket, Priority, Quantity, Nested quantity, Pending quantity, Proportional quantity and
Product. The distribution criteria can be applied in a descending or ascending way.
It is also possible to configure if the user wants to group the parts or not when the workshop sheet is
printed.
Figure 137: Put together equal parts in the nesting and machining module dialog box
178
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Release unnested parts: In order to release unnested parts, select the required option from
the drop-down list provided: No, Always and Ask.
 Release unnested parts of filling hollows free: When importing parts from the database, the
user will have two options depending on a parameter: parts of filling hollows or normal
parts.
 Delete the CNC when deleting the nesting: Select this option to delete the CNC code while
deleting the nesting.
 Only one machine, material and thickness for a job: Select this option to make sure that
there is only one machine, material and thickness is used for a particular job.
 Only one machine, material and thickness for a kit: Select this option to make sure that
there is only one machine, material and thickness is used for a particular kit.
 Create a .ZIP file of the exported job: Select this option to create a .zip file of any file which is
being exported. The user can also create a .ZIP file from an exported manufacturing order.
The compressed file will be stored in “Lantek \ Expert \ Export \ M.O. name \”.
 Work with the machine files in network: With this option, the user can work with the
machine files which are in the network, networking with all or some machine files. Supposing
that all the users are on the same network, the way the system will work as follows:
1. The first user configuring the system to work in this way, the system will copy the local machine
desired file or files into a defined network directory and will start working with this copied file.
2. The following users will be able to join to this network but their local machine files will not be
copied into the network directory.
When clicking the navigation button the system will display Machine files in network dialog box as
shown below:
179
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 138: Machine files in network dialog box
There are some restrictions to work with some machine files:
If the user uses networking with the Material-Thickness files and not with the CT (Technological
Configuration) files, when configuring the CT file to work through the network (in the future) the
user may have problems because the CT parameters will not be copied to the network directory.
The following applications are not working through the network = PrepMach, ExpSetUp and
MchSetUp.
 Automatically refresh the job and kit explorer: This option allows the user to refresh the
tree and to update it in case of changes on the database. Apart from refreshing the explorers
previously mentioned, this option also enables updating the current manufacturing order,
refreshing the active views at the moment of the execution.
In addition, it is possible to configure the system to execute a complete refresh automatically every
certain time. The user can activate or deactivate Automatic refresh option and indicate the required
periodicity for the update in case the option is enabled.
2.1.8.2.2 Auxiliar
 Adjust sheets to sides: If this parameter is activated, the sheets are drawn in one corner of
the graph area. If deactivated the sheets are adjusted to the center of the graph area.
Activation of this parameter is recommended since, if the sheets are drawn in a corner, more
space will be available for the part screens.
180
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Work with sheet references: If this parameter is disabled all the sheets with the same
thickness, material and size will be assumed to be equal, however if it is enabled it is possible
to differentiate between sheets with the same thickness, material and size, by giving them a
reference name. When creating a new sheet, if this parameter is enabled, the system will
prompt for a reference.
 Automatic sheet references: Using this option the user will be able to define a specific
format in order to automatically obtain sheet references. If this option is enabled, when
clicking on the navigation button the system will display Automatic sheet references format
dialog box as shown below to define the format of the automatic references.
Figure 139: Automatic sheet references format dialog box
When defining the Format, the user can combine the value of the fields Material, Length, Width and
Thickness.
 Verify the machining of the sheets while saving: When saving the sheet, the system will test
that the machining process has been done properly looking if all the parts and contours are
machined, there is no overlapping between parts and auxiliary geometry. If there is any error
the system will display a warning message showing where the error is. If not the system will
display All machining on the sheet has been executed completion message.
 Define the default snap mode: When this option is active, a new button will be displayed at
the snap mode toolbar and it will allow defining the snap mode by default. The selected
option will be displayed with a red frame all around the button. Each time the user uses
another option different than the default option, the system after applying the option
181
Jobs (CAM) Module
selected will come back to the default option. To disable any default option, double click on
the new button.
 “Undo” option: Undo option is very useful when making changes, given that it allows going
back to previous states of the system. Here the user should decide how many levels to use in
Drawing and Nesting modules. The user will have to select between:
 All levels: With this option the system will store in the memory the highest number of levels
possible. It is important to understand that this choice will make the program use the
memory of the computer, so if the amount of RAM memory is small (64 MB or less), it is not
advisable to use this option.
 Defined number (Number of levels): Instead of all levels, the system allows to configure the
number of levels the program is going to remember for the Undo option. Five numbers of
levels is the value recommended for those computers whose RAM memory is small (64 MB
or less).
 Scale factor for keyboard and wheel zoom: Using this option the user can configure the
scale factor while doing the zoom, both for the keyboard and wheel zoom. The value to
enter as scale factor should be in the range of 0.1 to 100, being 2 the default value. A smaller
value than 1 inverts the zoom behavior, the page up key makes zoom-out and the page down
key makes zoom-in. The same is applicable for the mouse wheel. If the value is 1 the zoom is
not performed.
In case of the mouse wheel, consider the following:
 Moving the mouse wheel forward, the system will perform a zoom–in and moving backward
the system will perform a zoom-out.
 If the mouse right button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing will
be moved down and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward the mouse
wheel, the drawing will be moved up.
 If the mouse left button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing will
be moved to the left and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward the
mouse wheel, the drawing will be moved to the right.
182
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Keeping the middle button pressed while dragging the mouse the user pans the screen.
 Keeping the middle button and shift key pressed while dragging the mouse the user does a
dynamic zoom. As mouse cursor moves up the screen view should zoom in. As the mouse
cursor moves down the screen view should zoom out. To configure the mouse sensibility or
change its behavior it is possible to change this parameter:
 Parameter >= 1.0 up = zoom in; down = zoom out.
 0.0 < parameter < 1.0 up = zoom out; down = zoom in
 Quadrant angle: This is the angle in which the circles are going to be divided. The default
angle is 90 degrees, therefore there are four possible points.
 Use: When calculating the material optimization, the user will have to select between the
following three options:
 Real area: This is the external area without the interiors.
 External area: This is the area of the exterior perimeter of the part.
 Rectangular area: This is the area of the minimum rectangle of the part.
 Generate windows metafile of the workshop sheet while saving (WMF): When saving, the
system will generate a WMF file with the current workshop sheet nesting. The WMF is a
standard graphic format which can be treated from many external applications. The file will
be generated inside Database folder.
 Generate windows metafile of the sheet while saving (WMF): When saving, the system will
generate a WMF file with the current sheet nesting. The WMF is a standard graphic format
which can be treated from many external applications. The file will be generated inside
Database folder.
 Generate PDF of part workshop sheet while saving: By means of this option, the system will
generate PDF documents with the workshop sheet of the selected part when saving the
parts and nestings. The user may customize the folder in which the pdf files will be
183
Jobs (CAM) Module
generated. In addition, it is also possible to select whether the pdf file will be generated with
the name by default or with the same name of the CNC associated to the sheet.
 Generate PDF of sheet workshop sheet while saving: With this option, PDF documents will
be generated with the workshop sheet of the selected sheet when saving the parts and
nestings. Every time a part or a nesting is saved, the corresponding workshop sheet PDF will
be generated. The user may customize the folder in which the pdf files will be generated. In
addition, it is also possible to select whether the pdf file will be generated with the name by
default or with the same name of the CNC associated to the sheet.
 Generate sheet DXF while saving: As the Generate sheet windows metafile while saving
(WMF) option, if enabled, the system will generate a DXF file. DXF files are standard drawing
exchange formats. When saving, the system will generate a DXF file with the current sheet
nesting.
 Generate part DXF while saving: Same as the previous option, if enabled the system will
generate a DXF file with the current part nesting when saving.
 Save autorecover information: This option saves the automatically recovered information of
the current work in the drawing and nesting modules. The desired time can be set to save the
auto recovered information.
 Order subjobs: Whenever entering the Nesting module the subjobs will be ordered
depending on the configuration made here.
 Contour attributes: The postprocessor will generate the proper CNC code for the attributes
of the contours here defined. The system will display Contour Attributes dialog box as shown
below, where the user will have to introduce the required data:
184
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 140: Contour Attributes dialog box
 Auxiliary geometry: It is possible to create non cut lines configuring their line properties as
well as their visualization. First of all, it is necessary to create the new non cut types that will
be used and to specify the name and properties of the line (color, style and thickness), as
well as the possibility of visualizing this line on the sheet. From this moment on it will be
possible to modify these properties from Colors tab located next to the rest of customizable
elements.
Figure 141: Auxiliary geometry window
Non cut line concept allows distinguishing between different types of lines that contain different
applications, such as up folding, down folding, welding, boxes, etc. This way, it will be possible to
create non cut lines configuring their line properties as well as their visualization in Draw and Nest
view. First of all, it will be necessary to create the new non cut types that will be used from the Draw
and Nest Configuration.
185
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.1.8.2.3 Do All
 Order of sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will use the type of
order set in this field. The user will be provided with the following options:
 Largest to smallest
 Smallest to largest
 By priority
 Remnants before sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will look
first at the status of Remnants before sheets parameter and given the case it is enabled, the
system will prioritize the use of existing remnants over sheets.
 Select sheets for quotation: This option enables the user selecting sheets for quotation. The
drop-down list provided on the right side of the field provides the following options:
 No
 Yes
 Only these
 If the job is for quotation
 Only use sheets according to the criteria for sheet selection: By means of this parameter,
the user can configure the required criteria for sheets selection. Once it has been enabled,
the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
The system will display Sheet selection window, where the user will be able to set the minimum and
maximum length as well as the minimum and maximum width of the sheets. In addition, the user will
be able to see the values previously introduced in the following fields:
 User data (1-3)
 Show the sheets with quantities equal to zero
 Select blocked sheets
186
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Select the remnants generated by nesting
 Select the remnants generated by user
 These parameters previously listed will be disabled. In order to modify them, the user will
have to go to Nesting module / Sheets / New / Criteria window. Whenever Do all option is
executed, the system will use those sheets that match with the defined criteria.
 Make unitary nestings with long parts: Thanks to this parameter, it is possible to create
unitary nestings with long parts when executing Do all option. The user must introduce the
required value in Minimum length field, which must be in millimeters. This option will check
all the parts that compose the job considering their dimensions and if any of them is bigger
than the value here configured, the system will create a unitary nesting with the rotation of
the dimension that exceeds the configured value. Given the case both dimensions are bigger
than the value specified, the part will be nested in the original rotation. For instance, if the
user wants to make a unitary nesting for all the parts of a job, it would only be necessary to
configure the Minimum length with a small enough value, as for example one millimeter.
 Look for sheets in stored nestings: If this parameter is enabled, the system will search first
for the nestings saved as Stored nesting. When activating this parameter, the following
parameters will become enabled:
 Criteria: This field allows filtering the stored nestings that the user wants to use. Once it has
been enabled, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Import stored nesting (Criteria)
window. This window allows filtering nestings by Machine, Material, Thickness, Reference,
Date, Length and Width.
 Delete existing machining: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to be used
has machining, it will be previously deleted before including it in the job and it will be
machined again during the process.
 Regenerate: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to use has machining, it will
be completely regenerated before including it in the job and it will be machined again
187
Jobs (CAM) Module
during the process. Remember that regenerating also supposes deleting the existing
machining.
 Look for the best format of sheets: Given the case this parameter is enabled; the system will
try to nest all the parts making use of each one of the existing formats. For example, there
are three different types of formats. The system will execute three tries, by nesting all the
parts of the job in format number one, then in format number two and finally, in format
number three. The system will compare the efficiency reached by every one of the formats
and will make use of the most efficient one.
 Look for the best combination of sheets: This parameter depends on the field Minimum
efficiency. If this parameter is enabled, the system will take into account the minimum
efficiency set and will look for the best sheet per each nesting (the most efficient one). As in
the previous case, imagine there are three different type of formats. The system will test all
the existing formats per nesting, and will choose the most efficient one per nesting. For
example, the system will test nesting number one, in sheet number 1 (with an efficiency of
65%), in sheet number two (efficiency of 72%) and sheet number three (efficiency of 85%).
Since sheet number three is the most efficient, the system will save it and start testing again
with the following nesting in every sheet format following the same process until all the
parts have been nested. If none of the existing sheets meets the efficiency requirement set
in Minimum efficiency field, the system will keep the one that has achieved the highest
efficiency.
 Minimum efficiency to eliminate each sheet: Once Do All option has been performed and the
machining has been executed, the system will test whether the sheets used meet the
minimum efficiency requirement set in this field. Those sheets whose efficiency is not bigger
than the value configured, will be deleted. In this case the system will make use of other
sheets until the minimum efficiency is exceeded.
 Rectangular nesting – Maximum efficiency: The option will be able to select which the
maximum percentage of used area for rectangular nesting will be.
 Minimum efficiency calculation mode: This option allows deciding the way that the
efficiency (defined in the previous point) to eliminate sheets will be calculated. The available
options are:
188
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Real area: Sum of the real area of all parts.
 External area: Sum of the external area of all parts.
 Rectangular area: Sum of the rectangular area of all parts.
 All parts bounding box: Area of the bounding box of all parts.
 Maximum time to look for the best sheets: Here the user must introduce the maximum time
that will be taken to search for the best sheets. Remember that the time must be introduced
in seconds. During the Do All execution, once the time here specified is reached, the system
will stop testing methods and will choose the best one (most efficient) found up to that
moment.
 Prenesting: This option allows creating temporary sheets with limited quantity so that it is
possible to select automatically which ones are the most adequate to execute the parts
nesting of a determined job. In order to activate this option, it is necessary to activate Look
for the best format of sheets or Look for the best combination of sheets. These options are
necessary in order to test all the temporary formats that the system can create.
Apart from temporary sheets, it is also possible to indicate if it is required to use or not the sheets
that have already been created in the system. If this option is activated, the system would use the
same sheets that would be used in the nesting of a complete job. If sheet dimensions are required as
much adjusted as possible, the user can configure Adjust final sheet dimensions to nested
dimensions’ option. This parameter can be defined both in X and Y or in both dimensions. This option
allows creating sheet formats that take full advantage of a coil, given that it is possible to set it to
always adjust in X.
Once the system obtains the final sheet format result, the user will be able to create the sheets in the
database or not. In this way, the user will also be able to create quotation sheets if required.
Finally, it will also be possible to launch the sheet list so that the user can be provided with the list of
used formats in the current job. If required, it will be possible to print directly or to get a previous
display to save the list in a determined format as, for example, PDF.
189
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 142: Prenesting dialog box
 Generate remnants after nesting: Given the case this parameter is enabled, once the nesting
has been executed, the system will generate automatically the remnants of every sheet (if
any).
 Cut after nesting: If enabled, the system will perform the machining operation after the
nesting has been done.
 Deal with equal sheets: Using this option, the system will calculate if the same sheet can be
done twice instead of making the nesting and machining process of the same parts in the
same sheets more than once, what will help the user save time.
If this parameter is disabled, the system will get one sheet and make the nesting and machining. Get
the following sheet and make the nesting and machining. The system will execute the same steps
once and again until the whole job has been finished even if the sheets are equal, which results in a
longer execution time.
If this parameter is enabled, after performing the first sheet and machining, the system will detect
whether the following sheet is equal to the first one (this means we have the same number of parts,
which can be placed in the same positions). Given the case it detects an equal sheet, the system will
store just one sheet, meanwhile the Worksheet will define that the sheet must be machined twice.
190
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.1.8.2.4 Print
 Print sheets while saving: If enabled, the system will print the sheets while saving.
 Print machining: If enabled, the machining will also appear in the workshop sheet.
By means of a code (TSP_mecX), the user can force printing the machining, regardless of the
value established in the system configuration.
In addition to the previous, the user can also show the clamp movements in the current sheet
by means of codes (TDB_c92 and TDB_c93). In particular, it is possible to visualize the number of
repositions and the relocations related to each one of them.
 Print the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with linear texture making
easier the differentiation between sheet and remnant when printing.
 Only the initialization: If enabled, in the workshop sheet will only appear the initialization.
 Prompt for sheets before printing: Do All option may generate more than one sheet. If this
option is enabled, the system will ask for the sheets required to print instead of printing all of
them.
 Print: The system will generate the worksheet of the sheets selected here. The user can
select between: The current sheet, Every sheet of the subjob, Every sheet of the job and Select
sheets.
 Prints identifiers of parts: If enabled, the identifiers of the parts will be included in the
printing workshop sheet.
 Identifiers: The user can select between the following options:
 Print the name: The system will include the name of the part inside the geometry.
 Print the index: The system will insert the same number to every equal part of the sheet.
This index is very useful because it will be printed in the Factory sheets list.
191
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Print the order: The system will include in the parts the number that corresponds to their
order.
 Line width: When printing, the width of the different elements involved can be modified in
order to make easier their identification. The user will be able to set the Line width of the
Geometry part, Geometry sheet, Machining part and Machining sheet.
 Prompt for template name before printing: If enabled, the system will prompt for the
template name to use before printing. This option is useful when the user has more than one
template defined. These templates, also called boxes, can be parameterized. In other words,
the user can define the line thickness, position and dimension of the drawings, text format
and database fields required in the boxes. In order to define a new box, contact the product
support team.
2.1.8.2.5 Colors
This window allows configuring the colors of the whole system. The user will get the list of
elements/aspects that can be configured by clicking the drop-down arrow located at the top of the
window. The configurable aspects are the following: Background, Cursor cross, Axis, Background of
sheets, Edge of sheet, Background of remnants, Edge of remnants, Clamps and work zone, Straight,
Point, Selection, Dragging, Machining, Machining with multihead, From Point, Rapids, Cycles, Machining
texts, Punched, Punch attribute, Common punch attribute, Shear attribute, Mark attribute, Cut
attribute, Micro-joints attribute, Shear, Pattern, Dimensions / Text, Simulation Window-Capture, Virtual
movement, Bridges, Loops, Lead-in / Lead-outs, Micro-joints, Geometry, Upper and lower bevels, Upper
bevel, Lower bevel, Remnant line, Cutting quality 1-12, Powder mark, Drill mark, Pen mark, Cut mark,
Rapid with head down, Suction cup, Activated suction cup, Reference point, Grid, Auxiliary clamps and
auxiliary work zone, Distinguished color 1-30, Active part in part list.
192
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 143: Colors examples
The user will be able to configure the Type, Make on and Color of the previously mentioned aspects.
2.1.8.2.6 Display
 Go to an instruction before executing manual punches on the nesting: This is an option for
punching and combined machines. This option makes easier inserting nibbling or simple
punches in the correct position of the machining from the Nesting and Machining module.
 Show remnant references on screen: If enabled, whenever a remnant is generated the

system will show the assigned reference inside it.
Figure 144: Show remnant references on screen example
 Show part texts on the sheet: In the Drawing window it is possible to assign a description
text which will have no machining effect. If this parameter is enabled, this text will be
displayed.
193
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 145: Show part texts on the sheet example
 Show the dragging of the part with collision control: If enabled, the user will be able to
visualize the dragging part with the collision control.
 Show non-cut contours on the sheet: The system provides an option to assign non-cut
technology to the contours. This means that these contours will not be machined unless this
assigned technology changes.
Figure 146: Show non cut contours on the sheet example
If enabled, the non-cut geometries will be shown in the configured color by.
 Selection by window/capture/trap: If enabled, whenever the user selects parts (to erase,
copy or move them between many other options) they will get different colors so that the
visualization is easier and clearer.
Figure 147: Selection by window/capture/trap example
 Simulate selection when mouse is moved: If enabled, whenever the mouse passes over a
segment, this segment will change color showing which contour would be selected if the
mouse was clicked.
194
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 148: Simulate selection when mouse is moved example
 Show micro-joints: If enabled, the micro-joints will be shown and an exterior line will appear
in the contours. This parallel line to the external contours is the center of the exterior punch.
The distance between the exterior contours and this line is the middle of the width of the
configured tool for the exteriors.
Figure 149: Show micro-joints example
 Display all clamp and work zones: If enabled, the nesting module will show in the screen all
the work zones as well as the clamps in the configured positions.
Figure 150: Display all clamp and work zones example
The clamp zone changes depending on the station the turret is working with. If this parameter is
disabled, only the clamp work zone of the current station will be shown with continuous line and the
rest with discontinuous lines.
195
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Simulate the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with a green color for making the
identification easier.
Figure 151: Simulate the full remnants example
 Display dimensions on the sheet: Although the dimensions made in the drawing module will
be always shown, the user can decide to keep them in the nesting module or not by
activating this parameter.
Figure 152: Display dimensions on the sheet example
 View nesting limit: When enabled, the system will display the line that shows the end of
nesting.
 Highlight selected part: When the user selects a part in the Nesting Part list window, the
geometry of the select part will be highlighted in the sheet only when this option is enabled.
In the same way, it the user select any parts on the sheet, the system will highlight them on
the Parts List window as well as all the equal parts nested on the sheet. This color can be
configured in Color window.
196
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Show points at the center of punching instructions: This parameter allows a display of the
central point of each punch. This way, a better and faster punching interpretation can be
obtained. The user will be able to select between: No, Drawing, Nesting and Both of them.
 Text size for the quantities in the parts window: This parameter allows the user modifying
the size of the text that will appear on the sheets window of the Nesting module. The user
will be able to select between: Small, Normal, Large and Largest.
 Postprocessor words: From this window the user can define which text will be shown on the
sheet when a function is selected, as well as the font and size of the postprocessor words
displayed on the sheet. If none is specified, the system will use the windows standard font
size configured by default on the computer.
These parameters allow visualizing or hiding the Postprocessor words as well as changing their text.
Figure 153: Postprocessor words dialog box
 Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet: If enabled, when getting a part from the list, the
system will show additional lines from the margin of the part showing the minimum distance
between parts.
197
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 154: Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet example
 Selection with multihead: When the machine has been configured as multi-head, the system
will make the nesting trying to use the maximum number of heads. If this option is enabled,
when a part is select, the system will select the entire multi-head group (given that the parts
will be machined at the same time as selected).
Figure 155: Selection with multihead example
 Selection by window/capture/trap without multihead: When selection with multihead is

enabled this parameter will become enabled.
Figure 156: Selection by window/capture/trap without multihead example
 Show selected machining: This option allows visualizing the selected machining.
 Show micro-joints with points: If enabled, the system will display the micro-joints with two
points in order to show their location.
 Display fixed position points of the clamp: If enabled, the system will show the fixed
position points of the clamps.
 Show part references on the screen: If this option is enabled, the part references will be
included inside the contour of the parts. It will not change the machining of the parts; it is
only a visualization option.
198
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 157: Show part references on the screen example
 Rapids:
 Show the direction of movements: If enabled, the system will show with an arrow the
direction of every rapid movement.
Figure 158: Show the direction of movements example
 Show rapids in drawing module: If the visualization is enabled in the Drawing module, the
user will be provided with these three options:
o One part: It shows rapids when one part is opened.
o Multiparts: It shows rapids when multiple parts are opened.
o Always: It shows rapids constantly.
 Show rapids in nesting and machining module: Select this checkbox to visualize the rapids
in Nesting and Machining module.
 Show bevel information: Both in Nesting and Drawing module the user can visualize bevel
information. The system will display Bevel information setup dialog box as shown below:
199
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 159: Bevel information setup dialog box
Text position, font and size can be selected as well as where the text will be shown: Drawing,
Nesting or Both of them.
 Simulation: When clicking this button, the system will display Simulation dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 160: Simulation dialog box
Here the user will be able to define the shear movement while the machining simulation. The user
can select between two different movements:
 On XY: The shear will move using both axes at the same time.
 First on one axis and later on the other: The shear will move first in horizontal or vertical
and then in the other way.
200
Jobs (CAM) Module
The user will be able to define the following options:
 Head radius (mm): Here the user can introduce the Head radius in millimeters.
 Number of milling broken segments: This option allows the user to define the number of
milling broken segments.
Costs
 % Remnant price: The user can enter the cost related to the remnants.
 % Scrap price: The user can enter the cost related to the scrap.
 Cost by N2 and O2 unit: The user can enter the cost of N2/O2 used per unit.
 Machine: The user can enter the cost based on the machine used.
 Machine hourly rate: The user can enter the rate per hour of the active machine.
 Employee hourly rate: The user can enter the rate per hour of an employee.
 Save time and cost of parts: If enabled, the system will save the time and cost of the parts
with no need of entering in the Nesting module. The calculation will be made in the Drawing
module. Each importer will have its own configuration parameter in order to specify whether
the time and cost calculation will be made when importing a new part in the system.
 Save costs of the sheets: If enabled, the system will save the cost of the sheets.
201
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 161: Configure: Costs dialog box
 No update: The part time and cost will not be updated based on the nesting.
 Last part time with qualities of the nesting: When saving a part in Nesting without qualities
the system saves a time for that part. If the user later assigns qualities to that part, the time
will be updated in the database and it will get a different value, which is supposed to be more
accurate.
 Part time in the last nesting: If enabled, the system will save the part time in the last nesting
process.
 Average with the last saved time: If enabled, the system will save the average of the part
from the current and previous nesting.
 Average of all the nesting times: If enabled, the system will save the average of the part
from all nestings.
 Update times in the manufacturing line: If enabled, the system will update the times in the
manufacturing line.
202
Jobs (CAM) Module
Identifiers
Several identifiers can be configured in this section. The user can assign them the required name. The
user can select between Identifiers of... Jobs, Parts and Sheets.
Figure 162: Configurable identifiers
 Jobs: The right side of the window displays the identifiers of the manufacturing order. Click
on the identifier to be modified and type in the new one.
 Parts: The right side of the window displays the identifiers of the part. Click on the identifier
to be modified and type in the new one. By means of More button the user can create or
delete the identifiers.
 Sheets: The right side of the window displays the identifiers of a sheet. Click on the identifier
to be modified and type in the new one.
Language
This option changes the language of the program. Once the language has been selected, the
program will restart with the selected language.
Figure 163: Languages dialog box
203
Jobs (CAM) Module
Interface
The Interface button enables the user to create a new toolbar and change the existing toolbar
applications among many other options.
1. Click Interface button and the system will display Customize dialog box:
Figure 164: Customize Quick Access
204
Jobs (CAM) Module
2. The window is divided into the following tabs:
 Quick access
 Shortcut keys
 Details
 Ribbon
3. In the Commands section the user will visualize all the menus with their applications listed.
 In Quick Access tab, the user can quickly access the different functionality areas of the
software that are coming in the drawing and nesting modules in a clear way.
 Delete: Click this button to remove an application from the toolbar.
 Separator: Click this button to include a separator between the applications of the toolbar.
 Label: By means of this option the user can add or modify Labels manually for each option.
Groups of related parameters can be identified with a common name. Introduce the name
in the Text field located at the right bottom of the window and click on Separator button in
order to place it in the Quick Access section. In order to drag the options from Commands
section to the Quick Access section make use of Single arrow ( ) button.
 In Shortcut keys tab, the user can create new shortcut keys, view and delete the existing
ones for the applications.
205
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 165: Customize Shortcut keys
4. Select an application and then introduce the key from the keyboard to assign as New Shortcut key
for the previously selected application. Click Assign button and the selected key will be assigned as
shortcut key as well as visualized in Existing keys field. The user can also select an existing shortcut
key from the Existing keys field and click Delete button in order to remove it.
 In Details tab, the user can configure the view of columns in the products and sheets panel. It
is only possible to configure one view at a time. In order to visualize the Products list and
Sheet list in the main module, it is necessary to activate the corresponding options in the
View menu. If activated, the system will display the configured columns with the information
of each part. By means of this option, the user can modify the order of visualization and
remove any column that is not needed, just by making use of the different Arrow buttons
provided in Customize window, as shown below:
206
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 166: Customize Details
5. Choose the required parameters from the available list and click Single arrow button to add the
parameters selectively one by one, or click Double arrow button in order to include all the
parameters in the list and click OK.
 In Ribbon tab the user can edit the view and the items provided in the Ribbon. Among the
customization options given in the Ribbon, now it is possible to configure the style of the
controls inserted in customized groups and tabs. This way it will be possible to select the icon
size (small or large) and the possibility to show or not the control text.
This contextual menu provides all the options that can be executed with each element of the menu:
create new tabs and groups, change their name, delete customized elements, change the style of
new controls and finally, reorganize the new elements changing their position.
6. Click right button on the ribbon and select Customize ribbon option.
207
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 167: Customize Ribbon
 New tab: Click this button to create a Main tab like Home, Manage, Utilities, etc. and
customize the group.
 New group: Click this button in order to create a Group in the particular tab. Customized
groups can be added to original or customized tabs. Select the desired tab and click New
group. Both customized tabs and groups appear in bold so that they are more easily
distinguished. New commands can be added to the customized groups (not in the tabs). In
order to do it, the user can add the selected options by double clicking on them or using the
Single arrow button in the Commands section.
 Delete: Click this button to delete customized tabs, groups and/or commands.
 Change name: This button allows the user changing the name of customized tabs and
groups.
 Separator: Click this button in order to include a separator between the applications in the
toolbar. The commands can be organized using separators within a customized group.
208
Jobs (CAM) Module
It is not possible to add two separators together, neither at the beginning nor at the end.
 Export: By means of this option, the user can export the UI settings made in his machine.
This will be saved as *.ExportUI file in the selected location.
 Import: By means of this option, the user can import the UI settings from an *.ExportUI file.
 Restore: this button restores the default configuration. If selected, the system will display a
warning window asking “Do you want to delete all ribbon customizations for this
program?”. Select Yes to delete the current ribbon configuration and select No in order to
cancel the operation.
Each machine type offers different options, visible only when working with them in particular.
Therefore, configuration options must be customized per machine type.
Print
Print option enables the user to create and delete reports, configure the printing settings and
visualize as well as print reports. When selected the system displays Lists window as shown below:
Figure 168: Lists window
209
Jobs (CAM) Module
 To create reports, do the following:
1. Click Print and the system displays Lists dialog box listing various reports.
2. Click Create button. The system displays New list dialog box listing the various topics for which the
report can be generated.
3. Select a topic and enter the name for the report in Text field.
4. Click OK. The new report is created and included in the list in Print Reports dialog box.
 To delete reports, do the following:
2. Select the report which has to be deleted and then click Delete. The selected report will be deleted.
 To configure the print settings for the report, do the following:
2. Select the report which has to be printed and then click Configure. The system displays Print Setup
dialog box.
3. Set the required parameters and then click OK. The print settings for the selected report will be
configured.
 To view and print reports, do the following:
2. Select the report to view/print and move it from the list to the next column.
3. Select a report in the column and click Preview to preview the selected report, click Print to print
the selected report, and click Print all to print all the reports of the column.
The different available reports are detailed below:
2.1.8.7.1 Factory Sheets List

This report contains information of all the sheets used in the active manufacturing order, as well as
the place occupied by each part on the sheet.
For each sheet the following information is displayed, in this order: CNC name for the sheet,
reference for the sheet followed by its identifying number, machine used, number of sheet, length,
210
Jobs (CAM) Module
width, thickness, material, weight, scrap utilization, sheet utilization and maximum sheet value
machined.
For each part placed on the sheet the following is displayed: space occupied by the part on the sheet
(Ref.), reference, reference of the figure the part belongs to followed by the defined position,
observations, length, width and weight.
2.1.8.7.2 Frames Elements List

This report contains information on the elements required to manufacture the frames. The following
information is displayed for each frame in this order: the name of the frame, the length and the
amount of bar necessary to manufacture the frame. Finally, the bar length and the total number of
corners are displayed.
2.1.8.7.3 Canal Part List

This report lists the details of the parts that are not cut and displays information such as the
reference of the part, DIN name, DIN code, material, thickness, length, width, and quantity.
2.1.8.7.4 Labels List (149x48.8)

This report generates labels of size 149 x 48.8 for the nested parts of the current job. The
information displayed includes the serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is
automatically generated when the parts are nested), part reference, job reference, user data, date
on which the part is nested, comments, CNC reference, material, sheet dimensions, part dimensions,
and DIN details.
2.1.8.7.5 Labels List (127x74)

This report generates labels of size 127 x 74 for the nested parts of the current job. The information
displayed includes the serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is automatically generated
when the part is nested), part reference, job reference, CNC reference, labor ticket number,
manufacturing order reference, date on which the part is nested, material, part dimensions, and
sheet dimensions.
2.1.8.7.6 Labels List for Remnants (149x48.8)

This report contains information of the labels for remnants of size 149x48.8 for every remnant
generated in the manufacturing order in progress. For every remnant, a span is showed containing
the following information, in this order: remnant number, reference assigned to the remnant,
211
Jobs (CAM) Module
amount, supplier, carrier, manufacturing date, associated comment, material, dimensions (Length x
Width X Thickness), weight, order to which it belongs, sheet used to obtain it and associated CNC.
2.1.8.7.7 Labels List for Sheets (149x48.8)

This report generates labels of size 149 x 48.8 for the sheets used in the current job. The information
displayed includes nesting number (this number is automatically generated when the sheets are
used), sheet reference, quantity of sheets used, user data, material, sheet dimensions, weight, job
reference, CNC reference, and remnant percentage.
2.1.8.7.8 Sheets List

This report lists the details of all the sheets used in the current job and displays information such as
the current job details, sheet reference, material, dimensions, dimensions along x and y axis, weight
details of the sheet, quantity of sheet used, real total weight details of the sheets, and real total
quantity of sheets used.
2.1.8.7.9 Turrets List

This report shows information of all the sheets used in the manufacturing order in progress. The user
is informed of the main data of the sheet: the CNC name for that sheet, the sheet reference followed
by its identification number, the machine used for machining, the amount of sheets, its length,
width, thickness, the material, its weight, the usage of the remnant, the usage of the sheet and the
maximum dimension of the sheet that is machined. Next, the turret data are mentioned with the
following information: station position, whether it is Multitool or not, the punch position and the
matrix, as well as the angle where it is located.
2.1.8.7.10 CNC List

This report lists the details of all the sheets used for machining the part and displays information
such as the nesting number (this number is automatically generated when the sheets are used),
sheet reference, material, thickness, length, width, CNC reference, maximum sheet used for
machining along X axis, maximum sheet used for machining along Y axis, and the quantity of sheets
used for machining.
2.1.8.7.11 Remnants List

This report contains information of all the remnants generated in the manufacturing order in
progress. For every generated remnant the following information is displayed, in this order:
212
Jobs (CAM) Module
reference assigned to the remnant, material, dimensions: thickness, length and width, weight,
reference of the original sheet and the amount.
2.1.8.7.12 Cost and Time Sheet List

This report lists the details of cost and machine time of all the sheets in the current job and displays
information such as part reference, material, rectangle area, cost of material, cost of machine time,
cost of consumables, cost of planning, total cost, and manufactured quantity.
2.1.8.7.13 Protocol List

This report lists the details of all the parts in the current job and displays information such as current
job details, part reference, material, thickness, quantity, manufactured quantity, dimensions,
machined dimensions, weight, cost, total machined dimensions, total weight, and total cost.
2.1.8.7.14 Frame List

This report lists the details of all the frames used for the parts in the current job and displays
information such as the frame reference, length, width, quantity, cost of time, cost of corners, cost
of assembly, and total cost.
2.1.8.7.15 Isolate List

This report lists the details of all the isolates used in the current job and displays information such as
the reference of the isolate, cost per m2, thickness, position, DIN name, DIN code, area, and total
cost.
2.1.8.7.16 Delivery Note List

This report lists the details of all the parts in a current job and displays information such as the
current job details, reference of the parts, DIN name, DIN code, quantity, significant values, and
weight of the part. It also includes a table which is classified by length, displaying the area machined
on a channel machine, area machined on a cutting machine, and total area.
2.1.8.7.17 Job List

This report lists the details of the current job and displays information such as name, reference,
various user data, comments, parts, area, quantity and price among others.
213
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.1.8.7.18 Scale 1:1 List

This report shows the drawing of a part with numbers on the most important points and is printed in
scale 1:1. The user can configure the following values: Print the significant curves only, Mark lines,
Cutter radius, Eliminate white paper sheets.
2.1.8.7.19 Geometric List

This report lists the geometries of all the parts of the current job. It displays the current job
reference, part reference, material, dimensions of the part, DIN name, DIN code, creation date,
length, weight, drawing of the part, and position of the significant points of the geometry along X
and Y.
When selecting this, the system displays Geometric list dialog box listing all the parts of the current
job. It is possible to select the required part to access its geometric report. It is also possible to click
Configure and select Print significant points only check box to print significant points of the
geometry.
2.1.8.7.20 Drawing of Every Part

This report shows one sheet for each part where the drawing of the part is shown. The result is the
same, if all the parts would be printed individually in the Drawing module.
2.1.8.7.21 Drawing of Every Sheet

This option shows the drawing of all the sheets that are generated. The result is the same if all the
sheets would be printed individually in the Nesting and Cutting module.
2.1.8.7.22 Cost and Time Part Sheet

This report lists the details of cost and machine time of all the parts in the current job and displays
information such as part reference, material, rectangle area, cost of material, cost of machine time,
cost of consumables, cost of planning, total cost, and manufactured quantity.
2.1.8.7.23 Drawing of Every Sheet

This report shows the drawing of every sheet in the current job together with all the details related
to it.
214
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.1.8.7.24 Labels List (127x74)

displayed includes serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is automatically generated
sheet dimensions.
2.1.8.7.25 Protocol List (Duct figures)

This report lists the details of all the parts in the current job and displays information such as name of
the job, reference, various user data, comments, material, thickness, quantity, manufactured
quantity, dimensions of the parts, cut extension, mark extension, weight in kgs and price.
2.1.8.7.26 Brace List

This report provides information about the braces used in the current job together with their used
face, length, quantity, total length and price.
2.1.8.7.27 Tie Rod List

This report provides information of the tie rods in the current job. Tie rods used in braces come along
with the face used, number per brace, total, nuts, washers, seals and price. Tie rods used in
connections provide quantity, nuts, washers, seals and price. On the other hand, tie rods used in the
middle come together with length, orientation, rows, quantity per row, total, nuts, washers, seals
and price.
2.1.8.7.28 Slip & Drive Element List

This report provides information about the slip and drive used in the current job together with the
reference, length and quantity.
2.1.8.7.29 Connector List

This report provides information about the connectors used in the current job, which come along
with their position, end, length and width.
2.1.8.7.30 Seam List

This report provides information about the seams used in the current job together with their
reference name and position.
215
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.1.8.7.31 Labels List (4x6)

sheet dimensions.
2.1.8.7.32 Labels List (127x68)

This report generates spans of size 127 x 68 for the nested parts of the current job. The information
sheet dimensions.
2.1.8.7.33 Job Element List

This report provides all the information related to the current job, covering data of the sheets, parts
and nestings. The job comes together with details like reference, name, cutting time, waste, weight
in kgs and parts. Sheets provide their reference, material, thickness (mm), dimensions (mm) and
quantity used. Nestings provide details like reference, material, thickness (mm), CNC, dimensions
(mm), quantity, cutting time, waste percentage and number of nested parts. And finally, parts come
together with their reference, weight, area, quantity, dimensions, thickness, external weight,
external area, unitary cutting time, material, rectangular weight, rectangular area and total cutting
time.
Backup
This option consists on the Backup of LANTEKPR.CFG, LANTEKIN.CNI and LFOCUS.CFG files. The user
can save a personalized and/or standard (provided during installation) configuration and recover any
of them at any time.
1. Click Backup button located in the Configuration options and the system will display the following
dialog box:
216
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 169: Backup dialog box
2. Select one of the three options provided and click OK button.
Employees, Currencies and Databases

This option is used to provide configuration information about the system related to the Database,
Users and Currency.
2.1.8.9.1 Database
Database option shows a list of all the existing databases that the user can connect to work. It is also
possible to create a new blank database using this option.
2.1.8.9.2 Users
By means of Users option, it is possible to add new users to the User List by entering User data, such
as:
Reference, Employee, User name and Password. The existing users can also be modified and deleted
from the available Work Centers and User’s List.
2.1.8.9.3 Currency
Click on Currency in order to add a new currency. The chosen currency type can be modified and
deleted from the existing list.
Exit
Exit ( ) option allows abandoning Lantek Expert.
217
Jobs (CAM) Module
HOME
Modules
From this section, the user will be able to access to Duct Parts, Drawing and Nesting and Machining
modules.
Import
Parts from Database
Parts from database ( ) option enables the user to import required parts from the existing list or
Part List to your current manufacturing order section. The system will display Part selection dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 170: Part selection dialog box
 Criteria: Using this option, any parts can be imported, created and modified priority wise
with a given reference number, quantity, machine, material and thickness. Click on any cell of
the row to change the required parameters.
 Select the Navigation ( ) button next to Criteria to redefine or create of a new part in the
Part selection dialog box by assigning a unique reference code.
218
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 171: Part selection dialog box 2
 In addition, in User data the existing data list can be navigated and selected as per the
required element or by entering a new element. The new element will be added in the data
list for future use. It is possible to search information about a part by entering the From and
To date along with the specification of Thickness, Priority and Length and Width of the part.
 Database: In this, a database can be imported from the existing databases, where the
corresponding database parts can be viewed and imported to the current manufacturing
order list. If the Navigation ( ) button attached to this field is selected, the system will
display Database selection dialog box providing a list of the available databases.
 Group: Using this option, the selected parts can be linked to a specified group. By clicking on
the selected section, it is even possible to modify Use the part material and thickness and
Use the part machine as required.
 Parameters: When selected the system will display Parameters dialog box.
219
Jobs (CAM) Module
The parameters here set related to Machine and Material, thickness, quantity and priority of the parts
can be modified.
 Use the part material and thickness: Select this checkbox to use the selected part material
and thickness.
 Use the part machine: Select this checkbox to use the selected part machine. This parameter
will only be enabled once Use the part material and thickness is activated.
 Use the part filler property: Select this checkbox so the system uses filler parts when it is not
possible to include more normal parts.
Duct Figures from Database
Duct figures from database ( ) option allows importing the required duct figures from the
available list to your current manufacturing order section. The system will display Figure selection
dialog box as shown below:
Figure 172: Figure selection dialog box
220
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Criteria: Any duct figures can be imported, created and modified priority wise with a given
reference number, quantity, machine, material and thickness. Select the box of any row to
change the required parameters.
Select the arrow icon next to Criteria to redefine or creating of a new duct part in the Figure selection
dialog box by assigning a unique reference code. In addition, to search information about a duct
figure you can enter the From and To date along with the specification of Thickness, DIN and Code of
the part.
 Database: Once selected the system will display Database selection dialog box displaying all
the available databases. In this, a database can be imported from the existing databases,
where the corresponding database duct parts/figures can be viewed and imported to the
current manufacturing order list.
 Group: Using this option, the selected duct figures can be linked to a specified group.
 Parameters: In this, the parameters of chosen Machine and Material thickness, quantity and
priority of the duct parts can be modified, as in the previous option.
 Use the part material and thickness: Select this checkbox to use the selected duct part
material and thickness.
 Use the part machine: Select this checkbox to use the selected duct part machine. This
parameter will only be enabled once Use the part material and thickness is activated.
Kits from Database
Kits from database ( ) option allows importing the required kits from the available list to your
current manufacturing order section. The system will display Kit selection dialog box as shown below:
221
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 173: Kit selection dialog box
Here the user will be able to introduce the required quantity of the selected kit, as well as activating
Import the nestings associated to the kit, Use the part material and thickness and Use the part machine
parameters.
Rectangles
Rectangles ( ) option allows creating rectangular parts for the current job. In order to create a
rectangular part, perform the following steps:
1. Select Rectangles option and the system will display Rectangular parts dialog box as shown below:
222
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 174: Rectangular parts dialog box
2. Introduce the length, width and quantity.

3. The system will automatically assign the Reference based on the length and width values.
4. The user can configure Reference field by clicking Configure button. The system will display the
Figure 175: Configure dialog box
 Insert in the job: It indicates whether the rectangular part is created in the current job or not.
If not enabled, the rectangular part will be created in the database.
 Automatic: It indicates whether the reference of the rectangular part is generated

automatically or not.
223
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Request: It indicates whether the reference of the rectangular parts has to be edited or not.
 Reference: Unique reference code to be included to the reference of the rectangular part.
5. If Parameters button is selected the system will display Part saving dialog box, where the user will
have to introduce the required details and click OK in order to save them.
6. The system will direct you back to Rectangular parts window. Click Add button so that the
rectangular part is included in the window.
7. Click OK button and the rectangular part will be created.
Import DXF Files
Import DXF files ( ) option allows importing the geometry of a DXF file. In order to import it,
perform the following steps:
1. Select Import DXF files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown below:
Figure 176: Open dialog box (Import DXF Files)
Find the different fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 Name: Name of the DXF file.
 Type: Type of file.
 Drawing simulation: It indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
224
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Configure: Select this button so that the system displays Import configuration dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 177: Importer configuration dialog box
Select the required values and click Apply button in order to save them and OK to come back to
Open dialog box.
2. Select the required DXF file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported to the
current job.
Import DWG Files
Import DWG files ( ) option allows importing the geometry of a DWG file. In order to import it,
1. Select Import DWG files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown in the
previous section listing all the available DWG files.
225
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 178: Open dialog box (Import DWG Files)
 Name: Name of the DWG file.
 Drawing simulation: It indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
detailed in the previous section. Select the required values and click Apply button in order to
save them and OK to come back to Open dialog box.
2. Select the required DWG file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported to
the current job.
Import Parametric Parts
Import Parametric parts ( ) option allows importing parametric geometries. In order to do it

1. Select Import parametric parts option and the system will display Parametric parts dialog box as
shown below:
226
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 179: Parametric parts dialog box
 Directory: Path of the directory where the parametric parts are located. Click on the
Navigation ( ) button attached to this field in order to select the required directory.
 Parameters: When selected the system will display Part Saving dialog box, where the user
will be able to introduce the required Machine, Material, Thickness, Date, Quantity, Priority,
Name, User data, Labor ticket, Order and Product.
 Configure: When selected the system will display Configure dialog box as shown below:
227
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 180: Configure dialog box
Configure the linear and angular tolerance as well as the required parameters and click OK button in
order to save the changes in the configuration.
 Close: Select this button in order to exit from Parametric parts dialog box.
Import MEC Files
Import MEC files ( ) option allows importing the geometry of a MEC file. In order to import it,
1. Select Import MEC files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown in the
previous section listing all the available MEC files.
228
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Name: Name of the MEC file.
 Drawing simulation: Indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
2. Select the required MEC file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported to the
current job.
Import PDF Files

Import PDF files () option allows importing the geometry of a PDF file. In order to import it, perform
the following steps:
1. Select Import PDF files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown in the previous
section listing all the available PDF files.
 Name: Name of the PDF file.
 Drawing simulation: Indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
2. Select the required PDF file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported to the
current job.
229
Jobs (CAM) Module
Importers Configuration
It is possible to work with several configurations for importers. This option is valid for:
 Standard importers of Expert (DFX, DWGs, MEC, DSTVs, ASCII, ISO CUT, etc.)
 Application importers (Mazak, Tribon, TOPS GEO files, etc.)
The following importers are excluded:
 Parametric parts importer
 Parametric geometry parts importer
 Images vectorization importer
 Database importers (parts, figures, kits)
 Rectangular parts importers
For example, for the case of the DXF importer the following window will appear:
Figure 181: Open window (Import DXF Files)
Once the user has selected the part to import, Configure… option has to be selected and the
following window will appear.
230
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 182: Importer configuration window
Now, the button Configurations must be clicked to show the following window:
Figure 183: Configurations dialog box
231
Jobs (CAM) Module
In this window it is possible to choose one of the following options:
 New: It allows creating a new configuration based on the original configuration of the
importer. For example, if we work with the DXF importer, the original configuration file is
DXFASYSW.CFG. When creating a new configuration and applying the changes (with OK
button) a new copy of this configuration file will be created with the name of the file defined.
Apart from defining this name, it is also possible to give a name to this configuration to make
easier its description.
Figure 184: New configuration dialog box
The extension of this file will always be CFG or CF? (being “?” any character) If not, OK button
will not be enabled as shown below:
 Modify: It allows modifying the name of the customized configuration, but not the file. The
reason is that the file can be in use by another user in the system, so once that it has been
created with a name it will remain in the system unless a user decides to delete it.
 Delete: It allows deleting an existing or newly created configuration.
 Cancel: The user can cancel the actions executed and exit the window without saving the
new configurations or changes made.
 OK: The user validates the changes made and the new configurations are saved in the
system.
For each created file a line will be generated, where the following fields will be saved:
 Type: importer type
 Name: configuration name
 File: configuration file name
232
Jobs (CAM) Module
 AppName: importer name (just for application importers)
 Given the case the configurations per user do not exist, this file will not exist. It will be
created whenever a configuration is defined for the first time.
All the information generated when creating the configurations will be saved in the network, in
the directory where the database is located:\\LANTEK\Database$\DatabaseName\FilesCfg\Importers.
This includes Importers.cfgx file and the files .cfg y .cf?. This way, any user will have access to these
defined configurations.
Once that the different configurations have been created and saved, it will be possible to select the
configuration when importing the parts using the drop-drown list that appears in the lower part of
Configuration… window.
Once selected, this file can be defined and modified applying the changes on the selected file of the
drop-drown list.
If the selection is modified and another file is selected from the drop-drown list, the changes will
be applied in the previously selected file. That means that changing the selection works equally as apply
button or OK button.
This drop-down list is also shown in the window where the parts to import are displayed:
233
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 185: Drop-down list (DXF files) 2
In this case, the file is selected and it is possible to add parts to import with this configuration.
Finally, when the user exits the importer, the information will be saved in the original file of the
importer. In case of DXF files, it will be saved in DXFASYSW.CFG file, with the following information
that the user has previously selected:
 Path of files to be imported.
 Configuration file that will be loaded when importing.
Edit
Search
Search ( ) option allows the user searching elements. Once this option is selected the system
will display Element search window attached at the bottom as shown below:
Figure 186: Element search window
234
Jobs (CAM) Module
Here the user will be able to filter the jobs from the database based on their priority. The job search
can be carried out specifying the job Name, Path and State. It is possible to search the required
information by selecting the Machine, Material, Thickness and CNC, which will be displayed if the user
selects Containing option.
In addition, the user can filter by Date, Order options, Advanced options, Quotation jobs and
Multiprogram jobs.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows erasing the selected parts and sheet of the current job. Once this option is
selected, the system will display a warning message to make sure if the user wants to delete the
selected part or sheet.
Select All
Select all ( ) option selects all the elements of the window, which can be parts, figures or sheets,
depending on the selected mode.
Invert Selection
Invert selection ( ) option inverts the selection of elements of the window. These elements can
be parts, figures or sheets, depending on the selected mode. During the selection, this option allows
unselecting all the previously selected geometry.
Contextual Menu
Open
Open ( ) option allows opening the selected job.
Export
Export ( ) option exporting the selected job. When selected, Directory dialog box will be
displayed.
Cut
Cut ( ) option allows cutting the selected job.
235
Jobs (CAM) Module
Copy
Copy ( ) option allows copying the selected job.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting the selected job. When selected, a warning message will be
displayed asking if the user wants to delete associated elements, parametric elements only or the
manufacturing order associated to the job.
Change name
Change name ( ) option allows chaning the name of the selected job.
Refresh
Refresh ( ) option allows refreshing the selected job.
Properties
When clicking Properties ( ) option, the system will display Job dialog box.
MANAGE
Components
Machines
Refer to section Configure Cutting Machines & Tools.
Parts
Parts ( ) option enables accessing various parts. The parameters of any selected parts can be
modified and customized as required. The modification of a machined part is done by selecting the
machine type, material and its thickness. The system will display Parts dialog box, as shown below,
which provides a list of the parts available in the database:
236
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 187: Parts dialog box
In order to customize the parts, it is necessary to configure the table parameters from available and
ordered columns. In addition to this, select Criteria or Modify options which give the user preference
to check and modify different parameters of a machined part. If Customize button is selected, the
system will display Configure: Tables dialog box, where the user will be able to set an order between
the available columns required.
Figure 188: Configure: Tables dialog box
237
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figures
Figures ( ) option enables the user to search, modify and delete figures from the main module of
Expert. The system will display Figures dialog box, as shown below, which provides the following
options:
Figure 189: Figures window
 Criteria: It is possible to filter the figures in the list through criteria window, where a set of
criterions can be established to filter the list of figures.
 Group: It is possible to filter the figures in the list selecting a group in particular.
 Modify: This option allows updating the reference, position, name and comments of a
determined figure.
 Customize: This button allows the user to select the columns to be displayed as well as their
order in the list.
 Delete: When selecting this button, the system shows the following warning window before
deleting the figure from the database:
Figure 190: Warning message
238
Jobs (CAM) Module
If the user confirms the action and the figure is used in any job or kit, the system will show a window
that displays a list with these jobs and kits:
Figure 191: Figure deletion confirmation window
Finally, if the user confirms the action, the system will delete the figure from the database.
 Close: This option allows closing the window.
Sheets
Sheets ( ) option gives the user information about various kinds of sheets that are used in the
manufacturing order. The sheets can be created, modified and customized as required during the
machined process by means of Create, Modify and Customize options respectively. Besides the
previous options, a given sheets reference, material, thickness, dimensions and quantity can be
imported, blocked or deleted through Import, Blocking and Delete options. Moreover, the sheets
list allows the user to print a report containing all the sheets that are available in the system.
It is also possible to filter sheets by dimensions. By selecting Criteria option, filtering will be done
taking into account both the newly defined dimensions, and those of the machine configuration
window. The most restrictive values, as the highest minimum and lowest maximum values are taken
into account.
239
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 192: Sheets dialog box
In addition, the user can also update sheet costs whenever the price of a sheet has been modified
through Modify and Costs buttons.
Materials
Materials ( ) option, enables the user to Add, Edit, Delete and view Details as the name, density,
thickness and price of a material in the available Database materials list. Any Standard material can be
selected and transferred to the Database materials list. In the Database material, a new material can
be created with a given name, density, thickness and price. The database materials can be edited and
deleted from the existing list.
Figure 193: Materials dialog box
240
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.3.1.5.1 Edit Materials

If the user selects Edit button, the system will display Edit Material window:
Figure 194: Edit material window
In this window, the user can modify the Name, Density, Strength and Price as well as introduce Prices
by thickness ranges. The different ranges of thicknesses cannot overlap or be included into different
ranges.
Consumables
Consumables ( ) option provides the list of consumables consisting abrasives and raw materials
defined by the system. When selected, the system will display Consumables dialog box as shown
below:
241
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 195: Consumables dialog box
Here the user will be able to Create, Modify and Delete the parameters of consumables for the
corresponding machines.
 Create: If selected, the system will display Consumable definition dialog box as shown below:
Figure 196: Consumable definition dialog box
Here the user will have to select between Abrasive and Raw material and introduce the Name, Factor
and Price required. Clicking on Calculate button calculates the abrasive factor based on the following
parameters:
 Pressure
 Orifice diameter
 Mixing nozzle diameter
 Abrasive flow
 Material
 Machinability
 Thickness
242
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Speed
 Abrasive factor
 Modify: If selected, the system will display Modification of the consumable dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 197: Modification of the consumable dialog box
The user will be able to modify the Name, Unit and Price of the consumable.
 Delete: This option will delete the selected consumable of the list. The system will display a
warning message in order to make sure if the user wants to erase the selected consumable.
Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the operation.
Drills
Drills
Drills ( ) option enables executing cycles, if the cutting machine has any kind of tools which
execute cycles. When selected, the system will display Tools dialog box as shown below:
Figure 198: Tools dialog box
243
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Criteria: When selected, the system will display Tools selection dialog box as shown below:
Figure 199: Tools selection dialog box
Through this window, the user will be able to modify the list of Tools displayed in Tools dialog box
shown previously.
 Create: This button will create a new tool of any of the four available types. The system will
display Tools definition dialog box as shown below:
Figure 200: Tools definition dialog box
Each type of cycle contains specific parameters as displayed in the following dialog boxes:
244
Jobs (CAM) Module
 DRILL CYCLE:
Figure 201: Drill cycle dialog box
 TAP CYCLE:
Figure 202: Tap cycle dialog box
245
Jobs (CAM) Module
 REAM CYCLE:
Figure 203: Ream cycle dialog box
 C. SINK CYCLE:
Figure 204: C. Sink cycle dialog box
246
Jobs (CAM) Module
 MILLING CYCLE:
Figure 205: Milling cycle dialog box
 Modify: If selected, the system will display the dialog box that corresponds to the cycle type
required to modify, where the user will be able to change the parameters and click OK in
order to save them.
 Delete: Select the required cycle from the list provided in Tools dialog box and click Delete
button to erase it. The system will display a warning message in order to make sure if the
user wants to delete the cycle. Select Yes to proceed with the deletion and No to cancel the
operation.
 Close: Select this option in order to exit from Tools dialog box and come back to Home
display.
247
Jobs (CAM) Module
Assign Drills
Once all tools have been defined on the system, the user can assign which tools will use each
machine by means of this option.
1. Select Assign drills ( ) option and the system will display Machine select dialog box which lists
all the machines available.
Figure 206: Machine select dialog box
2. Select the required machine and click OK button so that the system displays Assign tools dialog box
of the selected machine as shown below:
Figure 207: Assign tools dialog box
248
Jobs (CAM) Module
3. This dialog box is composed of two lists. The one in the left will show all the Defined tools that have
not been assigned to any machine, while the one in the right will show all the Tools assigned to the
current machine.
4. In order to add or remove any tool to the selected machine, make use of the arrow buttons and
click OK button in order to save the tool assignations.
Turrets
Turrets ( ) option manages drill turrets. If selected, the system will display Turrets dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 208: Turrets dialog box
Through this dialog box the user can manipulate turrets, assign them to a specific machine and
define the default active turret.
 <Change/Modify>: When selected, the system will display dialog box as shown below:
Figure 209: Turrets dialog box 2
249
Jobs (CAM) Module
From this window the user can create different types of turrets with different number of stations.
Each new turret must have a reference for the system, and a drawing can be assigned in order to
make easier the turret identification.
 Create: With this button, a new turret will be created with the selected type and with the
specified number of stations:
Figure 210: Selection of turret type dialog box
Select the required turret Type, introduce the Number of stations and click OK button so that the
system displays Turrets dialog box as shown below.
Figure 211: Turrets dialog box 3
250
Jobs (CAM) Module
Every turret needs a Reference, and the user can assign a Drawing by means of a BMP file which will
be shown in order to make the identification of the turret easier.
Here each station can be configured, just selecting it from the list and clicking on one of the options
provided. The user will be able to create a new station in the specified position, as well as modifying
or deleting an existing one.
 Modify: Every station has to be configured properly, with this button the properties of the
selected station will appear and the user will be able to modify them. When this option is
selected the system will display Stations dialog box as shown below:
Figure 212: Stations dialog box
 Station: Number of stations in the turret.
 Type: Type of the station.
 Minimum & Maximum diameter: If the station is not a Multitool one, the system must know
the minimum and maximum diameter of the tools that fix into the station.
 Parameters: By means of this option the user will be able to visualize all the parameters
related to the turret.
 Delete: Select the required turret to delete and click this button in order to erase it.
 Copy: This option copies all the parameters of the selected turret.
 Close: Select this option in order to exit from this dialog box.
 <Assign turret-machine>: Make use of this option in order to assign a turret to the current
machine. The system will display a list of the machines available so that the user selects the
required one. If a turret has been previously assigned to the selected machine, the system
will display Confirm assignation warning message.
251
Jobs (CAM) Module
 <Active turret>: Through this option the user can visualize the configuration of the current
machine with the punches and dies that have already been assigned. The test will verify it
they have been correctly loaded into the turret.
UTILITIES
Export
Export menu allows the user to export different types of installation files of a machine type that are
available in the default list.
In order to export the parts from the database to the required file format, perform the following
steps:
1. Click DXF/DWG/MEC files button from the export section and the system displays the
corresponding file dialog box listing the different file formats.
2. Select the required part from the Part List and move it to the right section.
3. Select the Group in the right section to include the selected file format to a group.
 Select the Directory where the user wants to export and include the part in a group.
 The Criteria checkbox indicates whether or not the listed parts are based on specified criteria
(refer criteria). Select this check box to specify the criteria and view only those parts in the
list that fulfill the specified criteria.
4. Click OK and the files will be exported from the database.
Parts exported to a DXF file can be exported together with their dimensions.
252
Jobs (CAM) Module
Nestings
Import
This option allows importing nestings to a file. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Select Import ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box so that the user searches
the required nesting.
2. Once selected the system will display Import dialog box as shown below.
Figure 213: Import dialog box
3. Find the fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 Job reference: Unique reference code assigned to the job. The system will assign it
automatically.
 Job name: The user will have to introduce the required name for the job in this field.
 Configuration files and machine tools: This option allows importing the files and machine
tools from the database to a specified .bck (backup) file of your local directory. This
operation will be carried out automatically once it is selected.
253
Jobs (CAM) Module
 Relationship among the materials to import and material to use: This table contains the
following parameters: Materials to import, Materials to use and New reference.
 Create new reference for all the imported products in the case that they exist in the
database: Select this option in order to create a new reference code for all the imported
products existing in the database.
 Prompt for the reference on each part: The system will automatically generate a reference
for each part. If it is enabled, the system will ask for the reference at the moment of
generating a new part.
 Overwrite all: Select this option in order to overwrite the quantity of parts when importing
existing ones or when a part already exists in the database with a defined quantity and the
user imports the same part again. The system can be configured to add the quantity of the
new part to the previous one or to replace the old quantity by the new one.
4. Once all the parameters have been set as per the user’s requirements, click OK button in order to
save them.
5. The system will direct the user to Nesting and Machining module and will open the imported
nesting.
Export
This option allows exporting nestings to a file and the selected files can be exported from a database
to the local directory. It gives information about machines, materials, sheets, products and nestings
in order to carry out the import. In order to export a nesting, perform the following steps:
1. Select Export ( ) option and the system will display Export nestings dialog box as shown
below:
254
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 214: Export nestings dialog box
2. Find the fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 Configuration files and machine tools: This option allows the user to export the files and
machine tools from the database to a specified .bck (backup) file to your local directory. It is
carried out automatically when this option is selected.
 Every sheet of the job: Select this option to export all the sheets of the job to the file.
 Every sheet of the database: Select this option to view all the sheets of the database. If there
is no active order when exporting, Every sheet of the database option will only appear, while
Every sheet of the job option will be disabled.
 Display drawing: If selected, the user will be able to visualize either the sheet of the job or
every sheet of the database. Therefore, when selecting a nesting to be exported, the user
can select nestings from another job other than the active job.
 Criteria: By means of this option the user will be able to visualize the parts that compose the
nestings together with their Machine, Material, Thickness, Reference, Date, Length, Width,
Jobs and Parts.
255
Jobs (CAM) Module
3. Once all the parameters have been set as per the user’s requirements choose the required nesting
from the list located on the left side
4. Make use of the Arrow buttons to select it by moving it to the list on the right and click OK in order
to export it.
5. The system will display Directory dialog box so that the user selects the folder where the nesting
will be kept.
6. Click Select button and the nesting will be exported.
Databases
New
New ( ) option allows creating a new database by selecting the required directory. In addition, it
is also possible to create a database from a backup of other database. In order to create one,
1. When selected, the system will display Database dialog box as shown below:
2. Introduce the required Name and select the required Directory.

3. If Import checkbox is selected, Select file navigation field and Select machines to import dialog box
will become activated.
4. Once all parameters are as required click OK button and the new database will be created.
256
Jobs (CAM) Module
Connect
By means of Connect ( ) option, the user can connect to an existing database and server. When
selected, the system will display Connection dialog box as shown below:
Figure 216: Connection dialog box
The user will have to introduce the User name, Password, Server and Database. Introduce the
Database name directly or select any of the existing ones available in your local directory by means of
the Navigation ( ) button.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting any Expert database not in use. Several databases may be
selected simultaneously. In the deletion process, confirmation will be requested for each database
since associated files may also be deleted.
When this option is selected, the system will display Database selection window which lists all the
databases available. Enable Delete associated files parameter in order to delete the selected
databases with their associated files.
Once modified, click Refresh ( ) button so that the new server databases can be visualized.
257
Jobs (CAM) Module
Information
By means of Information ( ) option, the user can select a specific group to get the required data
from an existing database. By default, the database will remain deactivated. The system will display
Database dialog box as shown below:
This dialog box provides the Name of the database together with the Directory and Group. The
directory containing database documents can be modified via this window. The system will display a
warning message informing of the effects this action would have in case database documents of the
directory are modified.
VIEW
Job Explorer
Job explorer ( ) option provides information about the list of jobs that have been created. Any
new jobs created will be organized in folders in a tree structure on the left side of the drawing
window.
In Job explorer panel, jobs have two identifiers: name and references. Whenever a job is created, an
automatic reference is generated, which will be unique in the database. In addition, the user will
have to give a name for it. The same job name cannot be repeated in another folder.
If the user right clicks on a job, a contextual menu will be displayed providing the following options:
Open, Export, Cut, Copy, Delete, Change name, Refresh and Properties.
258
Jobs (CAM) Module
Kit Explorer
Kit explorer ( ) option provides information about the list of kits that have been created. Any
new kits created will be organized in folders in a tree structure on the left side of the drawing
window.
If the user right clicks on a kit a contextual menu will be displayed providing the following options:
Open, Export, Cut, Copy, Delete, Change name, Refresh and Properties.
Product List
Product list ( ) option allows the visualization of all the parts along with details like Reference,
Machine, Material, Thickness, Quantity, Labor ticket, Priority, Pending quantity, Lost quantity, Name,
User data (1-2-3) and Dimensions.
If the user right clicks on a product, a contextual menu will be displayed providing the following
options: New, Open, Open parts, Delete, Masterlink, Print, Properties, Cancel and Customize.
Product View
Product view ( ) option allows the visualization of all the drawing parts of the opened
manufacturing order.
Sheet List
Sheet list ( ) option allows the visualization of all the sheet parts in a list format and displays
information such as: Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, CNC, Quantity, Sheet, Status,
Dimensions, Weight (kg), Use (%), X &Y dimensions and User data (1-2-3).
259
Jobs (CAM) Module
Sheet View
Sheet view ( ) option allows the visualization of all sheets of the opened manufacturing order at
once.
ADD-INS
Processes
Processes ( ) option allows the user to carry out a complete manufacturing process.
Processes are used to carry out a series of actions that are repeated in our daily work. Through
Processes window it is possible to create sets of process instructions related to our Databases,
System, Jobs, Kits, Sheets, Import, Draw, Nesting and machining, Palletization, View, Print, Errors and
Control. It helps the user save time by means of the automatization of all these instructions that the
user keeps creating repeatedly.
Previously, the user must define this process, writing a file with a certain format with the
manufacturing order to be opened and the number of parts to be imported among others.
The window is divided into two sections. On the left side the user will visualize the whole Set of
instructions, listing all the possible operations:
Figure 218: Set of instructions (Processes)
260
Jobs (CAM) Module
On the right side, the user will be provided with the List of process instructions. The user will have to
double click on the desired operations in order to place them in the list of process instructions in the
desired order. Once the desired process has been created he will have to go to Processes tab, select
Save as option and save it after introducing the required name.
In order to obtain more information about Processes go to Technical information / Working with
processes section.
Figure 219: List of process instructions example
Parametric Editor
Parametric editor ( ) option allows the user to visualize the instructions tree along with all the
available instructions that can be included in the file.
It is possible to create an instruction either by double clicking on the desired instruction or by

selecting it and clicking Add option located in the contextual menu, which would display the Data
request window for the instruction creation.
Once the instruction has been selected and all the required data introduced, click OK button and the
instruction will be included in the list located in the center. The panel situated in the center consists
in a table and it shows the information per each of the instructions included, corresponding number
by insertion order, associated image, name of the element it represents, name of the instruction and
the parameters associated to it.
261
Jobs (CAM) Module
The right hand side of the window provides the Data request window and the Graphic display
window. When the application is started both windows will be almost empty, however, they will
keep being updated as the user adds the instructions.
By means of the ribbon, it is possible to execute diverse actions with the instructions. From Home tab
it is possible to access the Properties of an instruction in order to modify, delete, cut and paste it in
another point of the file or copy it. On the other hand, from the View tab the user can show or hide
the Data request and Graphic display windows. The window can be shown or hidden as per the
requirements just by selecting the corresponding icon located in the menu.
262
Drawing Module
3 DRAWING MODULE
The Drawing module provides different tools in order to design the parts in two dimensions. It offers
a wide range of drawing possibilities to the user. In order to access the drawing module, perform the
following steps:
Click Drawing ( ) button located in Home menu of Lantek Expert – Jobs (CAM) and the system will
open the drawing module as shown below:
Figure 220: Drawing module
Drawing Window
Lantek Expert – Drawing window consists of the Geometry toolbar, Machining toolbar, Status bar,
Drawing window and 3D View. The Drawing window occupies the center of the 2D screen and
represents the useful drawing zone where the user can design a part. The 3D view will only be
263
Drawing Module
visualized if previously enabled in View tab of the Drawing module and aims to be a visual aid when
designing parts.
Status Bar
The status bar provides up to date information about the steps to perform and the active
coordinates of the cursor.
 Sheets dimension: Those are the X and Y dimensions of the current sheet.
 Percent of sheet occupied by the parts: This is the size of the whole sheet occupied by the
nested parts.
 Percent of remnant occupied: In this case, referred to the size that the nested parts occupy
in the remnant.
 Maximum cutting coordinates: Maximum X and Y distances where the machine head will
arrive.
 Sheet reference: This is the reference given when the sheet has been created.
 CNC filename: This is the name of the CNC file which will not be generated until the job is
saved.
Apart from all the data shown previously located at the bottom of the window, there is also an icon
representing the active option. This icon, together with the name and group it belongs to, plus a text
displaying the user´s requirements at any time (a point, a selection, etc.) makes the program user
friendly and guides the user through the execution of the different options.
Customize Quick Access Toolbar

Customize quick access toolbar option permits the user to access the different functionality areas of
the software quickly and in a visual way, as they are coming in the drawing and nesting modules. This
frequently used toolbar is accessible on the top left corner of the window. This provides the user
with one click shortcut commands for the commonly used functions, such as creating a new job/part,
opening the selected part of the job/existing job and saving it between many other options.
264
Drawing Module
By means of this option the user will also be able to include additional icons such as Print, Properties
and Projects for example. Undo ( ) and Redo ( ) options enable the user to select the number
of actions that is going to use. It is necessary to unfold the list of last performed actions and to select
the action or actions ready to undo or redo from the list.
The user can add any frequently used commands to the quick access tool bar by right clicking on
the command icon and selecting Add to Quick Access Tool Bar.
More commands... option located in the drop-down menu provided on the right corner of the Quick
Access Toolbar, displays Customize dialog box, which includes the following tabs:
 Quick Access
 Hide options
 Shortcut keys
Each command displays a certain activity area. The Command button in each group carries out a
command or displays a menu of commands. Using this hierarchy, similar commands are grouped
together making the Customize access toolbar very task oriented. Because in all the modules, some
commands are available directly on each tab and it is not necessary to search for those options in
submenus.
Contextual Menu
It is possible to access to Access to points menu through a right mouse-click. The contextual menu
will only be displayed in the following cases whenever an option is being executed (such as drawing
an element, breaking elements, inserting a rapid movement, etc.):
 When selecting a point
 When selecting a geometry element
 When executing a geometry drag/dragging
265
Drawing Module
Given the case that the access to point by default is modified during the execution of an option and
by means of the contextual menu, this modification will become effective, that is, the default snap
mode will be modified for the rest of the options.
Figure 221: Access to points menu
 Picked Point: Select the picked point directly.
 Centre Point: Select the center of an arc or circle.
 Centre of Contour: Select the center of a contour.
 Near Point: Select the near point on the element.
 End Point: Select the beginning or end point of one element.
 Intersection Point: Select the intersection point between two elements.
 Double Intersection: Select the intersection point of two elements prolongation.
 Mid-Point: Select the Mid-point of an element.
 Tangent Point: Select the tangent point to one arc or circle.
266
Drawing Module
 Projected Point: Select the projected point on an element.
 Quadrant Point: Select a quadrant point on an arc or circle.
 Mixed Point: Select the near point to beginning, end, intersection, center, etc.
 Delete Geometry: It deletes the geometric elements.
 Default snap mode: Click this option in order to go back to the previous snap mode.
Parts
New
New ( ) option enables the user creating a new part.
Open
Open ( ) option allows the user opening an existing part. The system will display Part selection
Figure 222: Part selection dialog box
Select the required part and click OK button so that the system opens the selected part in Drawing
window.
267
Drawing Module
Open Parts
Open parts ( ) option allows the user to open all parts of the job, open parts with the same
machine, open parts of a subjob and open selected parts. The system will display Open parts dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 223: Open parts dialog box
Part Properties
Part properties ( ) option allows modifying the properties of a part. This option will display the
268
Drawing Module
Here the user will be able to modify the required part properties and click OK button in order to save
them. This option works the same way as the one provided in the floating menu of the Product list
and view of the Main module.
Whenever executed without a job opened, the product information will be modified. But given the
case there is a job open and the part to be modified is in that job, the part information will only be
modified in the manufacturing line, without modifying the original product.
Nesting and Machining
Nesting and machining ( ) button allows the user to access to the Nesting and Machining module.
When clicking this button, the Drawing module is closed.
Select Machine
Select Machine ( ) button enables the user to select the machine to cut the part. In order to do
it, perform the following steps:
1. Click Select Machine option and the system will display Machine select dialog box listing all the
machines available.
2. Select the required machine or include a new one by means of New button.
3. Click OK button and the part will be cut with the selected machine.
Save
Find listed below the different options available:
Save
Save ( ) option saves the current geometry in the system.
Save As
Save As ( ) button allows the user to save a part or to save the changes made to an existing
part. This is similar to the save application except for the fact that this can be used to create a new
part similar to the existing one.
269
Drawing Module
When using this application to save an existing part, the system displays the Part saving dialog box. It
is possible to make the required changes and assign a new name in this dialog box.
It is possible to generate multiple image files per part and sheet. For that purpose, it is necessary to
save the image in the corresponding database table and to indicate the file type (BMP, IMGB, IMGP,
etc.). This functionality is configured in a special file called IMAGE.FMT where as many image formats
as required can be added. Allowed formats are: BMP, PNG, WMF, JPEG and GIF between many
others. When parts are created from importers their images can only be 70x60 or 700x600.
Thanks to this, it will be possible to generate better quality images as both their size and format can
be configured. Likewise, visualization type can be configured in black and white or color, to display
their filling or to show the machining.
All the information is stored on NEST_NEXT_00000xxx table and MMPP_MMPP_00000100 table, while
the other MMPP_MMPP_00000xxx tables are no longer used.
When saving a nesting as a multiprogram it will be marked as so, therefore the label will be shown in
both the main and nesting modules. Task nestings cannot be saved as a multiprogram if they contain
order parts.
Save by Parts
Save by parts ( ) option enables the user to save more than one part. If there is more than one
design, then this application allows the user to save each design as an independent part. There are
three different options:
 Save by parts (Manual) : The main feature of this option, is that the user must select the
geometry to save manually by means of the Selection options that will be displayed on the
data request panel. Find below the main data request panel corresponding to this option:
270
Drawing Module
Figure 224: Save by parts (Manual)
 Save by parts (Automatic) : By means of this option, the system will automatically detect
the parts to save. Find below the main data request panel corresponding to this option:
Figure 225: Save by parts (Automatic)
271
Drawing Module
 Save by parts (Semi-automatic) : The semi-automatic option means that the user must
select one contour of the part required to be saved so that the system can detect the rest of
the part required to be saved. Find below the main data request panel corresponding to this
option:
Figure 226: Save by parts (Semi-automatic)
Find the fields provided in the previous data request panels described below. Save options section
provides the following fields:
 Remember part saving data: This parameter will indicate whether the data provided in Part
saving window will be remembered for the next part saved during the execution of the
option. In other words, it allows setting the values by default for part saving options.
 Import text properties: When selecting Import text properties option, the user will visualize
a navigation button that gives access to the text definition window in order to access part
data. The auxiliary geometry element texts to be treated when saving by parts are
272
Drawing Module
configured in this window. Treated texts can be kept in this window using Delete texts
option. The automatic part detection option must be disabled and the text property import
option should be used. The Selection window can be used to choose the part geometry and
text properties associated to it.
 Delete the part: It indicates whether the parts are deleted after saving or not. Whenever the
user enables Import text properties parameter, the arrow button located on the right side
becomes enabled. If selected, the system will display the following dialog box:
 Prompt for data on each part: It indicates whether different data for each part will be
recorded or not. This checkbox is displayed only when Detect parts automatically checkbox is
selected. If this checkbox is selected, then Part Saving dialog box will be displayed as many
times as number of parts to save, where the user will be able to modify the data of the part in
question. In addition, this window will contain “Set as default data” parameter, which will
allow setting these data as default from that moment on during the execution of the option.
This parameter will just be displayed in the data request panel that corresponds to Save by
parts (Automatic) option.
 Skip part verification: If enabled the system will skip the part verification process going
directly to the next one. On the contrary, the system will not skip the part verification
process. This parameter intends to make the part saving process more fluent. If enabled, the
system will not display the second data request panel with Verify Part, Break the arcs, Open
contours, Smooth, Small elements, Management of internal contours and Scale sections.
Find described below the fields provided in Management of auxiliary geometry elements section:
 2D Points: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts
that contain them.
 Lines: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts with
intersections.
 Text: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts that
contain them.
273
Drawing Module
 Dimensions / Text: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in
dimensioned parts.
 Auxiliary Geometry: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only
in parts that contain them.
This section will not be displayed in Save by parts (Manual) option.
Once all the required data has been introduced, the user must select button so that the
system displays the following data request panel:
Figure 227: Verify part – Data request panel
 Verify part section will display the Reference, Dimensions, Number of parts, Number of close
contours, Number of open contours, Number of small elements and Number of small
elements deleted fields, which are not editable.
 Verify: Enable this checkbox in order to display Break the arcs, Open contours, Smooth and
Small elements sections below.
 Management of internal contours: Enable this checkbox in order to display Management of

internal contours section below.
 Scale: Enable this checkbox in order to display Scale section detailed below.
274
Drawing Module
Figure 228: Break the arcs – Open contours – Smooth – Small elements
 R: Introduce the radius in millimeters.
 d: Introduce the distance to break the arcs.
Figure 229: Open contours
 Close open contours: Enable this checkbox in order to close open contours.
 Tolerance: Introduce the required tolerance in millimeters.
 Modifying the geometric elements is allowed: Enable this checkbox so that the system
allows modifying geometric elements.
 Assign technology: Select the geometry required to assign from the options provided in the
drop-down list: < >, Mark, Cut, No Cut, Auxiliary Geometry. < > option means “Do not assign
technology”. Given the case < > option is selected; the system will display the following
parameters:
 Delete: Enable this parameter so that the system erases open contours without exception.
 Except elements with technology: This parameter is directly linked to the previous one and
will only be shown if Delete is enabled. Enable this parameter in order to keep those open
contours where the corresponding technology has been previously assigned.
 Put points in open contours: Select where to put points between No, All, Cut contours, Mark
contours and Non cut contours.
275
Drawing Module
Figure 230: Smooth
 Smooth: If enabled, the segments of the selected geometry will be smoothened. If selected,
the system will allow introducing the Maximum number of elements, Maximum radius and
Tolerance.
Figure 231: Small elements
 Maximum length for smaller elements: Proceed to enable Cutter radius checkbox to use it as
maximum length. If not enabled, the user will be able to introduce the Length and Radius.
 Delete small elements and join: If enabled, the system will try to join all the small elements
so that they are visualized more easily.
 Put points in small elements: Proceed to enable this checkbox in order to place points in
small elements.
Figure 232: Management of internal contours
276
Drawing Module
 Assign technology: By means of this parameter the user can assign technology to the
required internal contours, by selecting one of the options provided in the drop-down list:
Assign technology in internal contours, Assign technology in holes and Assign technology in
both of them.
 Technology: Select the technology to assign to the internal contours previously selected. The
following field will vary depending on the technology selected.
Figure 233: Scale
 Mode: Select the scale mode between Dimensions and Scale Factor.
 Apply different factor to X and Y: Enable this checkbox in order to apply a different factor to
X and Y. If enabled Required length and Required width fields will become editable and the
user will be able to introduce the required values. On the other hand, if the parameter is
disabled, the user will only be able to introduce Required length field below.
 Required length: Introduce the required length.
 New dimensions: This field is not editable. It will display the dimensions of the scale by
default or the ones introduced by the user.
Once all the required data has been introduced the user will have to select button to validate
the data introduced in the previous panels ans proceed to save the parts. Finally, the system will
display Part saving window as shown below:
277
Drawing Module
Figure 234: Part saving dialog box
Here the user will have to introduce the required Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, Date,
Quantity, Priority, Name, User Data 1-8 fields and Rotations. Find briefly detailed below the parameters
provided in this window:
 It is a filler part: Enable this parameter if the part in question is a filler part.
 Valid for nest in common cut: Enable this parameter if the current part is valid for common
cut.
 Automatic round angles: Proceed to select the required options from the drop-down list: By
default, No, Yes.
 Set as default values: By means of this parameter the user will be able to set the data set in
this window as default from that moment on during the execution of the option.
Click OK button in order to save the changes. This process will be repeated as many parts as required
to be saved.
Save All
Save all ( ) option saves all the parts.
278
Drawing Module
Save Machining
Save machining ( ) option allows the user saving the machining of the parts in different
machines. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Save machining option and the system will display Machine select dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 235: Machine select dialog box
2. Select the required machine from the ones available in the list. Here the user can also add a new
machine to the list by clicking New. When doing so, the system will display Machine definition
dialog box where the user will be able to add a new one.
Import
Import option allows the user importing the Geometry of a part, Machining of a part and Parametric
parts between many others. Once selected, the system will display Import drop-down list listing the
various elements that can be imported:
DXF Files
In order to import a DXF file, perform the following steps:
1. Select DXF files ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The different fields
provided in this dialog box are briefly described below:
 Directory: The path of the directory that consists of DXF files. Click the button in this field to
select the directory.
279
Drawing Module
 Drawing simulation: It indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
 Parameters: Parameters of the DXF file. This tab is not available as only the geometry of the
DXF file is imported.
 Configure: Click this to configure the linear and angular tolerance as well as the extension.
 Open: Click this to open the selected .dxf.
 Cancel: Click this option in order to close the window.
2. Select the required .dxf file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
3. Mark an insertion point in the geometry. The system will display Move toolbar to move the
imported geometry.
Parametric Parts
In order to import parametric parts, perform the following steps:
1. Select Parametric parts ( ) option and the system will display Parametric parts dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 236: Parametric parts dialog box
280
Drawing Module
 Directory: The path of the directory consisting parametric parts. Click the button in this field
to select the required directory.
 Arrow buttons: Click the arrow buttons to access the required pages of parametric parts.
 Configure…: Click this to configure the linear and angular tolerance as well as the extension.
2. Double-click the required parametric part to import and the system will show Parametric: Path
dialog box displaying the existing dimensions of the part.
3. It is possible to edit the dimensions as per your requirements and then click OK so that the
parametric part is imported.
imported geometry.
DWG Files
In order to import a DWG file, perform the following steps:
1. Select DWG files ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The fields provided
in this dialog box are previously described in DXF files.
2. Select the required .dwg file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
imported geometry.
MEC Files
In order to import a MEC file, perform the following steps:
1. Select MEC file ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The fields provided in
this dialog box are previously described in DXF files.
2. Select the required .mec file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
imported geometry.
281
Drawing Module
In order to import HPGL files, perform the following steps:
4. Select HPGL files ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The fields provided
in this dialog box are previously described in DXF files.
5. Select the required HPGL file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
imported geometry.
Machining Macros
Machining Macros ( ) option allows the user to open, save and delete machining macros. When
pointing this option, the system will display the following options:
Open ( ): Select this option in order to open an existing machining macro as follows:
1. Click Open button and the system will display Select machining macro dialog box.
2. Select the required machining macro and click OK button so that the system opens it.
Save ( ): Select this option in order to save new machining instructions as macro or save the
changes made to an existing one as follows:
1. Click Save button and the system will prompt the user to select a reference point in the Drawing
window which consists of the machined part.
2. Mark the reference point and the system will display Machining macros saving dialog box.
3. Introduce the reference of the machining macro and click OK button so that those machining
instructions are saved.
Save as ( ): Select this option in order to save the new machining instructions as macros or save
an already saved machining macro with a new reference.
282
Drawing Module
Delete ( ): Select this option in order to erase a machining macro as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete machining macros dialog box listing all the
saved machining macros.
2. Select the one required to delete and click Delete button, so that it is erased.
3. Click Close in order to close Delete machining macros dialog box.
Lead-in/Lead-outs
Open ( ): It opens an existing machining lead-in/lead-outs from the list.
Save ( ): It allows the user saving the current lead-in/lead-out in the system.
Save as ( ): It allows the user saving the current lead-in/lead-out with a different name.
Delete ( ): It allows the user deleting the required lead-in/lead-outs by selection.
Remnants
Remnants option allows the user to open, save and delete remnants. If selected, the system will
display the following options:
Open ( ): Select this option in order to open a remnant as follows:
1. Select Open option and the system will display Select a remnant dialog box listing all the available
remnants.
2. Select the required remnant from the list provided and click OK button so that the system opens it.
3. The user can also filter and look for the remnant that satisfies his conditions by selecting Criteria
checkbox. If selected, the Navigation button will be activated, which will direct the user to Select a
remnant window as shown below:
283
Drawing Module
Figure 237: Select a remnant dialog box
4. Introduce the Reference, Material, Thickness, maximum and minimum Length, maximum and
minimum width and User data between other options as can be seen in the previous window.
5. The system will display the remnants that meet the conditions previously introduced and the user
will have to select the required one and click OK button.
Save ( ): Select Save option in order to save new remnants or to save the changes made to an
existing one as follows:
1. Click Save button and the system will display Remnant saving dialog box.
2. Introduce the Reference of the remnant, select the required Material from the drop-down list or
include a new one, introduce the Thickness, Quantity, Priority and User data if required between
other options.
Save As ( ): Select Save as option in order to save a new remnant or to save an already existing
remnant with different values.
Delete ( ): Select Delete option in order to erase the required remnants as follows:
284
Drawing Module
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete remnants dialog box listing all the saved
remnants.
2. Select the remnant required to delete.
3. The user can also filter and look for the remnants to delete by selecting Criteria checkbox. If
selected, the Navigation button will be enabled, which will direct the user to Delete remnants
window.
4. Introduce the Reference of the remnant, select the required Material from the drop-down list or
include a new one, introduce the Thickness, Quantity, Priority and User data if required between
other options.
5. The system will display the remnants that meet the conditions previously introduced and the user
will have to select the remnant required to delete and click OK button so that it is erased.
Duct Holes
Duct Holes option enables the user to open, save and delete duct holes. When selected, the system
will display the following options:
Open ( ): Select this option in order to open an existing duct hole as follows:
1. Click Open button and the system will display Duct hole selection dialog box listing all the saved
duct holes.
2. Select the required Duct hole and click OK button so that the system opens it.
Save ( ): Select this option in order to save a specific geometry as duct hole or to save the
changes made to an existing duct hole as follows:
1. Click Save button and the system will prompt the user to select a Reference point.
2. Once the reference point has been marked the system will display Duct holes saving dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 238: Duct holes saving dialog box
285
Drawing Module
3. Introduce the required Reference for the duct hole and click OK button so that the system saves it.
Save As ( ): Select this option in order to save a specific geometry as duct hole or save an already
saved one with a new reference.
Delete ( ): Select this option to delete a duct hole as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete duct holes dialog box listing all the saved
duct holes.
2. Select the one required to erase and click Delete button in order to delete it.
3. Click Close button in order to exit from Delete duct holes dialog box.
Mosaics
Mosaics option enables the user to create, save and configure mosaics. When selected, the system
displays the following options:
Create ( ): This option allows creating mosaics for a part as follows:
1. Click Create and mark the initial and end points of the area where the user wants to create the
mosaic. The system will display Create mosaic dialog box as shown below:
Figure 239: Create mosaic dialog box
2. Introduce the length of the mosaic with respect to X and Y axis in Length (X) and Length (Y) fields
as well as the Distance between the rectangles.
3. Click OK button and the mosaic will be created within the two selected points.
Save ( ): This option allows saving the mosaics as follows:
1. Click Save option and the system will display Part saving dialog box as shown below:
286
Drawing Module
2. Introduce the Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, Date, Group and various User data as per
your requirements.
3. Click OK button in order to save the mosaic.
Configure mosaics ( ): This option configures the parameters related to mosaics as follows:
1. Click Configure mosaics button and the system will display Modify mosaics properties dialog box as
shown below:
287
Drawing Module
Figure 241: Modify mosaics properties dialog box
2. The fields provided in the previous dialog box are briefly described below:
 Insert reference text in each part: If enabled, the system will insert the reference text in each
part.
 Delete the empty files: Select this checkbox in order to remove the empty mosaics. Thanks
to this option it is possible to avoid saving empty files in the system.
 Format of reference parts: The user will be able to activate Use letters to identify the rows,
Use letters to identify the columns and Enumerate the rows of the mosaic from top to
bottom checkboxes.
 Mode of create parts: The user will be able to select between Create a part by each tile and
Create several parts by each tile.
 Delete parts with perimeter less than (mm): Select this checkbox in order to delete the parts
with a smaller perimeter than the value specified in this field.
288
Drawing Module
 Join the parts inside each tile whose reference text is: Select this checkbox in order to join
the parts with same reference text in each tile.
 Assign material to parts by reference text: In this section the user can create a new material
and modify or delete an existing one respectively by means of New, Modify and Delete
buttons attached at the bottom.
Help
In this section, the user will find useful information in Documents and Online Resources.
Print
Print option allows the user printing the details of the part.
The Configuration Options menu includes the following sections:
Figure 242: Configuration options (Drawing module)
Draw and Nest

This option enables the configuration of the parameters that correspond to the Drawing module.
These parameters are divided into different groups and are shown through the following tabs:
Auxiliar, Do All, Print, Colors and Display.
3.5.16.1.1 Auxiliar
 Adjust sheets to sides: If this parameter is activated, the sheets are drawn in one corner of
the graphic area. If deactivated the sheets are adjusted to the center of the graphic area.
289
Drawing Module
Activation of this parameter is recommended since, if the sheets are drawn in one corner,
more space is available for the part screens.
 Work with sheet references: If this parameter is disabled all the sheets with the same
thickness, material and size will be assumed to be equal, however if it is enabled it is possible
to differentiate between sheets with the same thickness, material and size, by giving them a
reference name.
When creating a new sheet, with this parameter enabled, the system will prompt for a reference.
This is used when there are sheets with a quality control. For example, with 100 sheets of 2000x1000,
the reference of the sheet to use in each job will appear in the worksheet.
If this option has been enabled, the user should create the sheets one by one so that each one has its
own reference, and this parameter works properly.
 Automatic sheet references: By means of this option the user will be able to define a specific
format for the automatic references. If enabled, the Format Navigation button will direct the
user to Automatic sheet references format dialog box, where the user can configure the
required format of the automatic references.
 Verify the machining of the sheets while saving: If enabled, the system will test if the
machining process has been done properly when saving the sheet. The system will make sure
that:
 All the parts and contours are machined.
 There is no overlapping between parts.
 There are no leads, micro-joints, loops, etc. that overlap with other elements.
The system will show a message with the result of the test. If there has been any error the warning
message will display where the error has occurred. If not the user will get the following completion
message: “All machining on the sheet has been executed”.
 Define the default snap mode: When this option is active, a new button will be displayed at
the snap mode toolbar and it will allow defining the snap mode by default. The selected
option will be displayed with a red frame all around the button. Each time the user uses
another option different than the default option, after applying the option selected the
290
Drawing Module
system will come back to the default option. To disable any default option, the user has to
make double click on the New button.
 “Undo” option: This option is very useful when making changes in order to allow going back
to the previous states of the system. Here the user has to select between all levels (the
system will store in the memory the highest number of levels possible) and defined number
of levels.
 Scale factor for keyboard zoom & Scale factor for mouse zoom: By means of these options
the user can configure the scale factors while doing zoom, both for the keyboard and the
mouse wheel. The value to introduce as scale factor should be in range of 0.1 to 100, being 2
the default value. A smaller value than 1 inverts the zoom behavior. Where the page up key
makes zoom out and the page down key makes zoom in. The same is applicable to the
mouse wheel, where if value 1 is applied the zoom will not be performed.
 Moving the mouse wheel forward, the system will perform a zoom-in and moving backward
the system will perform a zoom-out.
 If the mouse right button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing
will be moved down and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward the
mouse wheel, the drawing will be moved up.
 If the mouse left button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing
will be moved to the left and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward
the mouse wheel, the drawing will be moved to the right.
 Keeping the middle button pressed while dragging the mouse the user pans the screen.
 Keeping the middle button and shift key pressed while dragging the mouse the user does a
dynamic zoom. As the mouse cursor moves up the screen, the view should zoom in. As the
mouse cursor moves down the screen view should zoom out. To configure mouse sensibility
or change its behavior it is possible to change this parameter.
 Quadrant angle: This is the angle in which the circles are going to be divided. It is only for
references; the circle is one arc. But when making a line which starts in one point of the
circle, and the Snap mode is Quadrants, then the system will catch the points which are at
291
Drawing Module
the angle step given here. The value given by default is 90 degrees, therefore there are four
possible points.
 Use: When calculating material optimization, the system will use the:
 Real area: External area without the interiors.
 External area: Area of the exterior perimeter of the part.
 Rectangular area: Area of the minimum rectangle of the part.
 Generate sheet box windows metafile while saving (WMF): If enabled, the system will
generate a WMF file with the current sheet box nesting when saving. WMF is a standard
graphic format that can be treated from many external applications. The file will be
generated inside Database folder.
 Generate sheet windows metafile while saving (WMF): If enabled, the system will generate
a WMF file with the current sheet when saving. WMF is a standard graphic format that can be
treated from many external applications. This file will also be generated inside Database
folder.
 Generate PDF of print sheet box while saving: With this option, PDF documents will be
generated with the Print Box of the selected document when saving the parts and nestings.
Every time a part or a nesting is saved, the corresponding print box PDF will be generated. It
will be stored in the same directory as the product it represents and will take the same name.
 Generate sheet DXF while saving: As in the previous options, if enabled, the system will
generate a DXF file with the current sheet nesting. DXF files are standard drawing exchange
formats
 Generate part DXF while saving: If enabled, the system will generate a DXF file of the active
part.
 Save autorecover information: This option saves the automatically recovered information of
the current work in the drawing and nesting modules. The desired time to save the auto
recovered information can be set.
292
Drawing Module
 Order subjobs: Whenever entering the Nesting module the subjobs will be ordered
depending on the configuration set here.
 Contour attributes: The postprocessor will generate the proper CNC code for the attributes
of the contours here defined. The system will display Contour Attributes dialog box as shown
below, where the user will have to introduce the required data:
Figure 243: Contour Attributes dialog box
 Auxiliary geometry: It is possible to create non cut lines configuring their line properties as
well as their visualization. First of all, it is necessary to create the new non cut types that will
be used and to specify the name and properties of the line (color, style and thickness), as
well as the possibility of visualizing this line on the sheet. From this moment on it will be
possible to modify these properties from Colors tab located next to the rest of customizable
elements.
293
Drawing Module
Figure 244: Configure: Draw and Nest (Auxiliar) window
3.5.16.1.2 Do All
 Order of sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will use the type of
order set in this field. The user will be provided with the following options:
 Largest to smallest
 Smallest to largest
 By priority
294
Drawing Module
 Remnants before sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will look
first at the status of Remnants before sheets parameter and given the case it is enabled, the
system will prioritize the use of existing remnants over sheets.
 Select sheets for quotation: This option enables the user selecting sheets for quotation. The
drop-down list provided on the right side of the field provides the following options:
 No
 Yes
 Only these
 If the job is for quotation
 Only use sheets according to the criteria for sheet selection: By means of this parameter,
the user can configure the required criteria for sheets selection. Once it has been enabled,
the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
The system will display Sheet selection window, where the user will be able to set the minimum and
maximum length as well as the minimum and maximum width of the sheets. In addition, the user will
be able to see the values previously introduced in the following fields:
 User data (1-3)
 Show the sheets with quantities equal to zero
 Select blocked sheets
 Select the remnants generated by nesting
 Select the remnants generated by user
The last two parameters previously listed will be disabled. In order to modify them, the user will have
to go to Nesting module / Sheets / New / Criteria window. Whenever Do all option is executed, the
system will use those sheets that match with the defined criteria.
 Make unitary nestings with long parts: Thanks to this parameter, it is possible to create
unitary nestings with long parts when executing Do all option. The user must introduce the
295
Drawing Module
required value in Minimum length field, which must be in millimeters. This option will check
all the parts that compose the job considering their dimensions and if any of them is bigger
than the value here configured, the system will create a unitary nesting with the rotation of
the dimension that exceeds the configured value. Given the case both dimensions are bigger
than the value specified, the part will be nested in the original rotation. For instance, if the
user wants to make a unitary nesting for all the parts of a job, it would only be necessary to
configure the Minimum length with a small enough value, as for example one millimeter.
 Look for sheets in stored nestings: If this parameter is enabled, the system will search first
for the nestings saved as Stored nesting. When activating this parameter, the following
parameters will become enabled:
 Criteria: This field allows filtering the stored nestings that the user wants to use. Once it has
been enabled, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Import stored nesting (Criteria)
window. This window allows filtering nestings by Machine, Material, Thickness, Reference,
Date, Length and Width.
 Delete existing machining: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to be used
has machining, it will be previously deleted before including it in the job and it will be
machined again during the process.
 Regenerate: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to use has machining, it will
be completely regenerated before including it in the job and it will be machined again
during the process. Remember that regenerating also supposes deleting the existing
machining.
 Look for the best format of sheets: Given the case this parameter is enabled, the system will
try to nest all the parts making use of each one of the existing formats. For example, there
are three different types of formats. The system will execute three tries, by nesting all the
parts of the job in format number one, then in format number two and finally, in format
number three. The system will compare the efficiency reached by every one of the formats
and will make use of the most efficient one.
296
Drawing Module
 Look for the best combination of sheets: This parameter depends on the field Minimum
efficiency. If this parameter is enabled, the system will take into account the minimum
efficiency set and will look for the best sheet per each nesting (the most efficient one). As in
the previous case, imagine there are three different type of formats. The system will test all
the existing formats per nesting, and will choose the most efficient one per nesting. For
example, the system will test nesting number one, in sheet number 1 (with an efficiency of
65%), in sheet number two (efficiency of 72%) and sheet number three (efficiency of 85%).
Since sheet number three is the most efficient, the system will save it and start testing again
with the following nesting in every sheet format following the same process until all the
parts have been nested. If none of the existing sheets meets the efficiency requirement set
in Minimum efficiency field, the system will keep the one that has achieved the highest
efficiency.
 Minimum efficiency to eliminate each sheet: Once Do All option has been performed and the
machining has been executed, the system will test whether the sheets used meet the
minimum efficiency requirement set in this field. Those sheets whose efficiency is not bigger
than the value configured, will be deleted. In this case the system will make use of other
sheets until the minimum efficiency is exceeded.
 Minimum efficiency calculation mode: This option allows deciding the way that the
efficiency (defined in the previous point) to eliminate sheets will be calculated. The available
options are:
 Real area: Sum of the real area of all parts.
 External area: Sum of the external area of all parts.
 Rectangular area: Sum of the rectangular area of all parts.
 All parts bounding box: Area of the bounding box of all parts.
 Maximum time to look for the best sheets: Here the user must introduce the maximum time
that will be taken to search for the best sheets. Remember that the time must be introduced
in seconds. During the Do All execution, once the time here specified is reached, the system
297
Drawing Module
will stop testing methods and will choose the best one (most efficient) found up to that
moment.
 Prenesting: This option allows creating temporary sheets with limited quantity so that it is
possible to select automatically which ones are the most adequate to execute the parts
nesting of a determined job. In order to activate this option, it is necessary to activate Look
for the best format of sheets or Look for the best combination of sheets. These options are
necessary in order to test all the temporary formats that the system can create.
Apart from temporary sheets, it is also possible to indicate if it is required to use or not the sheets
that have already been created in the system. If this option is activated, the system would use the
same sheets that would be used in the nesting of a complete job. If sheet dimensions are required as
much adjusted as possible, the user can configure Adjust final sheet dimensions to nested dimensions
option. This parameter can be defined both in X and Y or in both dimensions. This option allows
creating sheet formats that take full advantage of a coil, given that it is possible to set it to always
adjust in X.
Once the system obtains the final sheet format result, the user will be able to create the sheets in the
database or not. In this way, the user will also be able to create quotation sheets if required.
Finally, it will also be possible to launch the sheet list so that the user can be provided with the list of
used formats in the current job. If required, it will be possible to print directly or to get a previous
display to save the list in a determined format as, for example, PDF.
298
Drawing Module
Figure 245: Prenesting dialog box
 Use fixed dimensions for width of the sheets: Indicate the length, a minimum and
maximum width and a step value for each of the two dimensions and the system will create
temporary sheet formats based on those values.
 Use a range of dimensions for widths of the sheets: Indicate a predetermined width
together with the step range for the sheet length.
 Minimum & Maximum length: Indicate the minimum and maximum length of the sheets.
 Minimum & Maximum width: Indicate the minimum and maximum length of the sheets.
 Step for length & width: Here the user will be able to define the step for length and width in
millimeters.
 Create the used sheets in database: Once the system obtains the final sheet format result,
the user will be able to create the used sheets in database or not. In this way, the user will
be able to create quotation sheets and Save sheets as quotation sheets if required.
 Adjust final sheets to nested dimensions: If sheet dimensions are required as much adjusted
as possible, the user can configure this parameter. It can be defined both in X and Y or in
both dimensions.
299
Drawing Module
 Respect minimum dimensions: Whenever adjusting the sheet dimensions, it is possible to

configure respecting the minimum dimensions defined for the Prenesting. In other words,
there must be no final sheet with smaller dimensions than the ones defined.
 Use system sheets: This allows the user to use the system sheets.
 Print sheets at the end of the prenesting: This option allows the user to preview before
printing so as to get a previous display in a determined format.
 Prompt for data before prenesting: When selected, the Prenesting window is displayed
when the user performs Do All option.
 Generate remnants after nesting: Given the case this parameter is enabled, once the nesting
has been executed, the system will generate automatically the remnants of every sheet (if
any).
 Cut after nesting: If enabled, the system will perform the machining operation after the
nesting has been done.
 Deal with equal sheets: Using this option, the system will calculate if the same sheet can be
done twice instead of making the nesting and machining process of the same parts in the
same sheets more than once, what will help the user save time.
If this parameter is disabled, the system will get one sheet and make the nesting and machining. Get
the following sheet and make the nesting and machining. The system will execute the same steps
once and again until the whole job has been finished even if the sheets are equal, which results in a
longer execution time.
If this parameter is enabled, after performing the first sheet and machining, the system will detect
whether the following sheet is equal to the first one (this means we have the same number of parts,
which can be placed in the same positions). Given the case it detects an equal sheet, the system will
store just one sheet, meanwhile the Worksheet will define that the sheet must be machined twice.
300
Drawing Module
Figure 246: Configure: Draw and Nest (Do All) window
3.5.16.1.3 Print
 Print sheets while saving: If enabled, the system will print the sheets while saving.
 Print machining: If enabled, the machining will also appear in the worksheet.
 Print the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with linear texture making
easier the differentiation between sheet and remnant when printing.
 Only the initialization: Enabled, in the worksheet will only appear the initialization. This
option is activated when Print machining is enabled.
 Prompt for sheets before printing: Do All option may generate more than one sheet. If this
option is enabled, the system will ask for the sheets required to print instead of printing all of
them.
301
Drawing Module
 Print: The system will generate the worksheet of the sheets selected here. The user can
select between; The current sheet, Every sheet of the subjob, Every sheet of the job and
Select sheets.
 Prints identifiers of parts: If enabled, the identifiers of the parts will be included in the
printing worksheet.
 Identifiers: The user can select between the following options:
 Print the name: The system will include the name of the part inside the geometry.
 Print the index: The system will insert the same number to every equal part of the sheet.
This index is very useful because it will be printed in the Factory sheets list.
 Print the order: The system will include in the parts the number that corresponds to their
order.
 Line width: When printing, the width of the different elements involved can be modified in
order to make easier their identification. The user will be able to set the Line width of the
Geometry part, Geometry sheet, Machining part and Machining sheet.
 Prompt for template name before printing: If enabled the system will prompt for the
template name to use before printing. This option is useful when the user has more than one
template defined. These templates, also called boxes, can be parameterized. In other words,
the user can define the line thickness, position and dimension of the drawings, text format
and database fields required in the boxes. In order to define a new box, contact the product
support team.
302
Drawing Module
Figure 247: Configure: Draw and Nest (Print) window
3.5.16.1.4 Colors
This window allows configuring the colors of the whole system. The user will get the list of
elements/aspects that can be configured by clicking the drop-down arrow located at the top of the
window. The configurable aspects are the following: Background, Cursor cross, Axis, Background of
sheets, Edge of sheet, Background of remnants, Edge of remnants, Clamps and work zone, Straight,
Point, Selection, Dragging, Machining, Machining with multihead, From Point, Rapids, Cycles, Machining
texts, Punched, Punch attribute, Common punch attribute, Shear attribute, Mark attribute, Cut
attribute, Micro-joints attribute, Shear, Pattern, Dimensions / Text, Simulation Window-Capture, Virtual
movement, Bridges, Loops, Lead-in / Lead-outs, Micro-joints, Geometry, Upper and lower beveling,
Upper bevel, Lower bevel, Remnant line, Cutting quality 1-12, Powder mark, Drill mark, Pen mark, Cut
mark, Rapid with head down, Suction cup, Activated suction cup, Reference point, Grid, Auxiliary clams
and auxiliary work zone, Distinguished color 1-30, Active part in part list.
303
Drawing Module
Figure 248: Colors examples
The user will be able to configure the Type, Make on and Color of the previously mentioned aspects.
Figure 249: Configure: Draw and Nest (Colors) window
304
Drawing Module
3.5.16.1.5 Display
 Show remnant references on screen: If enabled, whenever a remnant is generated the
system will show the assigned reference inside it.
 Show part texts on the sheet: In the Drawing window it is possible to assign a description
text which will have no machining effect. If this parameter is enabled, this text will be
displayed.
 Show the dragging of the part with collision control: If enabled, the user will be able to
visualize the dragging part with the collision control.
 Show non-cut contours on the sheet: The system provides an option to assign non-cut
technology to the contours. This means that these contours will not be machined unless this
assigned technology changes. If enabled, the non-cut geometries will be shown in the
configured color.
 Selection by window/capture/trap: If enabled, whenever the user selects parts (to erase,
copy or move them between many other options) they will get different colors so that the
visualization is easier and clearer.
 Simulate selection when mouse is moved: If enabled, whenever the mouse passes over a
segment, this segment will change color showing which contour would be selected if the
mouse was clicked.
 Show micro-joints: If enabled, the micro-joints will be shown and an exterior line will appear
in the contours. This parallel line to the external contours is the center of the exterior punch.
The distance between the exterior contours and this line is the middle of the width of the
configured tool for the exteriors.
 Display all clamp and work zones: If enabled, the nesting module will show in the screen all
the work zones as well as the clamps in the configured positions.
The clamp zone changes depending on the station the turret is working with. If this parameter is
disabled, only the clamp work zone of the current station will be shown with continuous line and the
rest with discontinuous lines.
305
Drawing Module
 Simulate the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with a green color for
making the identification easier.
 Display dimensions on the sheet: Although the dimensions made in the drawing module will
be always shown, the user can decide to keep them in the nesting module or not by
activating this parameter.
 View nesting limit: When enabled, the system will display the line that shows the end of
nesting.
 Highlight selected part: When the user selects a part in the Nesting Part list window, the
geometry of the select part will be highlighted in the sheet only when this option is enabled.
In the same way, it the user select any parts on the sheet, the system will highlight them on
the Parts List window as well as all the equal parts nested on the sheet. This color can be
configured in Color window.
 Show points at the center of punching instructions: This parameter allows a display of the
central point of each punch. This way, a better and faster punching interpretation can be
obtained. The user will be able to select between: No, Drawing, Nesting and Both of them.
 Text size for the quantities in the parts window: This parameter allows the user modifying
the size of the text that will appear on the sheets window of the Nesting module. The user
will be able to select between; Small, Normal, Large and Largest.
 Postprocessor words: From this window the user can define which text will be shown on the
sheet when a function is selected, as well as the font and size of the postprocessor words
displayed on the sheet. If none is specified, the system will use the windows standard font
size configured by default on the computer.
These parameters allow visualizing or hiding the Postprocessor words as well as changing their text.
306
Drawing Module
 Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet: If enabled, when getting a part from the list, the
system will show additional lines from the margin of the part showing the minimum distance
between parts.
 Selection with multihead: When the machine has been configured as multi-head, the system
will make the nesting trying to use the maximum number of heads. If this option is enabled,
when a part is select, the system will select the entire multi-head group (given that the parts
will be machined at the same time as selected).
 Selection by window/capture/trap without multihead: When Selection with multihead is

enabled this parameter will be highlighted.
 Show selected machining: This option allows visualizing the selected machining.
 Show micro-joints with points: If enabled, the system will display the micro-joints with two
points in order to show their location.
 Display fixed position points of the clamp: If enabled, the system will show the fixed
position points of the clamps.
 Show part references on the screen: If this option is enabled, the part references will be
included inside the contour of the parts. It will not change the machining of the parts, it is
only a visualization option.
 Show the direction of movements: If enabled, the system will show with an arrow the
direction of every rapid movement.
307
Drawing Module
 Show rapids in drawing module: If the visualization is enabled in the Drawing module, the
user will be provided with three options:
o One part: It shows rapids when one part is opened.
o Multiple parts: It shows rapids when multiple parts are opened.
o Always: It shows rapids constantly.
 Show rapids in Nesting and Machining module: Select this checkbox to visualize the rapids
in Nesting and Machining module.
 Show bevel information: Both in Nesting and Drawing module the user can visualize bevel
information. The system will display Chamber information setup dialog box as shown below:
Figure 251: Bevel information setup dialog box
 Text position, font and size can be selected as well as where the text will be shown:
Drawing, Nesting or Both of them.
 Simulation: When clicking this button, the system will display Simulation dialog box as shown
below:
308
Drawing Module
Figure 252: Simulation dialog box
Here the user will be able to define the shear movement while the machining simulation. The user
can select between three different movements:
 On XY: The shear will move using both axes at the same time.
 First on one axis and later on the other: The shear will move first in horizontal or vertical
and then in the other way.
 Head radius (mm): Here the user can introduce the Head radius in millimeters.
 Number of milling broken segments: This option allows the user to define the number of
milling broken segments.
Figure 253: Configure: Draw and Nest (Display) window
309
Drawing Module
Interface
The Interface option enables the user to create a new toolbar and change the existing toolbar
1. Click Interface option and the system will display Customize dialog box:
Figure 254: Customize Quick Access
 Quick access
 Hide options
 Shortcut keys
 Ribbon
310
Drawing Module
 In Hide options tab the user can set the configuration of the commands and select between
Basic, Advanced and Customized.
If Customized option is selected, the user will be able to select between Basic and All and Hide options
section will be enabled. In this section the user can select between Current machine, Machines of
same type, All machines and enable Hide options in both modules parameter.
Figure 255: Customize Hide options
311
Drawing Module
Select an application and then introduce the key from the keyboard to assign as New Shortcut key
for the previously selected application. Click Assign button and the selected key will be assigned as
shortcut key as well as visualized in Existing keys field. The user can also select an existing shortcut
key from the Existing keys field and click Delete button in order to remove it.
 In Ribbon tab the user can edit the view and the items provided in the Ribbon.
312
Drawing Module
groups.
313
Drawing Module
It is not possible to add two separators together, neither at the beginning nor at the end of the
group.
Warning window asking “Do you want to delete all ribbon customizations for this
Exit
Exit ( ) button allows the user to close Expert-Drawing window.
Home
Draw
Access to Points
Access to points ( ) option displays the following menu:
314
Drawing Module
Figure 258: Access to points options
 Default snap mode: Click this option in order to go back to the previous snap mode.
315
Drawing Module
Delete Geometry
The Delete Geometry ( ) button allows the user to delete the desired geometries from the
design of the part.
In order to delete the geometry, perform the following steps:
1. Click Delete Geometry and the system will display Selection toolbar as shown below:
Figure 259: Selection toolbar
2. Select the elements that have to be deleted using Selection toolbar and then right-click or click
Accept button on the Selection toolbar. The geometry will be deleted.
Available Geometries
 2D Points ( ): It creates geometric points. Select a point by means of the mouse or
keyboard.
 Line Segments ( ): It creates line segments. Select the beginning and end points.
 Continuous Line ( ): It creates polylines. Select a point by means of the mouse or

keyboard.
 Arc Segments ( ): It creates arc segments. Define the arc by three points.
 Full Circles ( ): It creates full circles. Define the circle and diameter of the circle.
 Lines ( ): It creates construction lines. Define one point and the desired angle of the line.
 Squares ( ): It creates squares. Define the square by its lower-left corner.
 Rectangles ( ): It creates rectangles. Define the rectangle by its center.
316
Drawing Module
 Modified Rectangles ( ): It creates rectangles with modified corners. Define the lower-left
corner of the rectangle.
 Polygons ( ): It creates polygons. Define the length of the polygon side.
 Obround Slots ( ): It creates Obround Slots. Define the linear groove by one point and one
angle.
 Radial Slots ( ): It creates radial slots. Define the circular groove by the beginning point,
end point and center.
 Ovals ( ): It creates ovals.
 Ellipses ( ): It creates ellipses.
 Pulleys ( ): It creates pulleys.
Modify
Break Elements
Break elements ( ) button displays the options shown below:
Figure 260: Break elements options
 Break Elements: It breaks and cuts geometric elements. This button allows the user to split
elements of geometry without eliminating the parts that limit a base element and contiguous
elements.
 Break: It breaks one element in two pieces. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
317
Drawing Module
1. Select Break button and select the element that the user wants to break.
2. Click to mark the breaking point and the element will be split with a point.
 Cut 1: It deletes the end of one element by doing the following:
1. Select Cut 1 button and then select a base element.

2. Select the portion of a second element intersecting the base element and the selected portion of
the second element will be deleted.
 Cut several: It deletes the end of several elements. It deletes the selected portions of
elements intersecting the base element as follows:
1. Select Cut several button and select the required base element.
2. Select the portions of other elements intersecting the base element and those will be deleted.
Similar to Cut 1 option except for that this application deletes portions of several elements at
the same time.
 Join: It joins two crossed elements by deleting the selected portions of elements. Perform
the following steps:
1. Click Join button and then select the portion of the first element that has to be deleted.
2. Select the portion of the second element intersecting the first one. The system will join the two
intersecting elements by deleting the selected portions.
 Bridges: It connects two elements by means of a bridge as follows:
1. Click Bridges button and then select the first element that has to be connected.
2. Select the second element and the system will prompt the user to introduce the Width value of the
bridge.
3. Click OK button and the system will connect the two elements by a bridge.
Fillets
Fillets ( ) option allows the user to create a fillet at the vertex of a geometry. In order to create a
fillet perform the following steps.
318
Drawing Module
1. Select Fillets option and then select the first and second portions of the geometry which constitute
the corner or intersection of the geometry.
2. The system will display a dialog box asking the user the Radius value.
3. Click OK button and the system will create a fillet at the vertex.
Once a fillet has been created at the vertex of a geometry at a specified radius, it is possible to
click the other required vertices to create fillets of the same radius.
Bevel
Bevel ( ) option allows the user to create bevels at the vertex of the geometry. In order to create
bevels, do the following:
1. Click Bevels button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 261: Bevel values dialog box
2. The different fields in this dialog box are briefly described below:
 d1: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the first element.
 d2: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the second element.
 Constrain proportions: It indicates whether or not the values in ‘d1’ and ‘d2’ changes
proportionately.
3. Introduce the required values and then click OK.

4. Select the first and second element of the geometry. The bevel is created at the vertex of the
geometry.
319
Drawing Module
Offset
Select Offset ( ) option to draw a contour for a selected contour at a specified offset. In order to
draw a contour at a specified offset, do the following:
1. Click Offset button and then select the base contour.

2. Select the position of the contour and the required corner shape and the system will display the
Figure 262: Compensation mode
3. Select the required Compensation mode and click OK button. The system will display another dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 263: Compensation value
4. Introduce the Offset value in Value field and then click OK. The contour for the selected contour will
be drawn at the specified offset.
Lengthen Elements
Lengthen Elements ( ) option allows the user to lengthen two elements by joining them. In order
to lengthen elements, perform the following steps:
1. Click Lengthen Elements button and then select the first element that has to be joined and
lengthened.
2. Select the second element that has to be joined with the first element. The elements will be
connected and lengthened.
320
Drawing Module
Join Elements
Join Elements ( ) option allows the user to join two elements as follows:
1. Click Join Elements button and then select the first element that has to be joined.
2. Select the second element that has to be joined with the first element and the elements will be
joined.
Fitting
Fitting ( ) option creates a fitting type curve for the geometry. In order to do it, perform the
following steps:
1. Select Fitting button and the system will allow the user to select the required geometry by means
of Selection toolbar.
2. Once selected click Accept button located in the Selection toolbar and the system will display
Fitting dialog box as shown below:
Figure 264: Fitting dialog box
Find the different fields provided briefly described below:
 By points: It indicates whether the segments of the selected geometry are converted to an
arc or not.
 Smooth: In indicates whether the segments of the selected geometry are smoothened or
not. If selected, the user will have to introduce the required values in Minimum number of
elements, Maximum radius and Tolerance fields.
321
Drawing Module
 Make tangent: It indicates whether the arc is created based on the intersection of two
tangents or not. If selected, the user will have to introduce the required values in Minimum
angular error admitted, Maximum angular error admitted, Radius error tolerance and
Position error tolerance fields.
 Smooth and make tangent: It indicates whether the segments are smoothened and if the
arc is created based on the intersection of two tangents or not. If selected the user will
have to introduce the required values in Minimum number of elements, Maximum radius,
Tolerance, Minimum angular error admitted, Maximum angular error admitted, Radius
error tolerance and Position error tolerance fields.
3. Select the required option and click OK button. The fitting curve will be created for the selected
geometry.
Shorten-Lengthen
Shorten-Lengthen ( ) option shortens or lengthens the selected element. In order to break

elements, do the following:
1. Click Shorten-lengthen button and then select the element that has to be shortened or lengthened.
The system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 265: Shorten-lengthen dialog box
The different fields in this dialog box are briefly described below:
 Shorten: It indicates whether the length of the element is reduced or not.
 Lengthen: It indicates whether the length of the element is increased or not.
322
Drawing Module
 Middle: It indicates whether the element is shortened or lengthened in the mid-point or

not.
 End: It indicates whether the element is shortened or lengthened in the end point or not.
 Picked point: It indicates whether the element is shortened or lengthened in the selected
point or not.
 Value: It indicates the length value of the element.
2. Introduce the required values and then click OK button. The length of the selected element will be
shortened or lengthened depending on the values previously set.
Join and Fillet
Join and fillet ( ) option joins two intersected elements with a fillet of a specified radius. In order
to break elements with Join and fillet button, do the following:
1. Click Join and fillet button and then select the first element.
2. Select the second element which is intersected to the first element. The system will display a dialog
box asking the user the required radius value.
3. Enter the Radius value in the Value field and then click OK. The two intersected elements will be
joined with a fillet.
One Touch Figures

This menu allows the user creating twelve different notches for geometries, as shown in the
different images provided:
Figure 266: One-touch figures
 One-touch figure 1: Select this to create a notch at the vertex of the geometry. In order to
create this notch, do the following:
1. Click One-touch figure 1 button and the system will display the following dialog box:
323
Drawing Module
Figure 267: One-touch figure 1
 d1: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the first element.
 d2: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the second element.
 Constrain proportions: It indicates whether or not the values in ‘d1’ and ‘d2’ changes
proportionately.

3. Select the first and second elements of the geometry and the notch will be created at the vertex.
 One-touch figure 2: Select to create a notch at the vertex of the geometry. In order to create
this notch, do the following:
2. Introduce the radius value in the ‘r’ field and then click OK.
 One-touch figure 3: Select this to create a notch at the vertex of the geometry. In order to
324
Drawing Module
2. Introduce the radius in ‘r’ field and then click OK.

 One-touch figure 4: Select this to create a notch of specified length at a specified point of the
geometry. In order to create this notch, do the following:
 l: It is the length value of the notch.
 p: It is the depth value of the notch.

3. Select the base element and the insertion point of the notch.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch will be created at the specified point.
 One-touch figure 5: Select this to create a notch of specified radius and depth. In order to
325
Drawing Module
 r: It is the radius value of the notch.
The radius value should be less than the depth value.
3. Select the base element and the insertion point.

4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified radius and depth will be created.
 One-touch figure 6: Select this to create a notch of specified radius and depth. In order to
1. Click One-touch figure 6 button and the system will display the following dialog box to enter the
radius and depth value (refer to One-touch figure 5):
326
Drawing Module
2. Enter the Radius value in ‘r’ field and Depth value in the ‘p’ field and then click OK.
The radius value should be greater than the depth value.

4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified radius and depth will be created.
 One-touch figure 7: Select this to create a notch of a specified width and depth. In order to
 l: It is the width value of the notch.
6. Enter the required values and then click OK.

7. Select the base element and insertion point.
8. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified width and depth will be created.
 One-touch figure 8: Select this to create a notch of a specified radius, depth, and width. In
order to create this notch, do the following:
1. Click One-touch figure 8 button and then the system will display the following dialog box:
327
Drawing Module
 r: It is the radius value of the notch.
 a: It is the width value of the notch.
2. Enter the required values and then click OK.

4. Select the position of the notch and the notch will be created.
 One-touch figure 9: Select this to create a notch of specified width, depth, radius, and width
of the base. In order to create this notch, do the following:
2. Introduce the radius value in ‘r’ field, width value in ‘a’ field, width of the base value in ‘l’ field, and
depth value in ‘p’ field. Click OK.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified radius, width, width of the base, and
depth will be created.
328
Drawing Module
 One-touch figure 10: Select this to create a notch of specified width, depth, and depth up to
the base point of the notch. In order to create this notch, do the following:
1. Click One-touch figure 10 button and the system will display the following dialog box to enter the
width and depth value (refer One-touch figure 7):
2. Enter the width value in ‘l’ field, depth value in ‘p’ field, depth up to the base point of the notch in
‘pm’ field. Click OK.
4. Select the position of the notch and the specified notch will be created.
 One-touch figure 11: Select this to create rectangular or circular notches at the vertex of
geometries. In order to create this notch, do the following:
The different fields in this dialog box are described as below:
 d1: It indicates the depth value of the notch.
 d2: It indicates the width value of the notch.
329
Drawing Module
2. Introduce the required values and then select between Rectangular or Circular shape of notch. Click
OK.
3. Select the first and second element of the geometry.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch will be created at the vertex of the geometry.
 One-touch figure 12: Select this to create a notch at the vertex of a geometry. In order to
The different fields provided in this dialog box are briefly described below:
 d1 to d6: It is the distance values of the notch.
 2 Distances: It indicates whether or not only the values of the ‘d1’ and ‘d2’ fields are used.
 6 Distances: It indicates whether or not all the distance values from ‘d1’ to ‘d6’ fields are
used.
2. Introduce the distances of the notch and select the number of distances to be entered. Click OK.
3. Select the first and second element of the geometry. The notch will be created at the vertex of the
geometry.
330
Drawing Module
Transform
Transform menu allows the user to edit the design of the part such as copying or stretching the
elements and rotating or moving the geometry, between many other options which are listed below:
Copy
Copy ( ) button allows the user making copies of the selected geometries. In order to make
copies, perform the following steps:
1. Select Copy button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select a geometry using Selection toolbar and click Accept button. The system will display the
following dialog box so that the user selects the type of copying:
Figure 279: Copy types
The different types of copying geometries are explained below:
 : Select this option to make one copy of the selected geometry and move it by means
of Dragging options.
 : Select this option to make the required number of copies of the selected geometry
and move them by means of Dragging options.
 : Select this option to make the required number of copies of a geometry at a

specified angle and distance. When selected, the system will display the following dialog box:
331
Drawing Module
Figure 280: Copy values 1
Find the fields provided in this dialog box briefly described below:
 n: Number of copies to be made.
 a: Angle at which the copy is created.
 d: Distance between the consecutive copies of the geometry.
Introduce the required values and then click OK button in order to apply them.
 : Select this option in order to make the required copies of the selected geometry
maintaining the specified angle between the geometries. It is also possible to rotate the
geometries. When selected, the system will display the following dialog box:
 n: Number of copies to be made.
 a: Angle between the geometries.
 Yes: Select this to rotate the copies of the geometry.
 No: Select this if the rotation of the copies is not required.
332
Drawing Module
Introduce and select the required values and click OK button to apply them.
 : Select this option to make the required number of copies of the selected geometry
simultaneously in two directions. The copies will be created in the form of a grid. When
selected the system will display the dialog box shown below:
 n1: Number of copies in the first direction.
 n2: Number of copies in the second direction.
 a: Angle value at which the copies are created.
 d1: Distance between the consecutive copies in the first direction.
 d2: Distance between the consecutive copies in the second direction.
Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save them.
 : Select this option in order to make copies of the selected geometry in a rectangular
area. This rectangular area is defined by two points. When selected, the system will display
Copies dialog box as shown below:
333
Drawing Module
Figure 283: Copies dialog box
 Horizontal separation: Horizontal separation distance between the copies.
 Vertical separation: Vertical separation distance between the copies.
Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save them.
 : Select this option this option to make copies of the selected geometry in a
rectangular area. This is similar to the previous option except for the fact that the first point
of the rectangular area is considered from the first selected geometry and the end point has
to be defined. When selected, the system will also display Copies dialog box (previously
displayed).
 : Select this option in order to make copies of the selected geometry in an existing
rectangular area. The selected geometry should be inside a rectangle. When selected the
system will display Copies dialog box as shown below:
Figure 284: Copies dialog box 2
 Offset in X: Separation distance between the copies in X axis.
 Offset in Y: Separation distance between the copies in Y axis.
 : The user will have to click on the required arrows in order to select the directions.
If the center is clicked, all the directions will be selected. Introduce the required values and
click OK to apply the changes. Select the required type of copying, introduce the required
334
Drawing Module
data and click OK button in order to save the changes. The copies of the selected geometry
will be created.
Move
Move ( ) button allows the user moving elements or the entire geometry of the part. In order to
move an element or geometry, do the following:
1. Click Move button and the Selection toolbar will be displayed.

2. Select the required element using the Selection toolbar and then right click or click Accept button.
3. Mark a reference point to move the selected element. The system will display the Dragging options
to help the user rotate the selected element in different degrees, angles, and so on.
4. Mark an insertion point and the selected element will be moved to that point.
Stretch
Stretch ( ) button allows the user to stretch and modify the geometry. In order to stretch and
modify the geometry, do the following:
1. Click Stretch button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select two or more joined elements of the geometry required to stretch and click Accept button.
3. Mark a reference point to start stretching the selected elements.
4. Move the cursor till the desired point and then click again to mark an insertion point. The geometry
will be modified and stretched.
Rotate
Rotate ( ) button allows the user to rotate the geometry at specified angles, position, and so on.
In order to rotate the geometry, do the following:
1. Click Rotate button and then the system displays the Selection toolbar.
2. Select the geometry required to rotate using the Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
3. Mark a center point of rotation and the system will display the following dialog box to select the
required type of rotation.
335
Drawing Module
Figure 285: Rotation options
4. Select the required type of rotation. The different types of rotation are as follows:
 : Click this to rotate the selected geometry at a specified angle. The system will
display the following dialog box, where the user will have to select between Degrees,
Radians, Degrees, minutes, seconds and Centesimal degrees and introduce the required Angle.
Figure 286: Rotation values
Click OK button in order to save the changes and rotate the geometry as specified.
 : Click this to rotate the selected geometry to form a minimum rectangle. The system
will display the following dialog box:
Figure 287: Minimum rectangle
336
Drawing Module
Select the Favorite position for minimal rectangle between the options provided in the drop-down list
and introduce the Angle step value. Finally, click OK button in order to rotate the geometry as
specified.
 : Click this to rotate the selected geometry at a specified angle with respect to a
selected auxiliary segment.
The user will have to select between Degrees, Radians, Degrees, minutes, seconds and Centesimal
degrees and introduce the required Angle in the dialog box displayed. Finally, click OK button in order
to rotate the geometry as specifies.
Scale
Scale ( ) button allows the user to enlarge or reduce the size of a selected element. In order to
enlarge or reduce the size of a selected element, do the following:
1. Click Scale button and the system displays the Selection toolbar.
2. Select the geometry using the Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
3. Mark the Base point of the scale and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 288: Scale values
4. Select Apply different factor to X and Y checkbox in order to have different size values on X and Y
axis. When selecting this, the system will allow the user to enter different values for X and Y axis.
5. Enter the new values in the first box and the existing values will be displayed in the second box.
6. Click OK button and the geometry will be enlarged or reduced.
337
Drawing Module
Place Near
Place near ( ) option allows the user to increase or decrease the distance between geometries.
When selected, the system will display the following dialog box providing the different ways
available to increase or decrease the distance as follows:
Figure 289: Place near options
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two parallel geometries. In
order to increase or decrease the distance between two parallel geometries, do the following:
1. Click this button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select an element using Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
3. Select the initial and final elements that are parallel to each other. The system will display a dialog
box.
4. Introduce the separation distance value between the initial and final elements in Value field.
5. Click OK. The distance between the selected parallel elements will increase or decrease accordingly
to the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two perpendicular
geometries. In order to increase or decrease the distance between two perpendicular geometries,
do the following:
338
Drawing Module
3. Select the initial and final elements that are perpendicular to each other. The system will display a
dialog box.
5. Click OK. The distance between the selected perpendicular elements will increase or decrease
accordingly to the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two geometries
irrespective of their positions. In order to increase or decrease the distance between them, do the
following:
3. Select the initial and final elements. The system will display a dialog box.
5. Click OK. The distance between the selected elements will increase or decrease accordingly to the
values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two geometries based on
the clicked points while selecting the elements. In order to increase or decrease the distance
between them, do the following:
3. Select the initial and final elements. The system will display a dialog box.
5. Click OK. The distance between the clicked points will increase or decrease accordingly to the values
previously introduced.
339
Drawing Module
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between a circular element and two
perpendicular elements. In order to increase or decrease the distance between elements, do the
following:
3. Select the initial and final elements.
4. Select a tangent perpendicular to the final element and the system will display a dialog box.
5. Introduce the separation distance in Value field and click OK button. The distance between the
clicked points will increase or decrease accordingly to the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between the minimum rectangle of
a geometry and a defined point. In order to increase or decrease the distance between minimum
rectangle and a point, do the following:
1. Click this button and the system displays the Selection toolbar
2. Select an element using the Selection toolbar and then click Accept button.
3. Select the destination point. The distance between the minimum rectangle of the selected element
and the destination point will increase or decrease accordingly.
Mirror
Mirror ( ) button allows the user to copy the selected geometry symmetric to an axis or line. In
order to copy the selected geometry symmetric to an axis, do the following:
1. Click Mirror button and then the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the geometry to copy using the Selection toolbar and then click Accept button.
3. Select the first and final point of an axis or select a segment or line. The copy of the selected
geometry is created symmetric to the axis or line.
Break Parts
Break parts ( ) button allows the user breaking the selected geometry. When selected, the
system will display Break Parts dialog box as shown below:
340
Drawing Module
Figure 290: Break parts dialog box
Between the different options provided in the previous window to break the parts the user will have
to select between Equal parts, Middle points, Defined geometry, Tracts by length and Number of tracts.
Find briefly described below the different fields provided in Break parts dialog box if equal parts
option is selected:
 Break by:
 Equal parts
 Middle points
 Defined geometry
 Tracts by length
 Number of tracts
 Number of parts: Number of parts of the geometry to be broken.
 Seams: Type of seam for the corners of the broken part.
 Respect minimum width of notches: It indicates whether the minimum width of notches will
be considered while breaking the part or not.
341
Drawing Module
Union
Union ( ) option enables the union between different elements of geometry. In order to do
it perform the following steps:
1. Click Union button.

2. Select the base contour and the second contour that are required to be united.
3. The system will merge the selected contours.
Subtraction
Subtraction ( ) option subtracts the intersected portion of the first and second element
and the portion of the second element that is outside the first element. In order to do it, perform the
following steps:
1. Click Subtraction button.

2. Select the base contour.
3. Select the second contour and the system will delete the intersected portion of the first and second
elements, as well as the portion of the second element that is outside the first element.
Intersection
Intersection ( ) option retains the intersection contours and deletes the other
elements. In order to break elements with Intersection, perform the following steps:
1. Click Intersection button.

2. Select the base contour.
3. Select the second contour intersected with the base contour and the system will delete the two
contours except the intersected one.
Change Cutting Direction
Change cutting direction ( ) option allows the user changing the cutting
direction of the contours. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Change cutting direction button and the system will display the current cutting direction of
the part by means of pink arrows.
2. Select the contours for which to change the cutting direction and it will automatically change.
342
Drawing Module
Contour Ordering
Contour Ordering ( ) option allows the user setting the cutting order for the
contours. In order to do it, perform the following steps.
1. Select Contour ordering button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 291: Contour ordering dialog box
2. Select between Clock wise and Counter clock wise options for Outside and Inside contours.
3. Click OK button and the system will set the cutting order accordingly.
Transform One-touch Figures
Transform One-touch figures ( ) option converts One touch figures to

open contours or holes. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Click Transform One-touch figures button and the system will display Transform One-touch figures
Figure 292: Transform One-touch figures dialog box
343
Drawing Module
2. In Mode section the user will be able to select between By part and By selection options.
3. The user selects whether to convert the one touch figures to Holes or Open contours from the
drop-down list provided in Transform in field. Find briefly explained below the fields provided if
Open contours option is selected:
 R: The distance value of the open contour from the one-touch figure.
 O: The extension value of the open contour from the one-touch figure.
 L: The length of the lead-in of the open contour.
 Compensation mode: It is possible to select the corner shape of the open contour.
 Apply quality: It indicates whether or not the cutting quality is applied to the holes or open
contours. This option allows the user to navigate to the Cutting quality dialog box and
select the required quality.
4. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The One-touch figures will be converted to open
contours or holes as previously set.
Review
Verify Part
Verify Part ( ) button allows verifying a part as follows:
1. Click Verify Part button and then the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the part required to verify using Selection toolbar and click Accept button. The system will
display the following dialog box:
344
Drawing Module
Figure 293: Verify part values
3. Find briefly described below the different fields provided in this dialog box:
 R: Radius of the part. By default, the system displays the current radius of the selected part.
 D: Distance value of the part. By default, the system displays the current distance of the
selected part.
 Cut Contours: It indicates whether the points are in open cut contours or not.
 Mark Contours: It indicates whether the points are in open mark contours or not.
 Non cut contours: It indicates whether the points are in open non cut contours or not.
 Cutter Radius: It indicates whether the length for the small elements is based on cutter
radius or not. If not enabled, Length field is available.
 Length: Length value for the small elements.
4. The user can visualize and change the values and click OK. The part will be verified and the system
will display Verify Part dialog box.
345
Drawing Module
Figure 294: Verify part dialog box
 Number of parts: Number of parts in the Drawing window.
 Number of close contours: Number of contours of the part that are closed.
 Number of open contours: Number of contours of the part that are opened.
 Put points in open contours: It indicates whether any points are marked in open contours.
 Close open contours: It indicates whether or not the open contours are to be closed. This
checkbox is displayed only if Put points in open contours parameter is enabled.
 Tolerance: Tolerance value for closed contours. This field is displayed only if Close open
contours checkbox is selected.
 Modifying the geometric elements is allowed: This option enables modifying geometric
elements in order to match both initial and final points of an open contour. This parameter
will take into account the specified tolerance. Therefore, it will be only useful in open
contours by a very little distance. It is activated when the option Close open contours is
selected.
 Number of small elements: Number of small elements in the part.
 Put points in small elements: It indicates whether or not points are marked on the small
elements.
 Close: This button closes Verify part dialog box.
346
Drawing Module
Detect Part
There are two different options available; Detect part (Manual) and Detect part (Semi-automatic).
The option displayed will be the last one that has been used. By means of the arrow button located
on the right side of Detect part icon, the user will be able to select between the two available
options:
3.6.5.2.1 Detect Part (Manual)

This option allows obtaining a part from another part with the aim of cleaning up the remaining
geometry from the first. This option allows the user defining which elements will compose the newly
detected part since it requires selecting the whole geometry that will form the new part.
The main advantage of this option over the Semi-automatic version is that, given the case the semi-
automatic version does not turn out as expected by the user, it is possible to execute a manual
selection so that only the required elements are considered. In addition, the manual option allows
selecting contours outside the external contour and even more than one external contour.
Whenever selected, the system will display the following data request panel:
Figure 295: Review – Detect part (Manual)
Find briefly detailed below the parameters provided in the previous panel:
 Related options: Displays the options related to the active one such as Save by parts
(Manual), Save by parts (Automatic), Save by parts (Semi-automatic), Detect part (Manual)
and Detect part (Semi-automatic).
347
Drawing Module
 Select options: Provides the selection options to help the user select the required part.
 Save options: This section contains the following parameters:
 Remember part saving data: This parameter will indicate whether the data provided in Part
 Import text properties: When selecting Import text properties option, the user will
visualize a navigation button that gives access to the Text definition to access part data
window. The auxiliary geometry element texts to be treated when saving by parts are
configured in this window. Treated texts can be kept in this window using Delete texts
option. The automatic part detection option must be disabled and the text property import
option should be used. The Selection window can be used to choose the part geometry and
text properties associated to it.
 Skip part verification: If enabled the system will skip the part verification process going
process. This parameter intends to make the part saving process more fluent.
Once all the required parameters have been introduced proceed to select the geometry to save and
click on (validation) button to apply the changes and visualize the part that has been
detected.
3.6.5.2.2 Detect Part (Semi-automatic)

As the previous option, this one allows obtaining a part from another part with the aim of cleaning
up the remaining geometry from the first. The difference with the previous option consists in the
selection mode.
This option selects a unique element of the external contour of the part so that the system detects
the new part. It only detects the geometry contained inside the external contour, except elements
such as points, lines, texts, dimensions and auxiliary geometry (which can be detected by enabling
the corresponding parameters). Whenever selected, the system will display the following data
request panel:
348
Drawing Module
Figure 296: Review – Detect part (Semi-automatic)
Find briefly detailed below the parameters provided in the previous panel:
 Related options: Displays the options related to the active one such as Save by parts
(Manual), Save by parts (Automatic), Save by parts (Semi-automatic), Detect part (Manual)
and Detect part (Semi-automatic).
Save options section provides the following fields:
 Remember part saving data: This parameter will indicate whether the data provided in Part
 Import text properties: When selecting Import text properties option, the user will visualize
a navigation button that gives access to the Text definition to access part data window. The
auxiliary geometry element texts to be treated when saving by parts are configured in this
window. Treated texts can be kept in this window using Delete texts option. The automatic
part detection option must be disabled and the text property import option should be used.
349
Drawing Module
The Selection window can be used to choose the part geometry and text properties
associated to it.
 Skip part verification: If enabled the system will skip the part verification process going
process. This parameter intends to make the part saving process more fluent.
Find described below the fields provided in Management of auxiliary geometry elements section:
 2D Points: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts
that contain them.
 Lines: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts with
intersections.
 Text: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts that
contain them.
 Dimensions / Text: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in
dimensioned parts.
 Auxiliary Geometry: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only
in parts that contain them.
Once all the required parameters have been introduced, proceed to select the part to clean and the
system will display another data request panel that corresponds to the validation (only if Skip part
verification parameter is disabled).
The system will display the following data request panel:
350
Drawing Module
 Verify part section will display the Reference, Dimensions, Number of parts, Number of close
contours, Number of open contours, Number of small elements and Number of small
elements deleted fields, which are not editable.
 Verify: Enable this checkbox in order to display Break the arcs, Open contours, Smooth and
Small elements sections below.
 Management of internal contours: Enable this checkbox in order to display Management of

internal contours section below.
 Scale: Enable this checkbox in order to display Scale section below.
 R: Introduce the radius in millimeters.
 d: Introduce the distance to break the arcs.
 Close open contours: Enable this checkbox in order to close open contours.
 Tolerance: Introduce the required tolerance in millimeters.
351
Drawing Module
 Modifying the geometric elements is allowed: Enable this checkbox so that the system
allows modifying geometric elements.
 Assign technology: Select the geometry required to assign from the options provided in the
drop-down list: < >, Mark, Cut, No Cut, Auxiliary Geometry.
< > option means “Do not assign technology”. Given the case < > option is selected; the system will
display the following parameters:
 Delete: Enable this parameter so that the system erases open contours without exception.
 Except elements with technology: This parameter is directly linked to the previous one and
will only be shown if Delete is enabled. Enable this parameter in order to keep those open
contours where the corresponding technology has been previously assigned.
 Put points in open contours: Select where to put points between No, All, Cut contours, Mark
contours and Non mark contours.
 Smooth: If enabled, the segments of the selected geometry will be smoothened. If selected,
the system will allow introducing the Maximum number of elements, Maximum radius and
Tolerance.
 Maximum length for smaller elements: Proceed to enable Cutter radius checkbox to use it as
maximum length. If not enabled, the user will be able to introduce the Length and Radius.
 Delete small elements and join: If enabled, the system will try to join all the small elements
so that they are visualized more easily.
 Put points in small elements: Proceed to enable this checkbox in order to place points in
small elements.
352
Drawing Module
 Assign technology: By means of this parameter the user can assign technology to the
required internal contours, by selecting one of the options provided in the drop-down list:
Assign technology in internal contours, Assign technology in holes and Assign technology in
both of them.
 Technology: Select the technology to assign to the internal contours previously selected. The
following field will vary depending on the technology selected.
 Mode: Select the scale mode between Dimensions and Scale Factor.
 Apply different factor to X and Y: Enable this checkbox in order to apply a different factor to
X and Y. If enabled Required length and Required width fields will become editable and the
user will be able to introduce the required values. On the other hand, if the parameter is
disabled, the user will only be able to introduce Required length field below.
 Required length: Introduce the required length.
 New dimensions: This field is not editable. It will display the dimensions of the scale by
default or the ones introduced by the user.
Time and Cost
Time and Cost ( ) option allows visualizing all the data related to the Time and Costs involved
in the active job. When this option is selected the system will display Part data window as shown
below.
353
Drawing Module
Figure 297: Part data window
Find briefly described below the different fields provided in the previous window:
 Machine: Select the required machine from the drop-down list or include a new one.
 Material: Select the required material from the drop-down list or include a new one.
 Thickness: Introduce the thickness of the material.
 Sheets: Select the required sheet from the drop-down list or create a new one. If new button
is selected, the system will display Create and modify sheets dialog box. The reference,
material and thickness of the sheet will be automatically generated based on the selected
sub-job. Introduce the required data in the rest of the fields provided and click OK button to
create the sheet.
 Area: Select the required area. The user can select between Rectangle, External, Real,
Rectangle with offset, External with offset and Real with offset options.
 Form factor: Select the required form factor.
 Material area cost: Visualize or edit the cost of material per unit. Select the Navigation
button provided in this field in order to visualize the weight and area of the material.
354
Drawing Module
 Machine time cost: Visualize or edit the cost the machine per unit. Select the Navigation
button provided in this field in order to visualize Start time of cut, Normal cutting time, Rapid
displacements length and Number of cut starts fields between many others.
 Total: It displays the total cost.
 Print: Select this button located at the bottom in order to print all Cost and Time details.
View Geometry
View Geometry ( ) option visualizes the different measurements of the geometry. In order to
visualize them perform the following steps:
1. Select View Geometry option located in Review menu and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the geometry to visualize by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. The system will display View Geometry window as shown below:
Figure 298: View geometry dialog box
4. Here the user can visualize the specific characteristics and measurements of each element that
compose the geometry and the total perimeter of the selected geometry. After the selected list of
elements, it shows the specific Number of segments, circles, arcs, lines and points.
5. Select Modify button in order to modify the desired geometric elements. Select the required
element from the list and click Modify button, so that the system displays Modify geometry
window, which contains all the values stored for the selected element.
355
Drawing Module
6. Click Delete button to delete the required elements from the list. Select the required element from
the list of geometric elements and click Delete. The system will display a Warning window as shown
below, where the user will have to select Yes in order to erase it and No to cancel the operation.
Figure 299: Deletion warning message
7. Click Print button to print the measurements and click Close button in order to close View
Geometry dialog box.
Distances and Angle
Distance and Angle ( ) button allows visualizing the distance and angle measurements between
two selected points as follows:
1. Click Distance and Angle button and mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired point and mark the second point. The system will display Distance
and Angle panel on the right as shown below:
Figure 300: Distance and angle panel
356
Drawing Module
 D: Distance between the two marked points.
 X: Horizontal distance between the two marked points.
 Y: Vertical distance between the two marked points.
 W: Angle at which the second point is marked with respect to the X.
4. Click OK in order to close the dialog box.
Angle between Three Points
Angle between three points ( ) button allows the user to view the angles of three points as
follows:
1. Click Angle between three points button and then mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired points and mark the second and third points. The system will
display Angle between three points dialog box as shown below:
Figure 301: Angle between three points dialog box
3. It is possible to view the interior angle of the three points in ‘a1’ field and the exterior angle of the
three points in ‘a2’ field.
4. Click Cancel button in order to close Angle between three points dialog box.
Orthogonal
Select Orthogonal ( ) button in order to draw vertical and horizontal geometries by means of
Dragging toolbar. This application will be active until the user clicks again on it to disable it.
357
Drawing Module
Press F2 key on the keyboard in order to enable and disable this application.
Macros
Macros ( ) option enables the creation, deletion and execution of application macros. A macro is
an option that enables the sequential execution of several options of the system. This option is
available in Drawing and Nesting and Machining modules. The created macros will only be useful for
the module in which they have been created. Macros option contains a drop-down list that displays
the existing macros of the system plus the following two options:
 Macro creation: Click Record a macro and all the options clicked afterwards will form part of
the macro. The order will be defined during the options selection. To stop recording click
Stop recording or press Escape.
 Macro edition: Click Macro and the system will display a window that shows the existing list
of macros with the options corresponding to each. A macro can be created, deleted or
executed from this window.
 Macro execution: In order to execute a Macro, click on Macro drop-down list and select
Macro or execute from edition window. It is possible to add buttons to the options ribbon or
quick access bars. When executing a macro:
 By pressing ESC, the option in execution will stop and the next will be executed.
 By executing another option macro execution will stop.
 By pressing Return when the macro finishes, it will be executed again.
358
Drawing Module
Technology
Technology menu allows making use of the different technologies available to cut parts, which
include the following:
Lead-in/Lead-outs
Lead-in / Lead-outs menu encompasses all the options related to the Lead-ins and Lead-outs and their
configuration.
Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) option in order to introduce the lead-in/out in the parts automatically.
Delete
Select Delete ( ) option in order to erase the required lead-in/outs of a part. In order to do it
1. Click Delete and the system will display Selection tool bar.
2. Select the lead-in/lead-out that has to be deleted using the Selection toolbar and then click Accept
button. The selected lead-in/lead-out will be deleted.
Semi-Automatic
Select Semi-Automatic ( ) option in order to introduce the Lead-in/outs semi-automatically. In this

case, it is only necessary to select the base contour in which the lead-in/out has to be introduced.
Configure Automatic
Configure automatic ( ) option configures the parameters for automatic lead-ins and lead-outs.
If selected, the system will display Automatic lead-in/lead-out values window as shown below:
359
Drawing Module
Figure 302: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values window
Here the user will be able to modify the provided parameters as per his requirements and set them
by means of OK button located at the bottom of the window.
Lead-in/Lead outs
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 1 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in/Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 2 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 3 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 4 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 5 ( ): Inclined Lead-in/Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 6 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
360
Drawing Module
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 7 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 8 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 9 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 11 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end path.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 12 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end parallel path.
The previously listed are different types of lead-in/lead-outs that can be introduced manually.
The following two types of lead-in/lead-outs (10 and 13) can only be introduced at the corner of a
closed geometry with sides.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 10 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on outer corner.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 13 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on inner corner.
The following lead-in/lead-out is just for circles:
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 14 ( ): Special Lead-in/Lead-outs for circular holes.
 Dynamic Lead-in/Lead-outs ( ): Lead-in/Lead-outs by rubber band.
 Put the Lead-in/Lead-outs in bisector ( ): It puts the Lead-in/Lead-outs in a bisector or

intersection point.
 Move point of lead-in or lead-out ( ): It allows moving the point of a Lead-in or Lead-out.
 Put the lead-out like the lead-in ( ): It puts the Lead-out in the direction of the Lead-in.
 Modify tangent arc lead-in by 2 segments ( ): It modifies the tangent arc Lead-in by two
segments.
 Add element ( ): It adds an element to the Lead-in or Lead-out as follows:
361
Drawing Module
1. Click Add element button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out by means of the options provided, click Accept button and the
system will display Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box as shown below:
Figure 303: Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box
3. Find briefly described the fields provided:
 Lead-in: Indicates whether the element is added to a lead-in or not.
 Lead-out: Indicates whether the element is added to a lead-out or not.
When any of the options above is selected the system will display Direction sections, Always like
segment parameter and Length field.
 Lead-in auxiliary element: Select this to add the element in the lead-in direction.
 Lead-out auxiliary element: Select this to add the element in the lead-out direction.
 Longer element: Select this to add the element in the direction of the longer side where the
lead-in/lead-out is introduced.
 Always like segment: It indicates whether the additional element is added like a segment or
not.
 Length: Length value of the additional element.
362
Drawing Module
4. Select and introduce the required values in the given fields and click OK button in order to save
them. The additional element will be added to the lead-in/lead-out as set by the user.
Micro-Joints
Micro-joints section allows the user to introduce different types of micro-joints in the parts. When
pointed, the system will list the different micro-joints that can be introduced between many other
options.
Delete
Select Delete ( ) option in order to erase the required micro-joints as follows:
1. Click Delete option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the micro-joint required to delete by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and
click Accept button located in the same menu.
3. The micro-joint will be deleted.
Micro-joints
 Micro-Joints 1: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on a corner of a closed geometry.
 Micro-Joints 2: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint on a corner of a closed geometry.
 Micro-Joints 3: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint to the geometry of a part.
 Micro-Joints 4: It introduces an inclined micro-joint to the geometry of a part.
 Micro-Joints 5: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the right side.
 Micro-Joints 6: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the left side.
Move Point of Lead-in or Lead-out

This option allows moving the point of lead-in or lead-out of a micro joint.
Transform to Geometry
This option converts the selected micro-joints to geometry by means of the selection toolbar.
363
Drawing Module
Configure
This option configures the parameters of the micro-joints. The system will display Micro-joints Values
dialog box:
Figure 304: Micro-joints values dialog box
Introduce the required values in the fields provided and click OK button to save the changes.
Loops
Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) option in order to introduce the loops automatically to all the corners of a
closed geometry. The introduced automatic loop may be a normal or curved loop, based on the
configuration previously set in Loop values.
Delete
Delete ( ) option erases the loops selected by means of Selection toolbar. Once the required loop
is selected click Accept button located in the same toolbar and the system will delete it.
Loop1
In order to introduce a Loop1 ( ) perform the following steps:
1. Select Loop1 option located in Loops menu.

2. Select the required corner of a closed geometry.
3. The system will insert a normal loop in the selected point of the geometry.
364
Drawing Module
Loop2
In order to introduce a Loop2 ( ) perform the following steps:
1. Select Loop2 option located in Loops menu.

2. Select the required corner of a closed geometry.
3. The system will insert a curved loop in the selected point of the geometry.
Round Angles
Round angles ( ) option introduces round angles at the vertices of the geometry. The radii of
round angles can be set in Loop values dialog box.
Configuration
Configuration ( ) option enables modifying the different parameters of all loops. The system will
display Loop values dialog box as shown below:
Figure 305: Loop values dialog box
365
Drawing Module
In order to configure the loop values, specify the following parameters:
1. Introduce the maximum angle of the loop in Maximum angle (W) field.
2. In (0-W) Loops section select Loop values check box to set a fixed radius for the loop and enter the
radius value in R field. The user can select the required type of automatic loops to introduce by
means of 1 and 2 checkboxes.
3. Select the required option from the drop-down list provided in Automatic loops field, where the
user will be able to select between In bevels or in round angles, Only in bevel elements and Only in
round angles.
4. Located in Round angles section select Radii button in order to set the radius of the round angles
and manage them by qualities if required.
5. Introduce the limit angle in Limit Angle (Z) field.
6. In W-Z section, select the required position of the radius for W-Z range and then click Radii button
in order to set the radius for W-Z range of the loops.
7. Select Do loops in the whole part in automatic checkbox in order to introduce loops to the entire
part when automatic loop is selected.
8. Select Round angles in the whole part in automatic checkbox in order to introduce round angles to
the entire part when automatic loop is selected.
9. Click OK button and the parameters will be saved as configured.
Standard Bevel
Standard Bevel section includes the following:
Delete
This option deletes bevels as follows:
1. Click Delete ( ) button located in Standard Bevel menu and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select an element of the part by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click
Accept button.
3. The selected bevel will be deleted.
Bevel
This option bevels an element as follows:
366
Drawing Module
1. Click Bevel ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select an element of the part by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click
Accept button. The system will display Bevel values dialog box as shown below:
Figure 306: Bevel values dialog box
3. Select the required type of bevel and click OK button.

4. The selected element will be beveled as configured.
Bevel on Contour
This option bevels a selected contour as follows:
1. Click Bevel on contour ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required contour by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click Accept
button. The system will display Bevel values dialog box as shown below:
367
Drawing Module
Figure 307: Bevel values dialog box 2
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save the changes. The selected
contour will be beveled.
Configure
Select this option in order to configure various parameters for bevels as follows:
1. Click Configuration ( ) button and the system will display Bevel values dialog box.
2. Introduce the required angle values in Initial and Final angle fields and introduce the depth values in
Initial and Final depth fields for both Upper and Lower Bevels.
3. Click OK button and the parameters will be set accordingly.
3D Bevel
In this new section, the user will be provided with options to create beveled parts by defining the
upper and lower faces that will eventually come to form the part. In addition, the user can also
define which connections between the faces must be respected by the machining. Find detailed
below the options available:
368
Drawing Module
Lower Face
In order to define the Lower face ( ), the user must have the geometry of both faces already
drawn. By means of this option, the user will have to select all the closed contours that define the
lower face of the part. Connections must not be drawn and can be later defined.
Connections
By means of Connections ( ) option, the user can define the connections between the contours
in the upper and lower faces, as much as the definition requires. It will be necessary to select pairs of
points that must connect a contour of the upper face with a contour of the lower face. With each
connection, the 3D view will become updated and show the current definition. The system will
interpret all contours without connection as cutting without bevel.
Delete Lower Face and Connections
Delete ( ) option allows erasing connections and the definition of the lower face.
Cut Technology
Cut Technology section allows the user to introduce different technologies to cut a part. When
pointed, the system will display different types of cut technologies that can be assigned, which are
listed below:
Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) button in order to assign technology automatically based on the previously
set configuration in the Tables of Technology.
Automatic Technology will only be applied if it is configured in the machine.
Delete
This option deletes an assigned cut technology as follows:
1. Click Delete ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
369
Drawing Module
2. Select the assigned Cut technology required to delete by means of the options provided and click
Accept button provided in the same toolbar.
3. The cut technology assigned to the selected element will be erased.
If the user does not want the marked text to be treated as a unity, it will be necessary to
activate the option Delete cut technology having previously selected the marked text.
Marking
This option assigns marking technology to a part as follows:
1. Select Marking ( ) option and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 308: Marking technology
2. Click on the drop-down list provided in Technology field, select between Powder, Drill, Pen or Cut
and click OK button.
3. The system will display Selection toolbar. Select the geometry where the selected technology is
required by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
4. The selected marking technology will be assigned to the selected element.
No Cut
In order to assign No Cut technology to a required geometry, perform the following steps:
1. Click No Cut ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the extension to which the user wants to apply No cut by means of the options provided and
click OK button in order to apply it.
Dynamic
This option assigns a cut technology of a specified quality between two points of a contour based on
the cutting direction as follows:
1. Select Dynamic ( ) button and the system will display the following dialog box:
370
Drawing Module
Figure 309: Dynamic technology
2. Select the required Cutting Technology and Cutting quality and click OK button.
3. Mark the Initial and End points of a contour. The selected cutting technology and quality will be
assigned to the selected extension.
Cutting
This option assigns cutting technology of a specified quality to a part as follows:
1. Select Cutting button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 310: Cutting Qualities
371
Drawing Module
2. Select the required type of Cutting quality.

3. By selecting Modify button the system will display Tables of technology dialog box. Here the user
will be able to include, modify or delete the material, thickness and other details. Click OK button in
order to save the changes.
4. The system will display Selection toolbar. By means of the options provided select the extension to
which the user wants to apply the selected technology.
5. Select Accept button located in the same toolbar and the cutting technology of the specified
quality will be assigned to the selected geometry extension.
Microjoint
This option assigns Microjoints as follows:
1. Select Microjoint ( ) button and select where the user wants to assign the Microjoint.
2. Select the position of the micro-joint and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 311: Microjoint value dialog box
3. Introduce the required value and click OK button in order to assign the Microjoint to the selected
point.
Auxiliary Geometry
Auxiliary Geometry ( ) option allows the user to create, modify and delete the non-cut lines. It is
also possible to customize the non-cut lines by specifying their color, style and thickness and
configuring their line properties, as well as their visualization in Draw and Nest view.
In order to enable this option in the Drawing module, it is necessary to create it first from Auxiliary
geometry definition window, which is displayed from Configuration options/Configure: Draw and
Nest/ Auxiliar section. Here the user will be able to specify the name and properties of the line (color
style and thickness).
Text
Text section allows assigning Marked text, Written text and Vectorized text.
372
Drawing Module
Marked Text
In order to assign marked text to a geometry perform the following steps:
1. Select Marked text ( ) option and the system will display Text definition dialog box
as shown below:
Figure 312: Text definition dialog box
2. Define the Text, Size, Technology, Thickness and Fonts directory and click OK button in order to
save the changes made.
3. Mark the insertion point and the text will be inserted. The system will display the available
Dragging options in order to move the text and position it correctly if required.
Symmetry will not be applied to the geometry of marked texts, that is, the text will be marked
correctly when the part is placed symmetrically on the sheet.
Written Text
In order to introduce a text in a part perform the following steps:
373
Drawing Module
1. Select Written Text ( ) button and the system will display Text definition dialog box
as shown below:
Figure 313: Text definition dialog box 2
2. Select the required Font, introduce the required Text and the Orientation and finally click OK
button.
3. Mark the insertion point and the text will be inserted. The system will display the Dragging options
to move the text if required.
Vectorize Text
In order to convert the selected texts to geometry perform the following steps:
1. Select Vectorize text ( ) option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required text to vectorize by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. The system will display Vectorize text dialog box as shown below:
Figure 314: Vectorize text dialog box
4. Introduce the Number of tracts for the Beizer curves required and click OK button.
5. The selected text will be converted to geometry.
374
Drawing Module
Machining
The Machining menu includes the following:
Machining
Automatic
By means of Automatic ( ) option the part will be automatically machined.
Delete Instructions
In order to erase the desired machining instructions, perform the following steps:
1. Select Delete Instructions ( ) button located in Machining menu and the system will display the
Figure 315: Delete instructions options
2. Select between the following options:
 Current instruction
 Machining by selection
 Machining by selection of geometry
 From-to
 All machining
 Configuration
375
Drawing Module
3. Depending on the option selected, select the contours, machining or instructions to delete and click
OK button in order to erase them.
Rapids
A rapid movement is the displacement of the head without cutting. This option inserts a rapid
movement from the current machining coordinates to the desired point. In order to insert a rapid
movement, perform the following steps:
1. Select Rapid ( ) button and the system will initialize the rapid movement.
2. Select the Destination point and the rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point and
destination point. The user can select as many points as required to insert rapid movements.
3. Press ESC key on the keyboard in order to exit this option.
GoTo
This option allows cutting between the desired points. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Click Goto ( ) button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point and the extension between the initial point and destination point will
be machined. The user can select as many points as required to continue the cut operation.
Contours
Figure 316: Contours options
376
Drawing Module
Manual Contours
In order to cut the selected elements of the contour perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and the system will display the options available.
2. Select Manual Contours option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
3. Select the first element of the contour by means of the options provided.
4. Select the remaining elements of the contour if required.
5. Click Accept button located in the same menu and the selected elements of the contour will be
machined.
Automatic Contours
In order to cut the contours automatically, perform the following steps:
2. Select Automatic contours option.
3. Select the required contour to machine.
4. The system will automatically machine the contour.
Parts
In order to machine the entire part, perform the following steps:
2. Select Parts option.
3. Select the part required to machine and the system will machine the whole part automatically.
All Drill Cycles

Select All Drill Cycles option located in Contour menu in order to drill all the points on the contour.
All Marks
Select All Marks option located in Contour menu in order to machine the contours with mark
technology.
All Cut
Select All Cut option located in Contour menu in order to cut all the contours.
377
Drawing Module
All Contours of One Quality

This option will machine all the contours of a specified cutting quality. For example, if the user
executes this semiautomatic option selecting cutting quality 2, the system will make the machining
of these contours. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
2. Select All Contours of one Quality option and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 317: Cutting qualities
3. Select the required cutting quality and the system will machine all the contours of the selected
cutting quality.
Automatic Cycles
If selected, the system will display Automatic Cycles dialog box with the following parameters:
Figure 318: Automatic cycles dialog box
378
Drawing Module
 Type: The user will be able to choose between Simple Drill cycle, Drill cycle with breaking of
shaving, Deep drilling cycle, Tap cycle, Ream cycle, C. Sink cycle, Special cycle of cut, Special
punching cycle and Simple milling cycle.
 Only the circles with no cut technology: If this parameter is selected, only the circles with no
cut technology will be drilled.
 Delete the circles with cycles: By using this option, the user can decide to leave geometry on
the drawing after machining or not.
 Minimum & Maximum radius: The user will be able to define the maximum and minimum
radius.
 Test if the tool exists: If this option is enabled, the system will look for a determined tool.
For example, if we find a drill of the same size as the circle’s tool, the system will make the
drilling; if not, the system will cut it.
 Use the tool data: If enabled, the system will use the properties of the tool.
Flying Cut in Holes
Flying cut in holes option allows making the flying cut in selected contours.
When selecting this option, the window of flying cut configuration will be displayed. The values
displayed by default are the ones configured in the system and can be updated when necessary.
These new values will not be saved in the system and they will have effect only during the
execution of the option.
379
Drawing Module
Figure 319: Fast cut mode in holes (flying cut) window
Once the configuration values of flying cut mode have been edited, it is possible to select the
contours where they should be applied. And finally, it is also possible to select new contours to
make a multiple flying cut.
Figure 320: Flying cut in holes example
380
Drawing Module
Once the flying cut mode has been applied, the part can be machined manually or automatically.
If the part contains manual flying cut machining, when applying automatic machining to the
other contours being activated the option of flying cut in automatic mode, this will not be applied
(respecting that way the flying cut manually made).
Whenever the machining instructions of a part are deleted in Drawing Module, all those instructions
that correspond to fast cut will also be deleted and the original geometry will be restored with the
existing technology prior to the machining.
Manual Hole Destruction
Manual Hole Destruction option allows manual hole destruction.
When selecting this option, the user can start drawing the cutting lines for the holes destruction.
Selecting two points of the same internal contour (hole) a cutting line will be created. In addition, if it
moves to another contour, a rapid movement will be created.
Figure 321: Manual hole destruction example 1
381
Drawing Module
If the part (or the contour in which the user makes the cuts) is already machined, the cutting
instructions for the hole will be inserted just before the first instruction of contour machining.
Figure 322: Manual hole destruction example 2
It is possible to define a distance upon which the destruction of holes will be applied. In order to do
it, the user will have to select the option and define the required value. Find below the result:
382
Drawing Module
Figure 323: Offset for manual destruction of holes
Cycles
Cycles menu contains the following options:
Simple Cycle
This option allows machining with a center punch the machining points by inserting rapid
movements between the selected points. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Select Simple Cycle ( ) button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point. A rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point and the
selected point. The user will be able to insert as many points as required by selecting more points.
Linear Cycle
Linear cycle ( ) option allows the user to machine the part by inserting punching machining
points in a sequence. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 324: Linear cycle options
383
Drawing Module
 Beginning point and distance: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting the
punching machining points in a sequence at a specified angle and distance as follows:
1. Select Beginning point and distance button and then mark the first punching machining point.
2. The system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 325: Beginning point and distance
Find briefly described below the fields provided in the previous dialog box:
 n: The number of punching machining points.
 a: The angle at which the punching machining points are to be placed.
 d: The distance between the punching machining points.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The machining will be carried out by inserting
punching machining points at the specified angle and distance.
 Ends and number of points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting
punching machining points in a sequence between specified initial and end points as follows:
1. Select Ends and number of points option and select the initial and end points.
Figure 326: Ends and number of points
3. Introduce the number of punching machining points required in n field.
384
Drawing Module
4. Click OK and the part will be machined inserting the specified number of punching machining
points between initial and end points.
 Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting
three punching machining points in a sequence as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the first machining point.
2. Mark the second and destination points and the part will be machined along the selected
machining points.
Circular Cycle
Circular cycle ( ) option allows you to machine a part by inserting a circular punching machining
sequence. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 327: Circular cycle options
 Centre and angles: Select this option in order to machine by inserting a circular sequence of
punching machining points at a specified angle as follows:
1. Select Centre and angles option and mark the center point.
Figure 328: Centre and angles
 r: Distance value from the center point.
385
Drawing Module
 n: Number of machining points.
 a: Angle value between the machining points.
 ai: Initial angle value of the first machining point in the circular sequence.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined by inserting a circular
sequence of punching machining points.
 Centre and beginning point: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a
circular sequence of punching machining points form a specified initial point as follows:
1. Select Centre and beginning point and mark the center and initial points.
Figure 329: Centre and beginning point
3. Introduce the required values in “n” (number of punching machining points) and “a” (angle
between machining points) fields and click OK button.
4. The part will be machined by inserting a circular sequence of the machining points with an initial
point and at a specified angle.
 Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting the
initial and end punching machining points as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the Initial point.
2. Mark the second and end points.
3. The part will be machined from the initial point to the end point.
 Arc: Select this option in order to machine an arc by inserting a specified number of punching
machining points as follows:
1. Select Arc button and select the arc required to machine.
386
Drawing Module
Figure 330: Arc dialog box
3. Introduce the number of machining points required in “n” field and click OK button.
4. The arc will be machined with the specified number of machining points.
Grid Cycle
Grid cycle ( ) option allows machining a part by inserting punching machining points in two
different directions if the form of a grid.
Figure 331: Grid cycle options
 Corner and number: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid at a
specified angle and distance as follows:
1. Click Corner and number button and then mark the initial point from where the user wants to
machine the part.
Figure 332: Corner and number
387
Drawing Module
 n1: Number of machining points in the first direction.
 n2: Number of machining points in the second direction.
 a: Angle value in which the machining is done.
 d1: Distance value between the consecutive machining points in the first direction.
 d2: The distance value between the consecutive machining points in the second direction.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined in the form of a grid.
 Corner and distances: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid with
five points at a specified distance as follows:
1. Select Corner and distances option and select or mark an origin point.
2. Select or mark initial and end points in X axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an exact
multiple of the initial point in X axis.
3. Select or mark initial and end points in Y axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an exact
multiple of the initial point in Y axis.
4. The part will be machined with the five points at the specified distances.
Milling Nibbling
Milling nibbling ( ) option allows a nibbling in any type of contour with a milling tool and by using
one only instruction. It is possible to select a contour and configure a machining instruction. The
system will nibble the whole contour using this configuration:
Figure 333: Milling nibbling’s example
The whole process for making this operation is shown below:
1. Select the option Contour among the available options for nibbling:
388
Drawing Module
Figure 334: Contour option
2. A configuration window will be displayed then. In this window the user should define all the
properties of the new instruction: milling tool, depth level, etc.
Figure 335: Milling cycle window
3. Once the configuration has been validated, now the user should select an element of the
contour. This element will be later used as the base element in the selection of the
relative position of the nibbling cycle.
389
Drawing Module
Figure 336: Milling nibbling’s example 2
4. Select the rest of elements to nibbling in the contour.
The user can select as much elements as desired but the system will only nibble those which are
part of a contour next to the first selected element (either open or closed).
Figure 337: Milling nibbling’s example 3
5. Finally, establish the relative position (with respect to the base element that was selected
in the first step) of the milling nibbling.
390
Drawing Module
The final result is a new machining instruction that allows to nibble any type of contour and an
easier management in case of, for example, its properties has to be modified from the
machining tree.
Figure 338: Machining explorer (Milling nibbling)
Irregular Cycle
Irregular cycle ( ) option allows machining a part by inserting a cycle on a lead-in/lead-out or on

the points of different selected elements. When selected the system will display the following
options:
Figure 339: Irregular cycle options
 Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle
on the existing lead-in or lead-out as follows:
1. Select Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
391
Drawing Module
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out by means of the options provided and click Accept button
located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created in the selected lead-in/lead-out.
 Cycles on points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle on selected
points of existing elements as follows:
1. Select Cycles on points option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required points of the existing elements by means of the options provided and click
Accept button located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created within the selected points.
 Cycles on machining: When we execute machining with a bevel machine, many parts
generate new necessary lead-ins to cut them. This option introduces cycles in automatic on
all lead-ins (also the ones of machining). If any of the generated cycles is not useful, the user
can proceed to delete it from the machining.
“There are special cycles” parameter must me enabled in the general cutting parameters of the
machine configuration. This option is also available whenever the user executes machining on a sheet.
Milling Pockets
Milling pockets ( ) option allows pocketing any type of irregular geometry using a milling tool.
With this option, the user can pocket any type of geometry using a milling tool.
Figure 340: Milling pockets example
392
Drawing Module
In order to do so, the user should perform the following steps:
1. Select the Irregular Geometry option available in the pocket options.

2. The system displays the configuration window where all the pocket parameters should be defined,
both the general parameters and the parameters corresponding to the phases of roughing and
finishing.
Figure 341: Milling cycle window
3. Now select the geometry to be pocketed. The user should only select one element of the geometry
and the system will try to locate a closed contour from this element.
Besides being a closed contour, this contour cannot have any internal hole.
Once this process has been finished, the final result is a machining instruction that allows to pocket
irregular geometries independently of the shape of the contour, as shown on the image below:
393
Drawing Module
Figure 342: Machining explorer (Milling pockets)
Modify
Modify ( ) option allows the user to modify all the machining aspects. This option will only be
available when the parts have already been machined. When selected, the system will display the
following list providing the options available:
Figure 343: Modify options
394
Drawing Module
Automatic Micro-Joints at End of Contour

By means of this option, the user can place automatic micro-joints at the end of contours, which
have been already machined, as follows:
1. Point Modify button, select Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour option and the system will
display Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour dialog box as shown below:
Figure 344: Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour dialog box
2. Select By quality checkbox in order to base the micro-joint on the cutting quality.
3. If By quality checkbox is not selected, the system will display Width value of micro-joint field where
the user will have to introduce the required width value.
4. In Apply in contours section, select the required size of Inside and Outside contours to introduce
the micro-joints.
5. Introduce the Maximum length and Maximum width of Small contours.
6. Introduce the Maximum length and Maximum width of Big contours.
7. Click OK button and the micro-joints will be automatically introduced in the machined part.
Order Machining
This option allows modifying the order in which the contours of the part have been machined as
follows:
395
Drawing Module
1. Point Modify button, select Order Machining option and, when choosing the Order cut sequence
option, the system will display Order Cut Sequence dialog box as shown below:
Figure 345: Order cut sequence dialog box
2. Select Show the direction of movements parameter in order to indicate the direction when
modifying the machining order.
3. In Order mode field, select between Before and After.
 Before: It indicates whether the machining order is modified from last to first or not. The
first selected contour will be the last to be machined.
 After: It indicates whether the machining order is modified from first to last or not.
4. After selecting the required values click OK button.

5. Select the base contour and the next contour whose machining order has to be changed. Continue
to select the contours whose order has to be changed.
6. Press ESC key located on the keyboard in order to stop the selection and the machining order will
be changed.
Regenerate by Selection
This option allows selecting a group of instructions using a selection toolbar to create a structure as
follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Regenerate by Selection option and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select the required contour by means of the options provided and the system will display
Regenerate dialog box as shown below:
396
Drawing Module
Figure 346: Regenerate dialog box
3. The user can activate the following parameters which are briefly described below:
 Simple punching operations => Linear patterns: It restores single punching in linear patterns.
 Linear patterns => Linear nibble cycles: It restores linear patterns in nibbling if the punching of
the pattern are lapped.
 Linear patterns => Grid patterns: It restores linear patterns in grid patterns if the punching’s of
the patterns are not lapped.
 Pattern of only two points => Simple punching operations: It exploits patterns of two points as
they are more easily created as simple punching processes.
4. Click OK button in order to save the changes and regenerate the selected extensions.
Modify Lead-In/Outs
By means of this option the user can set the Lead-in/outs as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Modify Lead-in/outs option and the system will display Modify Lead
In/Outs dialog box which is divided in two different tabs: General and Apply a GAP.
397
Drawing Module
APPLY A GAP
 Apply a gap in lead in/outs: With this option the user can apply a GAP (Micro-joints at the end
of the contour) in all the contours of the part. The system will leave a GAP before ending
each contour.
There are two restrictions:
 The type of lead in-out:
 Lead in = Segment – Lead out = Segment
 Lead in = Segment – Lead out = Arc
 Lead in = Arc – Lead out = Segment
 Lead in = Arc – Lead out = Arc
 The angle between the lead in and the contour.
The GAP value can be fix, a percentage of the sheet thickness or an automatic value depending on
the cutter radius (with this option the system allows the user to add an offset in the GAP).
This option is available for cutting and combined machines and it is available in CAD module and
Nesting module.
 Maximum angle to apply the GAP: Introduce the maximum angle to apply the gap.
 Value (d1):
 Fixed: It is possible to select the required type of gap value in the Value (d1) section. If you
want the gap to be based on a fixed value, then select Fixed value. You can enter the
required fixed value in Value field.
 Percentage of sheet thickness: If the user wants the gap to be based on the sheet
thicknesses then select Percentage of sheet thickness. The Modify leads in/outs dialog box
allows the user to enter a percentage of sheet thickness in Value field.
398
Drawing Module
 Automatic depending on cutter radius: If the user wants the gap value to be calculated
automatically based on the radius value then select Automatic depending on cutter radius,
then Modify leads in/outs dialog box allows the user to set the offset distance.
 Offset (d2):
 No: Select No if the offset is not required
 Fixed: Select Fixed to set a fixed offset distance
 Percentage of cutter radius: Select Percentage of cutter radius to set the offset based on
cutter radius percentage
 Percentage of sheet thickness: Select Percentage of sheet thickness to set the offset based
on sheet thickness percentage.
 Offset: It is possible to enter the fixed value or percentage of cutter radius or percentage of
sheet thickness in the Offset field.
Avoid Any Holes Already Cut

This option helps the user avoid the collision of the head with the holes that have already been cut as
follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Avoid any holes already cut option and the system will display Avoid
any holes already cut dialog box as shown below:
Figure 347: Avoid holes already cut dialog box
399
Drawing Module
Find the fields and parameters provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 Maximum hollow: It indicates whether the head is allowed to enter the hole or not. In this
case, the user can enter the maximum distance value the head can pass inside the hole.
 Offset: It indicates whether an offset distance value is set between the head and hole or not.
In this case, the user can enter the maximum distance value between the head movement
and the hole.
 Maximum length with head down: Introduce the maximum length value when the head is
down (mm).
 Maximum number of rapid tracts: Introduce the number of rapid tracts inserted to avoid
collision of head and holes.
 Modify Lead in/Outs: The user can modify the lead-in/lead-out by selecting the required
option from the drop-down list:
 No: Select this not to modify the lead-in/lead-out.
 By parts: Select this to modify the lead-in/lead-out and positioned in the rapid movements
to avoid the already cut holes.
 By contours: Select this to modify the lead-in/lead-out and positioned based on the
contours to avoid already cut holes on the rapid movements.
 Only in interiors: The system will only modify those lead-in/lead-outs placed in interiors.
When selecting By part or By contours, then the system displays ‘Retain lead-in/outs defined in
parts’ field.
 Retain lead-in/outs defined in parts: Select this to retain the lead-in/lead-out that is defined in
a part.
 Apply head up at end of each contour: It indicates whether the head is positioned upwards
at the end of the machined part or not.
400
Drawing Module
 Head up for common cut elements: It indicates whether the head is positioned upwards for
all common cut elements or not.
2. Select and introduce the required values and then click OK. The already cut holes will be avoided
based on the above set parameters.
Modify Head Management of Rapids

This option allows introducing head up/head down instructions in rapid movements of the machining
as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Modify Head Management of Rapids option.
2. Select the machining to transform the head up/head down instructions and the head up/head down
will be introduced.
Continuous Cut Semiautomatically

This option allows converting the rapid movements in continuous cuts as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Continuous Cut Semiautomatically option.

2. Select the machining of the part that has to be converted to cutting and the system will display
Continuous cut dialog box as shown below:
Figure 348: Continuous cut dialog box
3. Select Delete cycles on lead-ins parameter, if cutting the cycles on lead-ins are required to be
erased.
4. Click OK button and the rapid movements will be converted to cutting. The user can select as many
rapid movements as required.
Transform Machining
This option allows moving the machined part as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Transform machining option and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
401
Drawing Module
2. Select the required machined part to move by means of the options provided and click Accept
button located in the same toolbar.
3. Mark a Reference point and the system will display Dragging options in order to move it as per your
requirements.
4. Move the cursor until the required point and mark an Insertion point. The machining will be
successfully moved to the selected point.
Copy Machining
This option allows copying the machining of a part as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Copy machining option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required machining of a part that has to be copied by means of the options provided and
click Accept button located in the same toolbar.
3. The system will display the following dialog box, which displays the different copy types available:
Figure 349: Copy machining options
4. Select the required Copy type.

5. Mark a reference point and the system will display Dragging options in order to move the selected
machining.
6. Move the cursor till the required point and mark an Insertion point. The machining will be copied in
the selected point.
Modify Movements
This option allows modifying the movements of the machining as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Modify movements option.

2. Select the machining whose movements are required to be changed.
3. Move the cursor till the required point and mark it.
402
Drawing Module
4. The movement of the machining will be modified. The user can continue to select as many
machining movements as required to modify.
Modify Compensation of a Contour

This option allows modifying the existing compensation parameters of a contour as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Modify compensation of a contour option.

2. Select a Base element for which the contours compensation parameters have to be modified and
the system will display Modify compensation dialog box as shown below:
Figure 350: Modify compensation dialog box
Find briefly described below the different fields provided in the previous dialog box:
 Only the selected contour: It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the contour
are only applied to the selected contour or not.
 All the part holes: It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the contour are only
applied to the holes in the part or not.
 All the part outsides: It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the contour are
only applied to the outsides of the part or not.
403
Drawing Module
 All the contours (Insides and outsides): It indicates whether the changes in compensation of
the contour are only applied to all the contours, comprising both insides and outsides, of the
part or not.
 System compensation: It indicates the compensation side in System compensation.
 CN compensation: It indicates the compensation side in CN compensation.
In CN compensation, if the second or third option is selected, the system will display “Corrector
number” field.
 Corrector number: Compensation index value.
3. Select and introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save the changes. The
system will modify the contour compensation.
Options
Optimize
Optimize ( ) option allows making the CNC code simpler and shorter by deleting the repeated
instructions as follows:
1. Click Optimize button and the system will display Optimize corrector changes ( ) option.
2. Select Optimize corrector changes option and click OK. The machining instructions will be
automatically optimized by the system.
Speed Rates
Speed rates ( ) option allows setting the different speed rates for the machine. When selected the
system will display Feed rates dialog box as shown below:
404
Drawing Module
Figure 351: Feed rates dialog box
Here the user will be able to modify and set the different speed rates of the machine as required.
Wheel-tool speed parameter will only be activated if the configuration is for punching machines.
Postprocessor Words
Postprocessor words ( ) option allows introducing postprocessor instructions in the machining

program. The postprocessor words are special instructions. When selected the system will display
Postprocessor words dialog box as shown below:
Find the different special instructions provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
405
Drawing Module
 OPSTOP: Select this to introduce a Conditional stop instruction in the machining program.
When selecting this, the system displays ‘OP_stop’ word near to the machined part and is
also included in the Instruction list.
 STOP: Select this to introduce an Unconditional stop instruction in the machining program.
When selecting this, the system displays Stop word near to the machined part and is also
included in the Instruction list.
 AUXFUN: Select this to introduce an Auxiliary instruction in the machining program as

follows:
1. Select AUXFUN Auxiliary function and then click OK. The system will display the AUXFUN, Auxiliary
function dialog box.
2. Select Assign value manually checkbox in order to assign a numeric value to the auxiliary function.
When selecting this, Value field will be enabled.
3. Enter the numeric value in Value field and then click OK. The assigned number will be displayed
along with the letter M near to the machined part and will also be included in the Instruction list.
 PREFUN: Select this to introduce a Preparatory instruction in the machining program as

follows:
1. Select PREFUN Preparatory function and then click OK. The system will display the PREFUN,
Preparatory function dialog box.
2. Select Assign value manually checkbox in order to assign a numeric value to the auxiliary function.
When selecting this, Value field will be enabled.
3. Introduce the numeric value in Value field and then click OK. The assigned number will be displayed
along with the letter G near to the machined part and will also be included in the Instruction list.
 DELAY: Select this option to introduce the program delay time instruction in the machining
program as follows:
1. Select DELAY Program dwell time and then click OK. The system will display a dialog box.
2. Introduce the delay time value in Value field and then click OK. The program delay time will be
recorded in the Instruction list.
406
Drawing Module
 OPSKIP: Select this option to enable or disable skipping the optional blocks in the machining
program as follows:
1. Select OPSKIP Optional block skip option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 353: Optional block skip options
2. Select ON checkbox in order to enable skipping the optional block or select OFF in order to disable
it.
3. Click OK button. The OPSKIP Optional block skip program will be recorded in the Instruction list.
 PPRINT: Select this option in order to introduce a Comment text in the machining program as
follows:
1. Select PPRINT Comment text, click OK button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 354: Comment text
2. Introduce the required comments in Text field and then click OK. The comment will be included in
the Instruction List.
 INSNC: Select this option to insert a text in the machining program as follows:
1. Select INSNC Insertion block CN, click OK button and the system will display the following dialog
box:
407
Drawing Module
Figure 355: Insertion block CN
2. Introduce the required text in Text field and click OK button. The text will be displayed near the
machined part and also recorded in the Instruction List.
 CLAMP: Select this option in order to introduce clamp management instructions in the
machining program as follows:
1. Select CLAMP Management of clamps option, click OK button and the system will display the
Figure 356: Management of clamps
2. Select the required checkbox to manage the clamps and click OK button.
3. The clamp instructions will be recorded in the Instructions list.
 HEADZ: Select this option in order to introduce cutting head instructions in the machining
program as follows:
1. Select HEADZ Head up/down option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
408
Drawing Module
Figure 357: Head up/down
2. Select whether the user wants the head up or down and click OK button.
3. The cutting head instruction will be displayed near to the machined part and also recorded in the
Instruction list.
 TRAP: Select this option in order to introduce trap instructions in the machining program as
follows:
1. Select TRAP Open/close trap option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 358: Open/close trap
2. Select whether the user wants to Open or Close the trap, introduce the Number of traps and click
OK button.
3. The trap instruction will be displayed near to the machined part as well as recorded in the
Instruction list.
 COOLNT: Select this option in order to introduce refrigeration instructions in the machining
program as follows:
1. Select COOLNT Refrigeration option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
409
Drawing Module
Figure 359: Refrigeration
2. Select the required refrigeration option and click OK button.

3. The refrigeration instruction will be displayed near to the machined part and also recorded in the
Instruction list.
Contour Attributes
Contour attributes ( ) option allows assigning contour attributes which are the postprocessor
instructions in the machining program as follows:
1. Select Contour attributes option located in Options menu.

2. Select a base contour and the system will display Contour attributes dialog box as shown below:
Figure 360: Contour attributes dialog box
410
Drawing Module
 Corner management: It indicates whether the corner values are assigned or not. If selected,
the system allows introducing the corner values.
 Microjoint at contour´s end: It indicates whether the micro-joint is assigned at the end of the
contour or not. If enabled, the system will display By quality checkbox.
 By quality: It indicates whether the micro-joint value is based on quality. If enabled, the
system allows introducing the micro-joint value manually.
 User attributes (1-5): Indicate the rest of the values that are assigned to the contour.
3. Select and introduce the required values, click OK button and the system will display Contour
attributes dialog box as shown below:
Figure 361: Contour attributes; Make on
 Picked contours: Select this to assign the attributes to the selected contours.
 All the contours: Select this to assign the attributes to all the contours.
 The contours with same technology: Select this to assign the attributes to contours of same
technology.
 The contours with same technology, form and dimensions: Select this to assign the
attributes to contours of same technology, form and dimensions.
 The contours with same technology and quality: Select this to assign the attributes to the
contours of same technology and quality.
411
Drawing Module
 The contours with same technology, quality, form and dimensions: Select this to assign the
attributes to the contours of same technology, quality, form, and dimensions.
CN Compensation
CN Compensation ( ) option allows selecting the side of compensation and index for numeric
control. It will be only applicable if the compensation type is Numeric Control. When selected the
system will display CN Compensation dialog box as shown below:
Figure 362: CN Compensation dialog box
Select the Compensation side, introduce the Compensation index and click OK button so that the
changes are saved.
System Compensation
System Compensation ( ) option allows selecting the side of compensation and introducing the
cutter radius. This is only applicable if the compensation is made by the system. When selected the
system will display System Compensation dialog box as shown below:
Figure 363: System compensation dialog box
Select the Compensation side, introduce the Cutter radius and click OK button in order to save the
changes.
412
Drawing Module
Component Removal
Part Extraction
Part extraction ( ) option allows the user to evacuate the machined part manually or by means of
traps by performing the following steps:
1. Select Part extraction option, located in Component removal menu and the system will display
Extractor dialog box as shown below:
Figure 364: Extractor dialog box
2. In type field select STOP option in order to evacuate the machined part manually. Select TRAP in
order to trap and evacuate the part.
TRAP type of evacuation will only be available if it is previously configured in the Machine
Configuration.
3. If TRAP option is selected, the system will display TRAP dialog box as shown below:
413
Drawing Module
Figure 365: TRAP dialog box
4. Introduce the Number of traps, Number of boxes, the Increment X and Y and select Move the part
after opening the trap, Fasten the part during the extraction and Vacuum parameters if required.
Assign Extractions
Assign extractions ( ) option allows assigning the evacuation type of the machined part as
follows:
1. Click Assign extractions option and the system will display Extractor dialog box as shown below:
Figure 366: Extractor dialog box
414
Drawing Module
Find the fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 Type: Type of extractor assigned for evacuation. It is possible to select the required type of
extractor from the drop-down list:
 Stop
 Trap
 None
 Manual: Select this to manually select the evacuation method/position.
 Semi-Automatic: Select this and the system displays the Position section.
 Middle: The Extractor is positioned at mid-point.
 End: The Extractor is positioned at the end-point.
 Picked point: The Extractor is positioned at a selected point.
 Automatic: Select Automatic to evacuate the part automatically.
2. Select the required values and then click OK. The evacuation type will be assigned.
Assign Boxes
Assign Boxes ( ) option allows assigning a box to evacuate the machined parts as follows:
1. Select Assign Boxes option and the system will display Boxes dialog box as shown below:
415
Drawing Module
Figure 367: Boxes dialog box
2. Enable Assign boxes checkbox and Normal and Symmetric fields will be activated in order to
introduce the different angles.
3. Introduce the number of boxes to assign in 0º, 90º, 180º, 270º and Others.
4. The user can click the required arrow buttons in order to assign the same number of boxes at all
angles/symmetrically.
5. Click OK button and the boxes will be assigned at specific angles.
View
Current Status
Select Current Status ( ) located in View menu and the system will display Current Status dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 368: Current Status dialog box
416
Drawing Module
This dialog box displays data such as the Units, Cutter radius, Compensation, X and Y.
If Feed rates button is selected the system will display Feed rates dialog box, providing the user with
Cut speed, Beveled speed, Powder mark speed, Drill mark speed, Pen mark speed, Cut mark speed,
Wheel-tool speed and Rapid speed, all of them by millimeters per minute.
Verify Machining
Verify machining ( ) option the system will test if the machining process has been done properly
looking if:
 All the parts and contours are machined
 There is no overlapping between parts
 There are no leads, micro-joints, loops, etc. that overlap with other elements
If any of the previous situations is given the system will display the following completion message:
“All machining on the sheet has been executed”. The dark grey color in the contours means that the
test has been successful.
If the system finds any problem, it will display a warning message, marking the problematic zones
with other color, or if the visualization is too small, with green points.
View
Display
Part Machining List
Part machining list ( ) option allows the user to decide from what machine the user wants to
use machining on the part. The user will need to draw and save a part and then save machining so as
to display the Part machining list window when clicking on Part Machining list display:
417
Drawing Module
Figure 369: Part machining list window
Simulation Window
Click Simulation window ( ) button to visualize the Simulation window of the machined part. It is
possible to set the speed, view the cutter radius, and so on.
Figure 370: Simulation window
Find the different sections provided in this dialog box briefly described below:
 In the first section it is possible to set the percentage of speed.
 The Operation section displays the Cutting quality, Cutting operation with respect to X axis, Y
axis, and the Cutter radius.
418
Drawing Module
 The next section provides information about the heads used and their positions,
compensation system and control.
 Use the arrow buttons to view the required simulation process.
 Use the other buttons at the bottom of the window to pause, stop the operation, fast
forward the simulation, move to the previous operation, current operation, and so on.
Machining Explorer
Click Machining Explorer ( ) option in order to visualize a panel on the left side of the window
with a tree structure that displays the machining instructions of the active part. This option helps
interpreting by converting the sequential instruction list into a structure. Each element of this list can
be visualized sequentially or grouped on several levels for a better comprehension depending on the
case.
According to the behavior of the views in relation to synchronization between them, any machining
view allows modification thereof, originating an update of the rest, so that system status is coherent
in all the views.
Any tree node can be selected with the mouse or keyboard. If the selected node corresponds to an
instruction, it will be highlighted in the drawing view. To display the corresponding information of
that instruction in the machining window, enable the visible option panel from the options ribbon.
Therefore, navigating the instruction tree will display data in the machining window.
If the selected node in the Machining Explorer corresponds to a classifying group or node all
instructions hanging from the same will be highlighted. In this case the machining window will not
show information unless this group has a single instruction.
Besides visualization per selection, the desired instructions can be highlighted by moving the mouse
over the tree without clicking. This function enables a quick visualization of the desired instruction or
instruction group in the main view without being necessary to select it for edition.
419
Drawing Module
Machining Window
The aim of the Machining Window ( ) is based on a detailed visualization of instructions and
modifications at the same time. This view allows modifications and updates the rest of the views so
that the system status is coherent all the time.
In the edition panel of the machining instruction properties, the instruction data can be visualized in
detail and modified. Changes made can be visualized from Drawing window simultaneously.
It is possible to delete the changes made at any time using Undo option.
3D View of the Part
3D View of the part ( ) option, as the name indicated, provides a 3D view of the part in
question in Drawing module, which aims to be a visual aid when designing parts. This view behaves
as one more panel in the Drawing module.
Figure 371: 3D View of the part
The 3D view also shows the machining (cutting contours and marking contours) of the part
whenever this is machined. Together with the machining, the user will also visualize drawn arrows
that indicate the direction of the machining.
420
Drawing Module
Figure 372: 3D View of the part with machining
It is possible to configure the colors of the background and the material of the part in the 3D view. In
order to do so navigate to Colors tab located in the configuration window of the Draw and Nest
module. The machining colors of the 3D view are the same colors used to visualize the machining in
the Draw and Nest module.
Find below a detailed list of actions available in the 3D view of the part:
 Mouse movement with scroll wheel pressed: rotation of the part.
Red-colored keys (combined with the scroll wheel):
 CTRL + scroll wheel movement: rotation of the part in Y-axis.
 ALT + scroll wheel movement: rotation of the part in Z-axis.
 SHIFT + scroll wheel movement: rotation of the part in X-axis.
421
Drawing Module
 CTRL + mouse movement with scroll wheel pressed: movement (pan) of the part.
 SHIFT + mouse movement with scroll wheel pressed: zoom of the part.
Yellow-colored keys (utility tools):
 F8: zoom all part.
 F9: enable/disable the machining visualization.
 F12: enable/disable the geometry visualization.
Blue-colored keys (movement (pan) keys of the part).
Green-colored keys (view keys):
 Z: zoom out.
 X: zoom in.
 C: center view in 0, 0, 0 point.
 1: view from above.
 2: view from right side.
 3: view from the front.
 4: view from below.
 5: rear view.
 6: view from left side.
 7: isometric view.
3D view toolbar:
 View from above (equivalent to key 1).
 View from the right (equivalent to key 2).
 View from the front (equivalent to key 3).
 View from below (equivalent to key 4).
 Rear view (equivalent to key 5).
422
Drawing Module
 View from the left (equivalent to key 6).
 Isometric view (equivalent to key 7).
 Zoom all part (equivalent to key F8).
 Enable/disable the geometry visualization (equivalent to key F12).
 Enable/disable the machining visualization (equivalent to key F9).
Change Co-ordinates
Change Co-ordinates ( ) button allows the user to change co-ordinates of the geometry with
respect to an axis. When pointing to this application, the system lists different ways to change the
co-ordinates as follows:
 Move to a point ( ): Click this to move the co-ordinates of the geometry to a point.
 Rotate by an element ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates by rotating an element.
 Rotate an angle ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates at a specified angle.
 Symmetry on axis X ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates symmetrically with respect to
X axis.
 Symmetry on axis Y ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates symmetrically with respect
to Y axis.
 Symmetry on axis XY ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates symmetrically with respect
to X and Y axis.
 Make by default ( ): Click this to consider the current co-ordinates as the default co-
ordinates whenever opening the CAD module.
423
Drawing Module
 Restore ( ): Click this to replace the current co-ordinates are replaced with the default co-
ordinates.
Axis
Select Axis ( ) button to display the X and Y axis on the Drawing window. This application will be
active until the user clicks it again in order to disable it.
Sheet Simulation
Select Sheet Simulation ( ) option in order to simulate the sheet of the part. This application will
be active until the user clicks it again in order to disable it.
Figure 373: Sheet simulation example
The user can also press F12 key on the keyboard to use this application.
Special Display
Special Display ( ) option enables visualizing the parts by color as per tools used, organizing the
color by part reference, shape or type as follows:
1. Select Special display option located in Display menu and the system will display Color display
424
Drawing Module
Figure 374: Color display dialog box
2. Select the required option from the ones provided in Fill the part and By tool fields.
3. If Fill parameter is enabled, the part will be filled with the corresponding color.
Auxiliary Geometry
Auxiliary Geometry ( ) option allows the user to create, modify and delete the non-cut lines. It is
also possible to customize the non-cut lines by specifying their color, style and thickness and
configuring their line properties, as well as their visualization in Draw and Nest view.
In order to enable this option In the Drawing module, it is necessary to create it first from Auxiliary
geometry definition window, which is displayed from Configuration options/Configure: Draw and
Nest/ Auxiliar section. Here the user will be able to specify the name and properties of the line (color
style and thickness).
Show Parts
Show parts ( ) option enables opening and visualizing the several parts of a job simultaneously
in the Drawing module. This functionality allows modifying aspects such as the geometry and
machining of many parts, with no need of opening them one by one separately.
1. Select Show parts option and the system will display a list with the following options:
 All parts: This option displays all the parts included in the job.
 Selected part: With this option it is possible to view all the parts associated to the same
machine as selected part.
425
Drawing Module
 First part: This option allows the user to open the initial part from the parts opened.
 Previous part: With this option it is possible to open the preceding part.
 Next part: This option helps the user to open the succeeding part.
 Last part: It displays the final part among the opened parts.
2. Once the required parts to open have been selected, it will be possible to navigate through them
individually as per the requirements.
Redraw
Redraw ( ) option allows visualizing the drawing of the machined part as shown below:
Figure 375: Redraw example
Zoom
Zoom All
Select Zoom All ( ) option in order to zoom the part to the maximum size of the screen.
Zoom Window
Select Zoom Window ( ) option in order to zoom the selected part as follows:
426
Drawing Module
1. Click Zoom Window option and mark the first point of the window to select the part that has to be
enlarged.
2. Move the cursor till the desired end point and mark the end point of the window.
3. The selected part will be enlarged.
Zoom Previous
Select Zoom Previous ( ) in order to go back to the previous screen.
The user can also press F7 key on the keyboard to use this application. +
Zoom Dynamic
Select Zoom Dynamic ( ) option in order to zoom the part to a required size as follows:
1. Click Zoom Dynamic button and the system will display a pink window on the part.
2. Click and move the cursor until getting the desired window size and then right click.
3. You can repeat the steps 1 and 2 until getting the desired size and the right-click. The part will be
enlarged based on the window size.
Zoom Scale
Select Zoom Scale ( ) option in order to zoom the part based on proportionate values as follows:
1. Click Zoom Scale button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 376: Zoom scale values
427
Drawing Module
2. Introduce the proportionate values and then click OK button.

3. The part will be enlarged based on the specified proportionate values.
The user can also press F7 key on the keyboard to use this application
Zoom Base
Select Zoom Base ( ) option in order to zoom the part within the default limits.
The user can also press F6 key on the keyboard to use this application
Define Limits
Define Limits ( ) option allows the user to define the limits of the screen for Zoom Base view. The
user will have to select the required part of the screen by clicking two points to set the limit.
Full Screen
Select Full Screen ( ) option in order to visualize the full drawing screen without the tool bars.
The system will display Full Screen button on the drawing window, which the user will have to click
in order to return to the normal screen.
Simulation
Simulate
Simulate section allows simulating the required machining instructions. It is possible to visualize the
machining instructions and the position of the required machining instructions between many other
options. It includes the following:
428
Drawing Module
Program
Select Program ( ) button in order to visualize all the instructions of a machining program. When
selected the system will display Instruction list dialog box as shown below, listing all the machining
instructions:
Figure 377: Instruction list dialog box
Here the user can visualize the position number of the machining instruction together with the type
and the specific text of the instructions. It is possible to print these instructions by means of Print
button provided at the bottom of the dialog box.
ISN Position
ISN Position ( ) option allows simulating the machining instruction of the selected program line
number as follows:
1. Click ISN Position button and the system will display the following dialog box:
429
Drawing Module
Figure 378: ISN Position value
2. Introduce the required program line number of the machining instruction in Value field and click OK
button.
3. The machining instruction of the selected program line will be simulated.
Mouse Positioning
Select Mouse Positioning ( ) option in order to simulate the machining instruction up to the
selected machining position as follows:
1. Click Mouse Positioning option.

2. Select the point on which the user wants to position himself.
3. The system will simulate the machining instruction up to the selected machining position.
Begin
Select Begin ( ) button in order to simulate the first machining instruction.
Previous
Select Previous ( ) button in order to simulate the previous instruction.
Next
Select Next ( ) button in order to simulate the next machining instruction when having
previously moved from the current instruction to the previous one or first one.
End
Select End ( ) button in order to simulate the last machining instruction when having previously
moved from the current instruction to the previous one.
430
Drawing Module
Run
Select Run ( ) option in order to visualize the simulation of the machining process including the
rapid movements, evacuation and so on. When selected, the system will display Simulation window
as shown below:
This application will only be enabled once the part is machined.
Previous Tool
Select Previous tool ( ) button in order to move to the previous tool.
Next Tool
Select Previous tool ( ) button in order to move to the next tool.
431
Drawing Module
Notes
Dimension Notes
Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) option in order to visualize the dimensions of the geometry automatically.
The user will only be able to visualize the dimensions if Texts and dimension option is enabled on
the View menu.
Semi-Automatic
Select Semi-automatic ( ) option to view the dimensions of the selected element of the
geometry automatically.
If Prompt for text checkbox is enabled in Dimension definition dialog box, the system will allow
the user editing the dimension text by displaying Text dialog box.
Delete
Select Delete ( ) option in order to erase an existing dimension as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. By means of the options provided select the dimensions required to delete and click Accept button.
3. The selected dimension note(s) will be deleted.
Dimension Notes (1-7)

The different Dimension notes provided below display the dimensions selected between two points
of different type:
 Dimension Notes 1 ( ): It visualizes horizontal dimension notes of the geometry.
 Dimension Notes 2 ( ): It visualizes vertical dimension notes of the geometry.
432
Drawing Module
 Dimension Notes 3 ( ): It visualizes inclined dimension notes of the geometry.
 Dimension Notes 4 ( ): It visualizes radius dimension notes of the geometry.
 Dimension Notes 5 ( ): It visualizes diameter dimension notes of the geometry.
 Dimension Notes 6 ( ): It visualizes angle dimension notes between three points.
 Dimension Notes 7 ( ): It visualizes angle dimension notes between two elements.
Configuration
Select Configuration ( ) option in order to configure the dimension notes as follows:
1. Click Configuration button and the system will display Dimension definition dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 380: Dimension definition dialog box
433
Drawing Module
 Font: Font of the dimension notes. Click the button in this field to select the type, style, and
size of the font.
 Decimal places in text: Number of decimals to be displayed in the dimension note.
 No decimal places for exact dimension notes: It indicates whether or not the dimension
notes are displayed with decimals.
 Put bench marks: In this section, it is possible to select the required check box to align the
bench marks according to dimensions. The different options include the following:
 According to minimum dimension
 According to maximum dimension
 According to diagonal dimension
 Percentage: Percentage value of the dimension note, which is the maximum text size with
respect to the part size.
 Automatic text: In this section, it is possible to enter the before and after text for the linear,
radius, diameters, and angle dimension notes.
 Prompt for text: It indicates whether the before and after text is displayed automatically or
not. If this check box is selected, when using the semi-automatic and manual dimension
notes, the system displays a dialog box allowing the user to change the dimension text.
 Set dimension attributes a dependent scale factor: It indicates whether the dimension
attributes (lines and arrows of the dimension notes) are dependent on the geometry and
based on the Put bench marks section or not. If the Select dimension attributes as a
dependent scale factor check box is not selected, the length value of the dimension
attributes has to be entered. In this case, the Dimension definition dialog box allows the user
the user entering the length value for the attributes. Enter the length of the dimension
attributes in ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’, and ‘d’ fields.
434
Drawing Module
 Automatic dimension notes: Select the required type of geometries for which the dimension
notes have to be displayed. The different types are:
 Horizontal
 Vertical
 Radius
 Diameters
 Only one radius if there are several elements: It indicates whether or not the dimension note
is displayed for only one element in case there are several elements of equal radius.
 Only one diameter if there are several elements: It indicates whether or not the dimension
note is displayed for one element in case there are several elements of equal diameters.
 Prompt for this data: It indicates whether or not the system allows the user to calculate the
co-ordinates for the Horizontal and Vertical dimension notes. It is also possible to set this
data by selecting the required co-ordinate system in the Vertical and Horizontal section.
2. Select and introduce the required details and click OK button. The parameters will be set
accordingly.
Change Data
Select this option in order to change the parameters of the manual dimension notes (dimension
notes 1-7) as follows:
1. Click Change data ( ) button and the system will display Dimension definition
window as shown below:
435
Drawing Module
Figure 381: Dimension definition dialog box (Change data)
2. Edit the required data.

3. Click OK button in order to set the parameters accordingly.
In order to activate all the fields Change data checkbox must be selected.
Modify Dimension
Select this option in order to change the position of the dimension notes to a desired position as
follows:
1. Click Modify dimension ( ) button and select the bench mark to modify.
2. Place the bench mark in the desired place and the system will display a dialog box.
3. Introduce the required value in Text field and click OK button in order to save the changes.
436
Drawing Module
The system will only display the dialog box with Text field if Prompt for text checkbox is enabled
in Dimension definition dialog box.
Explode Dimensions
Select this option in order to convert the dimensions’ geometry to an uncut geometry as follows:
1. Click Explode dimensions ( ) button and then the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select the dimension note that has to be exploded by means of the options provided and then click
Accept button.
3. The dimension note will be exploded and converted to an uncut geometry.
Text
Text
This option allows the user to introduce a text as follows:
1. Click Text ( ) button and the system displays Text definition dialog box as shown below:
 Font: Font of the text. Click the button in this field to select the required type, style, and size
of font.
437
Drawing Module
 Text: Text that is introduced on the part.
 Orientation: Angle value of the text. The user can select the required angle from the drop-
down list.
 Vectorize: It indicates whether the text is converted automatically to geometry or not. When
selecting this field, then the system displays Number of tracts for the Beizer curves field.
 Number of tracts for the Beizer curves: Select the number of tracts for the Beizer curves.
2. Select and introduce the required values and then click OK button. The text will be displayed in the
Drawing window.
3. Mark an insertion point to insert the text. The system will display the Dragging options in order to
place the text in the desired point.
Modify
Select this option in order to modify the required text as follows:
1. Select Modify ( ) option and select the text to modify.

2. The system will display a dialog box providing Text field, where the user will have to introduce the
required text.
3. Click OK button and the new text will replace the old one.
Marked texts can be modified in the same way as informative texts and writings. The option
Modify text allows selecting a marked text to replace the current text with another. In this case, the
system will replace the geometry of the current marked text by the geometry of the new one.
View
Text and Dimensions
Select Text and Dimensions ( ) option in order to display or hide the texts and dimension notes
from the geometry.
438
Drawing Module
This option will only be applicable for those texts that have not been converted to geometry by
means of Vectorize option.
Utilities
Utilities menu provides the following options:
Cut of Double or Triple Bevels
Cut of double or triple bevels ( ) option allows the user to cut the edges with the same kind of
bevel (For example: triple with triple, double with double) from the start point value entered and
hence the system automatically machines the selected part.
Double bevel: The machine must have three heads, one for vertical cut, one for upper bevel and the
third for lower bevel. In this case all the values must be filled, and for variable bevels the values must
be different from left to right side. The bevels must be assigned manually to each part using one of
the four kinds of bevels on the bevels toolbar.
Partial Cut or a Contour

With this option, the user can only cut part of a contour in cutting and combined machines. The part
of the new contour to be cut will be defined dynamically with the snap mode. Perform the following
steps:
1. Select Partial Cut of a Contour ( ) option and the system will display the Partial cut of a
contour dialog box as shown below:
439
Drawing Module
Figure 383: Partial cut of a contour dialog box
2. Select Lead-in/Lead-out length is fixed checkbox, if the user wants to enable the D field. With this
option, it is possible to specify D, A, and F (distance, angle and length) for lead-in and/or lead-out.
 Compensation mode: Select the required type of compensation mode.
 Head radius: Introduce the required radius value.
 Apply quality: Select this checkbox to assign cutting technology of a specified quality.
By clicking the Navigation button, the system will display Cutting quality dialog box. Select the
required type of Cutting quality and click OK button.
Click Modify button in order to modify the material, thickness, and so on. If selected, the system will
display Table of technology dialog box to include, modify, delete the material, thickness, and other
details.
Click OK and the system will display Selection toolbar. Select the required element using the options
provided and Accept button located in the same menu. The selected element will be assigned with
the cutting technology of the previously specified quality.
Open Drafting
Open drafting ( ) option will open the drafting module without closing the drawing/nesting
ones. If the system detects changes in the machining when selecting this option, it will prompt for
440
Drawing Module
saving them. If the user performs changes in the drafting module, the system will ask to save them
again before going back to the drawing/nesting module.
Compare Geometries
Compare Geometries ( ) option allows the user comparing two different geometries.
If two identical geometries are compared, the system will display a warning message stating
that the geometries are identical.
In order to compare two geometries, perform the following steps:
1. Select Compare Geometries option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the first geometry by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. Select the second geometry that has to be compared with the first and click Accept button one
more time.
4. The differences between the geometries will be highlighted.
Bitmap
Bitmap ( ) option allows visualizing a Bitmap image on the Drawing window as follows:
1. Select Bitmap option and the system will display Open dialog box.
2. Select the required bitmap image ant click Open button.
3. The system will display the selected bitmap image on the Drawing window.
Dragging Options
The Dragging toolbar enables the rotation of the selected elements in the desired angle and
direction.
Figure 384: Dragging options
This button sets the step angle, for rotating the selected geometry using the mouse.
441
Drawing Module
 Step of rotation: The selected geometry will rotate in the angle indicated in the displayed
dialogue.
 Step angle: Clicking on one of these buttons or the keys that appear in lower case at the
bottom of each button (Ctr - 1, Ctr - 5, Ctr - 0, Ctr - 3, Ctr - 4, Ctr - 9), the selected geometry will
rotate in the corresponding angle.
 Rotate (1-5-10-30-45-90) degrees: Clicking on this button or Ctr - A, the selected geometry will
rotate until reaching the symmetrical geometry with respect to the vertical axis of the mouse
position.
 Symmetry X: Click on this button to choose the rotation direction.
 Finish: Validates the selection. The same effect can be achieved by clicking the right mouse
button or pressing the <INTRO> key.
When dragging a part in automatic and it needs to be rotated in order to fit in a gap, the system
automatically detects if there are collisions when rotating, and if so, it will look for a closer point
without collision. This automatic detection works when rotating a part using the keys Ctrl+Q or
Ctrl+W and clicking the left mouse button.
Moreover, when right mouse button is held down and the part is dragged, the system automatically
looks for better rotation for each position so it is easier to fit a part in a gap. In case of the same
behavior as until now when rotating the part with the right mouse button, press Ctrl button.
Selection Options
The different program options require elements selection. In order to select elements, the button
bar with different selection options appears. The options provided change according to the actions
that can be applied at each moment. The most common selection button bar is the following:
Figure 385: Selection options
 Element: Selection of elements by clicking the mouse on them (or deselection if they are
already selected).
442
Drawing Module
 Window-Capture: Selection of elements with a rectangular window. The same effect as

clicking the left mouse button in an area in which there are no elements.
 Trap: Selection of elements by means of an area generated by polylines. All the elements
trapped inside this area will be selected.
 Join: The elements whose ends coincide with the last element selected are selected. The
same effect can be produced by clicking the middle mouse button.
 All: Selection of all the drawing elements.
 Dots: Selection of all the drawing points.
 Line segments: Selection of all the drawing segments.
 Arc segments: Selection of all the drawing arcs.
 Full circles: Selection of all the drawing circumferences.
 Lines: Selection of all the drawing lines.
 Invert selection: It inverts the current selection.
 Accept: It accepts the selection.
 Finish: It finishes the execution of the option.
443
4 NESTING AND MACHINING MODULE

The Nesting and machining module is the area of the program, which is most directly related to the
final machining of the part. It is in charge of the right positioning of the parts in the sheet and
calculating the machining sequence and creating the CNC program among other things.
In order to gain access to this module, select the option Nesting and machining ( ) in Home menu
of Lantek Expert – Jobs (CAM) menu and the system will display the following window:
Figure 386: Nesting and Machining module
Title bar
The Title bar located in Nesting and machining window helps to identify the work in progress at any
time. The three factors that define a particular job (Machine, Material and Thickness) are displayed
in the center of the title bar. In addition, the user will also be provided with the name of the active
Module, the name of the active/current Job and the active Database.
444
Drawing Window
The Drawing window is located in the center of the cutting and machining window. This is the
drawing operative area where the nesting and machining of sheets can be visualized.
If something is required to be modified in a part that is already nested, it is possible to open it by

right clicking on it while pressing Control key.
Status Bar
The status bar provides up to date information about the steps to perform and the active
coordinates of the cursor.
 Sheets dimension: Those are the X and Y dimensions of the current sheet.
 Percent of sheet occupied by the parts: This is the size of the whole sheet occupied by the
nested parts.
 Percent of remnant occupied: In this case, referred to the size that the nested parts occupy
in the remnant.
 Maximum cutting coordinates: Maximum X and Y distances where the machine head will
arrive.
 Sheet reference: This is the reference given when the sheet has been created.
 CNC filename: This is the name of the CNC file that will not be generated until the job has
been saved.
Apart from all the data shown previously located at the bottom of the window, there is also an icon
representing the active option. This icon, together with the name and group it belongs to, plus a text
displaying the user´s requirements at any time (a point, a selection, etc.) makes the program user
friendly and guides the user through the execution of the different options.
445
Customize Quick Access Toolbar

Customize quick access toolbar option permits the user to access the different functionality areas of
the software quickly and in a visual way, as they are coming in the nesting and machining module.
This frequently used toolbar is accessible on the top left corner of the window. This provides the user
with one click shortcut commands for the commonly used functions, such as creating a new job/part,
opening the selected part of the job/existing job and saving it between many other options.
By means of this option the user will also be able to include additional icons such as Print, Properties
and Projects for example. Undo ( ) and Redo ( ) options enable the user to select the number
of actions that is going to use. It is necessary to unfold the list of last performed actions and to select
the action or actions ready to undo or redo from the list.
The user can add any frequently used commands to the quick access tool bar by right clicking on
the command icon and selecting Add to Quick Access Tool Bar.
More commands... option located in the drop-down menu provided on the right corner of the Quick
Access Toolbar, displays Customize dialog box which includes the following tabs:
 Quick Access
 Hide options
 Shortcut keys
 Ribbon
Each command displays a certain activity area. The Commands section in each group carries out a
command or displays a menu of commands. Using this hierarchy, similar commands are grouped
together making the Customize access toolbar very task oriented. Because in all the modules, some
commands are available directly on each tab and it is not necessary to search for those options in
submenus.
446
Contextual Menu
New
New ( ) option enables the user to create a new element.
Open
Open ( ) option allows the user to open the selected element.
Open Parts
Open parts option allows the user to open All parts of the job, open parts with the Same machine,
open parts of a Same subjob and open Selected parts.
Figure 387: Open parts options
Block
Block ( ) option allows the user to block the selected element.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows the user to delete the selected elements. When selected, a warning
message asking whether the user wants to delete the selected element will be displayed:
Figure 388: Warning message (Delete)
447
Import
Import ( ) option allows the user to Import pending parts of manufacturing orders list, Import
parts from database and Import DXF files.
If the user wants to import pending parts of manufacturing orders list, it will be necessary to select
Pending parts of manufacturing orders list option. The following window will be displayed:
Figure 389: Manufacturing products window
If the user wants to import parts from database, it will be necessary to select Import parts from
database option so as to display the following window:
Figure 390: Import parts window
If the user wants to import DXF files, it will be necessary to select Import DXF files option. The
following window will be displayed:
448
Figure 391: Open window
Quantity
Quantity ( ) option allows the user to change the quantity of the selected element. When
selecting this option, the following window will be displayed:
Figure 392: Number of parts window
Priority
Priority ( ) option allows changing the priority of the selected element. When selecting this option,
the following window will be displayed:
449
Figure 393: Priority window
Information
Information ( ) option displays the properties of the selected element. When selecting this
option, Part parameters window will be displayed, in which the user will be able to visualize the
following data:
Figure 394: Part parameters window
Part Rotations
By clicking Part Rotations, the user will be able to choose between following options: 0º, 90º, 180º,
270º and Others. It will also be possible to make some configurations. In order to do so, the user will
need to click on Configure button so as to display the following window:
450
Figure 395: Part rotation window
Properties
When clicking Properties option the user will be able to choose between the following options:
 Assign boxes to parts: From this option the user can assign the boxes from where the parts
will be evacuated. When selected, the following window will be displayed:
Figure 396: Boxes dialog box
451
There are two different sections: Normal and Symmetrics. On both, the user can configure different
boxes depending on the angle they are placed on the sheet.
The arrow buttons allow making this configuration faster if the box is the same. For example, filling
the 0 degrees’ normal position with the box number 2 and clicking on the down button will make the
system to fill all the rotation fields with the same number.
Also, the user can choose to apply the changes just in the current sheet or for every sheet of the job.
In addition, it is possible to activate the default box when selecting Assign boxes option.
 Valid part for nest in common cut: This option is used to define whether this part can have a
common cut or not despite of the nesting for common cut turned on. With this option turned
on the common cut between the parts are made. If this is turned off and even though the
nesting for common cut is turned on there will be no common cut for this part. But the
common cut will be there for other parts.
 Automatic round angles: It indicates whether to include the round angles automatically
 Machine with cut fast options: This option allows doing the automatic flying cut machining.
It is useful in two contexts:
 When the flying cut is not activated automatically a part that can be machined in this way.
 When the flying cut is activated automatically and the user does not want to activate it in a
part machined this way.
If the part contains automatic flying cut machining, the option will appear selected and the part will
be machined again but without flying cut.
If the part does not contain flying cut machining, the option will appear unmarked. If it is selected,
the part will be machined with flying cut according to the configuration set.
If the part has been previously machined in the drawing module, the option will appear disabled
because the system prioritizes manual machining.
If the part contains manual flying cut machining, the option will appear selected.
452
If this option is selected for parts already nested on a sheet, the new machining will not be
applied on them. It will only be applied on the new sheets. If the user wants to apply the new machining
on already nested parts, it will be necessary to regenerate the nesting.
Group
When clicking here, Block on select option is displayed. This option allows the user to block the
selected elements.
Order
It allows the user ordering by name, by size, by quantity and by priority.
View
When clicking here, Only pending parts option will be displayed.
Size
When clicking Size, Bitmaps size dialog box is displayed:
Figure 397: Bitmaps size dialog box
Cancel
Cancel ( ) option closes the contextual menu.
Subjobs
Subjobs tab includes the following options:
Open
The manufacturing order can be divided into different jobs which include all the parts made with the
same material and thickness for one machine.
453
From this option of the menu, the system will show all the jobs of the current manufacturing order
into a list allowing the user to select one for being opened and edited. When selecting Open ( )
option, the system will display Subjob selection dialog box.
When clicking New button, the user can create a new subjob without any part on an order. In order
to open a new subjob, the user has to define a machine, material and thickness. The parts can be
imported directly on the sheet.
Previous
This option allows going through the subjobs following a creation order. Whenever Previous ( )
option is selected, the system will open the subjob previously created. If the option is disabled in the
menu, this means that the current manufacturing order is only made of one subjob.
Next
Next ( ) option allows going through the subjobs following a creation order. Whenever this
option is selected, the system will open the next subjob in the list that was previously created. If the
option is disabled in the menu, this means that the current manufacturing order is only made of one
subjob.
Save
Save ( ) option allows saving all the jobs of the current manufacturing order. The sheet that is
going to be saved will appear in the status toolbar. With this protected option the user is allowed to
automatically generate a text file with many machining and nesting information. This application
uses the file FMecData.tem as template, where the user can define the information and the format
of the output.
In order to provide a WOS oriented configuration, the default image format is PNG and is
automatically generated in color. Images can be saved with or without filling, sheet geometry,
machining initialization or machining up to the current instruction.
It is also possible to generate the image size in proportion with the minimum rectangle of the
geometry to be drawn so that bland spaces are avoided. In addition, an XML document will be
generated in order to store the position of the clamps and the color of each nesting part when
454
saving. The background in which the images are stored can also be defined with or without
background and with sheet simulation background.
Save All
Save all ( ) option allows saving all the parts, taking into account all the specifications previously
made.
Save As
Save as ( ) option allows saving a part or saving the changes made to an existing part. This is
similar to the Save application except for the fact that this can be used to create a new part similar to
an existing one.
When selecting this option, the system will display Part saving dialog box. The user will be able to
make the required changes and assign a new name to the part.
It is possible to generate multiple image files per part and sheet. For that purpose, it is necessary to
save the image in the corresponding database table and to indicate the file type. BMP, PNG, WMF,
JPEG and GIF formats are allowed. When parts are created from importers their images can only be
70x60 or 700x600.
Visualization type can be configured in black and white color, as well as showing the filling and the
machining.
Drawing
Drawing ( ) option will open the Drawing module (previously detailed) without closing Nesting
and Machining module. If the system detects changes in the machining when selecting this option, it
will prompt for saving them.
If the user does any modification in the drawing module, the system will ask to save them before
going back to the Nesting and Machining module.
Import Stored Nesting
By means of Import Stored Nesting ( ) option the user can load a previously saved nesting in the
active order. When selected the system will display Import stored nesting dialog box as shown below:
455
Figure 398: Import stored nesting dialog box
Perform the following steps in order to import a stored nesting:
1. Select the nesting type (Stored nesting or Nesting from database).

2. Select the nesting from the table and introduce the number of sheets to import in the quantity
column. By selecting the Load nesting data checkbox, the drawing would be shown indicating
whether the nesting is done or not. The references of the parts included in the nesting, as well as,
the quantity of nested parts appear in the Parts list table. When selecting a row in this table, the
system will show the image of the selected part.
3. If the user wants the system to display only the nested parts of the selected job to be displayed,
then it will be necessary to select Only nestings with parts of the job checkbox. A list of stored
nestings or nestings from the database will be displayed containing only the parts available in the
job. Selecting this option, the user is able to select At least one or All the nesting parts related to a
particular job where it is possible to edit the quantities of each nesting parts from the displayed
list.
456
4. Select Modify the zero point of the sheet in order to modify the initial point of the nesting.
5. The following conflict situations could arise:
 Not enough parts in job: The part or parts involved in nesting appear highlighting the parts in
the table. Click OK button to import the nesting part and even the necessary parts of a job
can be imported by selecting the Add parts option. This adds to the job the necessary parts
before importing.
 Not enough sheets in database: In this the nesting part is highlighted in the nesting table.
Click OK button to import the nesting part and even the necessary parts of a job can be
imported by selecting following options: Add sheets or Create sheets. If the first option is
selected, the system will add to the database the required quantity of sheets before
importing. If the Create new sheets option is selected, the system shows, before importing
the nesting, a sheet creation window with the sheet dimensions.
 Machined: If the selected nesting is machined and the Load nesting data option is activated,
the system displays a span indicating this situation and two new options: Delete existing
machining and Regenerate. By selecting any of them the system performs the corresponding
operation on the selected nesting before importing it to the order. The Regenerate option
includes Delete the machining.
6. It is possible to make filters on the Nesting list by using the Criteria option. When selecting the
Navigation button provided in Criteria field the system will display Import stored nesting [Criteria]
457
Figure 399: Import stored nesting [Criteria]
It is possible to select the required machine, material, thickness, reference, user data, length and
width of the parts. The import stored nesting parts can be viewed by selecting the Creation date and
Last modification date from the From date and To date calendar checkbox. After entering the
required criteria’s, click OK button. Only those parts will be displayed that meet the specified criteria.
The parts lists allow indicating that the user wants to view the nestings which contain the parts of
the list in the right and with the specified quantity. The list on the left side initially shows all the parts
of the job, and, by default, it shows all the nestings that contain any of these parts and any that is not
in the list.
458
Store Nesting
Store Nesting ( ) option allows the user to store the nesting. When selected, the following
window will be displayed:
Figure 400: Reference
Export Nestings to File
Export nestings to file ( ) option allows exporting the parts of the nesting to a file and the
selected files that can be exported from a database to the local directory. This option provides
information about machines, materials, sheets, products and designs to carry out the exportation.
When selected, the system will display Export nestings dialog box as shown below:
Figure 401: Export nestings dialog box
By means of this option, the user will be able to configure the following:
 Configuration files and machine tools: This option allows exporting files and machine tools
from the database to a specified .bck (backup) file to a local directory. If selected, the system
will carry out this option automatically.
459
 The current sheet: The user will be able to visualize and export the job of the current sheet
to a file.
 Every sheet of the subjob: Select this option in order to export all the sheets of the subjob to
the file,
 Every sheet of the job: Select this option in order to export all the sheets of the current job
to a file.
 Display drawing: By means of this option the user will be able to visualize the sheet of the
job, as well as every sheet of the database. Therefore, when selecting the nesting to be
exported, the user will be able to select nestings from other jobs apart from the active job.
 Criteria: This option will be enabled once Every sheet of the job option is activated. If
selected, the user will be able to visualize all the parts that belong to the nesting and to
modify details like material, machine, thickness, reference, date, length, jobs and parts.
Import
Import Pending Parts of Manufacturing Orders List
Thanks to Import pending parts of manufacturing orders list ( ) option, the user can import
parts pending in manufacturing orders list. When selected, the system will display Manufacturing
products dialog box as shown below:
Figure 402: Manufacturing products dialog box
A list of parts will be displayed together with their Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, Delivery
date, Quantity, Dimensions, Order, Customer and User data.
460
By clicking Criteria Navigation button, the user can create new parts by assigning the required
machine, material, thickness, reference, user data, length and width.
Select the required part from the list and click OK button in order to import it.
Import Parts from Database
Import parts from database ( ) option enables the user to import parts from the existing list or
Part list to the current manufacturing order section. When this option is selected the system will
display Import parts dialog box as shown below:
Figure 403: Import parts dialog box
This dialog box displays the list of parts available in the database and each part provides the
Reference, Quantity, Delivery date, Order and Manufacturing order.
By clicking Criteria Navigation button, the user can create new parts by assigning the required
machine, material, thickness, reference, user data, length and width among other aspects.
Select the required part from the list and click OK button in order to import it.
461
DXF Files
DXF files ( ) allows importing geometries of a DXF file. If selected, the system will display Open
dialog box, which lists all the .dxf files available. This window provides a drawing simulation located
on the right side. In addition, Configure button directs the user to Import configuration window,
where all the parameters related to importations can be configured.
Select the required .dxf file and click OK button so that the system imports it to the current job.
Help
In this section, the user will find useful information in Documents and Online Resources. For further
information, please refer to 3.6. Help section.
Print
Print
This option allows printing all the details of the required part.
The system allows calculating sums with respect to the numerical properties of cutting parts from a
sheet. These fields offer the possibility to calculate the total number of cutting parts from a sheet or
the total weight of these parts. The user can check the whole list of existing fields and their
respective identifiers as well as a small description of them in the technical help.
The image of the parts can be displayed either in color or in black and white, depending on “V080”
parameter of LantekPr.cfg configuration file.
462
Figure 404: Print
Print Preview
By means of this option the system will generate the Workshop Sheet containing the following
information:
 Sheet reference
 Order name, date and time
 CNC file name
 Sheet dimensions
463
 Nesting representation
 Machine, material, weight, height, sheet usage percentage, remnant
 Total time
 Supplier, transporter
 Part references and information
Figure 405: Print preview
The information here displayed depends on the configuration made for each machine in Work
centers / Utilities / Configure / Machines / General Properties / Boxes.
464
When selecting Configuration options, the system will show the following options:
Figure 406: Configuration options (Nesting and Machining)
System
4.6.14.1.1 Common Cutting Parameters

There are different options to set up if the user wants to use common cut.
 Common cut: This section configures how the common cut is going to be done:
 Between two parts: When this option is selected, a new button will appear for configuring
the lead in/out values for the common cut.
 Using button the user can configure the lead outs of the auxiliary contours in common
cut.
 Between several parts: The common cut will be done between more than two parts, if
possible.
 Order by lead-in/lead-out position: When making common cuts among various parts, it is
possible to order these cuts so that the last part cut finishes in the same area where the
automatic placement of part lead-ins/lead-outs are configured. If this parameter is enabled, it
arranges the part cutting order with the common cut in order to optimize the number of
465
startups so that the part cut always finishes in the same side or corner of the part. This
option is mainly used to get an optimum position for evacuation when part cutting is
finished.
 Length of pre-cutting elements: If the system is cutting parts together sometimes it happens
that already cut parts should move or incline a little, which is dangerous for the head because
of collision. To avoid this kind of situations, the system allows introducing a security value
that will be used so that there are no collisions.
 It is allowed to reverse contours: If enabled, the system will reverse the contour sense of the
cut if it suits the process.
 Using button user can configure the lead in/outs of the auxiliary contours in common cut.
When selected the system will display Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box as shown below:
system will leave without cutting when using the common cut feature. This prevents
situations like the figure, where the machining starts from the smaller parts, and once they
are cut, the machine cuts the small segment between the two parts. With a small factor
value, the system will leave it without cut.
466
 Execution mode: This option allows to choose the common-cut order that the machine will
follow.
 Nesting for common cut: All the next options change the nesting process for allowing
automatic common place of the parts on the sheet. For working automatically properly, the
user should configure the same settings on nesting for common cut and on common cut, and
then, use automatic nesting and machining. The other way is to place the parts manually on
the sheet and, if the common cut is enabled, the user can make the automatic machining
allowing the system to try to apply the common cut to the manual nesting.
 Between two parts: The nesting will be optimized for placing parts together two by two.
 Between several parts: The system will try to use the common cut at most possible parts.
 Minimum length: The value given here is the minimum length that the contours must have to
apply the common cut.
 Only between same length elements: If enabled, the common cut will only be applied if the
common contours have the same length.
 Only place on nesting direction: If enabled, the nesting will be done optimizing the common
cut instead of lower sheet usage.
 Always respect the distance between parts: If enabled, this option makes the system test
the minimum separation between parts among certain elements when performing the
common cut. This option also tests whether the other elements not involved in the common
cut respect the minimum separation between parts. In some cases, it is more restrictive than
the user might expect, since two elements not respecting this minimum distance, prevent
parts entering the common cut, when the user had no problem in bringing these elements
closer than that separation between parts.
 System compensation: The compensation can be treated by the program or by the numeric
control. When using common cut, it is possible to determine if the compensation is not going
to be used, if it is going to be used only in the main contour of the common cut parts, or in all
the contours. When using any of the system compensation modes, be sure that the
467
machining is configured to use system compensation: Utilities / Configure / Machines /

Automatic Machining / Cut - System compensation.
 Main contours: The compensation will be applied to the common cut main contours.
 All the contours: All the contours will use the system compensation.
 Islands: Because of the use of common cut, some holes between parts may appear. The
system provides two different treatments for them.
 No treatment: Do not apply any treatment.
 Cut the parts inside the islands first: If the island is big enough, it may contain another part
nested inside, with this enabled, the system will cut first these parts before cutting the
island.
 Cut all the islands first: The machining will start always for cutting all the islands, and then
the part's contours.
 Cut islands when cutting the parts: If this option is enabled islands can be cut when parts
are cut. Cutting an island will not be finished until all the parts within this island are cut. The
island will be cut as the parts generated by the islet are cut.
4.6.14.1.2 Automatic Nesting

The configuration here made will be applied when the nesting process is carried out automatically.
GENERAL
 Level of optimization: In this field the user can select any of the predefined levels of
optimization from the drop-down list provided. The system provides five predefined levels,
each one with their own set of parameters. The execution time and result of these
predefined levels is balanced, that is, the longer the execution time, the better result. Every
one of the predefined levels corresponds to a predefined Level of optimization
configuration. The user can modify the configuration of any of the existing predefined levels
and save it as a user defined level of optimization. The configuration of the existing
predefined levels will not be modified.
468
In order to visualize the parameters of any of the predefined levels or to modify them and save them
as user customized level of optimization, it will be necessary to click on the arrow button provided
next to the drop-down list ( ). If this button is selected, the system will display Level of
optimization window. In this window the user can configure all parameters related to the level of
optimization. Between the fields provided in this window, the user will only find enabled the ones
that correspond to the user optimization and not system optimization.
Figure 408: Level of optimization window
 Use modules: If the user enables this parameter, the system will generate modules of two
parts in Nesting module whenever it is possible. However, the parts in question must fit
together very well so that the system considers them as a module. The system will only use
those ones that provide a good performance.
 Test starting from a different corner for each part: If the user enables this parameter, the
system will use a specific algorithm that places the parts automatically in the different
corners of the sheet. If this parameter is disabled, this is how these parts would be placed in
the sheet.
469
If this parameter is enabled, it will place each part in a different corner of the sheet, achieving an
exceptional efficiency.
 Rotate parts to maximize holes between them: As the name indicates, this parameter will
rotate in order to try creating bigger holes between them. This way, if there is any part that
may fit in the gap created, the user will be able to place more parts and therefore will get a
better efficiency.
If this parameter is disabled, parts are not being rotated and therefore the space that may be formed
inside is clearly not being exploited fully.
If this parameter is enabled, the system will rotate the parts, maximizing the hole between them.
This way it is possible to introduce another part inside and increase the efficiency of the nesting.
470
 Define the number of irregular methods to apply: The bigger number specified by the user,
the more methods the system will test in order to place the parts and look for the best
result. The system will try several algorithms looking for the best sheet advantage and will
use the ones on which the space profit is best. The number of methods applied will depend
on the number of irregular methods to apply defined by user, which will consequently
result in a longer execution time. Setting a higher value ensures a better result. There are
eighteen irregular methods. The user must try with different values and check the
efficiency percentage in order to select the most suitable one. This option is useful for those
cases in which there are different parts with irregular geometries and small quantities.
 Use regularity method: This parameter adds regular methods to the previous irregular
ones. Both parameters can be enabled at the same time if required. As in the previous case,
the bigger the level selected, the more possibilities to get a better nesting. However, it adds
more testing time to the nesting. This method basically looks for part modules towards a
better sheet efficiency. This parameter is useful for those cases in which there is a big
quantity of the same part (at least to fill half the sheet).
o Level 1: The system will create column modules and apply them with basic criteria.
o Level 2: The system will modify the column modules created initially, looking for a
better sheet advantage.
o Level 3: The system will create different column sizes. This level will suppose more
testing; therefore, the automatic nesting will take more execution time.
o No regularity: Without any regularity method, the nesting of the following part
would be as shown below:
471
Level 1: Once Regularity method level 1 is activated, the difference would be remarkable.
 Try to nest in horizontal and vertical: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheets
by rows) or vertically) nesting the sheet by columns). If this parameter is activated, the
system will test both horizontally and vertically and will use the one on which the best
efficiency is reached.
 Force a specific precision: If this parameter is enabled, the system will force the precision
set in this field by the user. Whenever activated, the system will display a drop-down list
with the following options:
o Very low (fastest)
o Low
o Normal
o High
o Very high (slowest)
472
o Value: In this case, the user will be provided with a precision bar in order to set the
required value:
Figure 409: Precision bar
 Force a specific rotation angle: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will display
the following fields:
 Rotation angle for parts: Select between the provided options in the drop-down list (15, 30,
45, 90 and 180).
 Search special rotation angles for the parts: If enabled, the system will execute various tests
and search for the most appropriate rotation angle for the parts, which will result in a
better efficiency.
 Force a specific type of modules: If this parameter is enabled, the arrow ( ) button
located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever the user selects this button,
the system will display Modules window, where the user can select between the provided
options, which are divided into Simple modules, Complex modules and Special modules.
Once the user has defined the required parameters in Level of optimization window, it is possible to
save them for a later use by means of Save as… button located at the bottom of the window. The
system will display New reference window where the user will have to introduce the required name
for the level of optimization that has been defined and click OK button in order to save it.
 Maximum time to calculate the best efficiency: Here the user must introduce the maximum
time that will be taken to test the methods (that have been previously set). Remember that
the time must be introduced in seconds. During the automatic nesting execution, once the
time here specified is reached, the system will stop testing methods and will choose the best
one (most efficient) found up to that moment.
473
 Precision: This field allows the user setting the required exactitude or preciseness of the
automatic nesting. The user will be provided with a drop-down list with the following five
options:
 Very low (fastest): In the case of all those elements that are not neither horizontal nor
vertical, the less precision applied, the system will apply more distance between parts.
 Low
 Normal
 High
 Very high (slowest): With more precision, the distance between parts will be closer to the
minimum distance between parts.
The higher the precision level selected, the longer it will take the system to execute the automatic
nesting.
 Allow part rotations: Depending on the shape of the part it may be very useful to rotate it in
order to get a better nesting. For example, in case of circles, it would not make any sense
since their output is the same whichever the angle the user chooses.
 Rotations: Here the user can select the rotation angle required. The drop-down list provides
the following options: 15, 30, 45, 90 and 180 degrees. For example, given the case 15 degrees
is selected, the system will test placing the part on every 15 degrees’ position, which will
result in 24 tries.
 Search special rotation angles for the parts: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the
system will look for special angles that may be useful for the parts as well as result in a
better sheet efficiency. This parameter will test more rotation angles than in the previous
case, and therefore will result in a longer execution time.
 Separation of parts: Here the user must introduce the required value to use as separation
between parts. This separation value is intended to safeguard the quality of parts. Usually,
this value is defined by the restrictions of the machine that is being used.
474
 Allow different separation in Y: This parameter is aimed at those cases in which the user
works with big thicknesses. It allows setting a different separation in Y in order to avoid
putting a disadvantage (penalizing) both dimensions due to the auxiliary elements (such as
lead-in/lead-outs, loops and micro-joints).
If this parameter is disabled, the separation between parts either in X or in Y is exactly the same. The
separation between parts will correspond with the value introduced in the previous field.
Whenever the user enables this parameter and introduces a different value for the separation in Y
axis, after performing the automatic nesting the difference will be very obvious (as shown in the
image below).
 Allow mirroring: If this parameter is enabled, the system will place the parts in the nesting
with symmetries. However, this parameter is usually restricted by the material that is being
used since the quality is not always the same in both sides of the sheet.
 Fit every part to sheet borders: If this parameter is enabled, as the name indicates, parts will
be fitted to sheet borders. If disabled, the system will always maintain half of the separation
set between parts (based on the value given in Separation of parts field). However, this
condition may be restricted by the machine that is being used.
475
If this parameter is enabled, the part will adjust either to the sheet margin (in case there is any) or to
the sheet border. If it is disabled, the system will always leave half of the separation between parts
(half of the value given in Separation of parts field).
 Create equal sheets: Here the user will be able to select the required option between the
three options provided in the drop-down list: No, Yes and Ask. Given the case either Yes or
Ask option is selected, the system will check whether it is possible to generate repetitions of
the current nesting (which is already very efficient) if the existing quantity of parts and
sheets so permits.
 Corner: Here the user will be able to select the required corner from which the system will
start placing the parts. The nesting process will start from the selected corner and continue
in the opposite direction.
ADVANCED
 Calculate modules for parts: Whenever the user activates this parameter, the system will
calculate modules of two parts always looking for the best efficiency. Once this parameter
has been enabled, the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also become enabled.
Whenever this button is selected the system will display Modules window. Modules window
displays the existing types of modules, which are divided into three different groups: Simple
modules, Complex modules and Special modules:
476
Figure 410: Modules window
 Simple modules:
 Basic: It is formed by the same part.
 Advanced: It is formed by a basic module and other parts. Once the basic module has been
calculated, the system will fill in the holes left in the nesting with other parts.
 Complex modules:
 Multi-part: It is formed by several parts, which also tries fitting the parts together.
 Staggered: It consists in a staggered combination of the parts.
 Special modules:
 Multihead: This type of module is specific for machinery with multihead and will only be
displayed whenever the machine that is being configured has them.
 Nesting priority direction: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheet by rows) or
vertically (nesting the sheets by columns). Depending on the measures of the sheet it might
be more efficient to nest in one direction or the other. This parameter provides a drop-down
list and allows the user selecting between Horizontal and Vertical.
 Horizontal: As shown in the nesting below, parts will be placed horizontally.
477
 Vertical: In this case, parts will be placed vertically.
 Rectangular mode is allowed: By means of this parameter, the system allows treating those
parts that are almost rectangular in order to improve the speed of nesting calculations. Given
the case this parameter is enabled; it would be the very first algorithm to execute whenever
performing an automatic nesting.
Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also
become enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Rectangular nesting setup
window:
Figure 411: Rectangular nesting setup window
 Type: It provides a drop-down list where the user can select the type of rectangular nesting
478
 Normal: The system will treat parts as rectangles as will search for the best combination of
those rectangles (the ones that meet the Squareness percentage) in the sheet.
 Optimize for linear cut of parts: In order to optimize linear part cutting, the user must get
the largest number of parts of the same size (both length and width) nested in columns.
This parameter aims to look for part columns with the same width and is very useful for
machines with common cut. Once this option has been selected, the arrow ( ) button
located on the right side will be enabled. If the user selects this button, the system will
display Optimize for linear cut of parts window, where it will be possible to set the
following parameters: Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet and the
Separation of parts in millimeters.
 Optimize for chain cut: In order to optimize chain cutting, nesting will be done in columns
by parts of the same length. The system will apply special bridges between the parts so that
the parts remain in the sheet until the last vertical cut is executed. Once this option has
been selected, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will be enabled. If the user
selects this button, the system will display Optimize for chain cut window, where the user
will have to configure the following parameters:
 Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet: Here the user must introduce the
minimum height of the column by introducing a percentage. This percentage will be applied
to the sheet measures in order to calculate the value in question.
 Separation of parts: The separation of parts can be set either by the Default value, the
Cutter diameter (multiplied by a number) or a fixed Value. Remember that this separation
must be set in millimeters.
 Part time: The user will be provided with the following four options:
479
 Bridges automatically: If this parameter is enabled, the user can select between the
following two options:
 Bridge width parameter: This parameter will also be enabled. Here the user will be able to
select between The semi-separation of part, Cutter radius (multiplied by a number) and a
fixed Value. Remember that this separation must be set in millimeters.
 Squareness percentage: The user can introduce the required Squareness percentage that
will be used in the system to consider parts as rectangular. If a part does not reach the
percentage set, it will not be considered as rectangular.
 Optimize remnant of the last sheet: Thanks to his parameter, parts can be placed using the
minimum X in order to generate the best remnant possible. Usually, when there is a big job
which includes more than one sheet, this optimization is applied to the last sheet of the job.
 Calculation level: This field provides a drop-down list where the user can select between 0,
1, 2 and 3.
 Minimum usable area to insert parts in apertures: Whenever the area of a hole is big
enough, if possible, the system places parts inside them. In this field, the user can introduce
the minimum area required in order to consider a hole as valid for placing parts inside.
 Nesting for kits: This parameter allows prioritizing those parts that compose kits during the
automatic nesting execution. Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow ( ) button
located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the
system will display Nesting for kits window:
480
Figure 412: Nesting for kits window
 Mix different kits in same sheet: If this parameter is disabled, the system will wait until the
whole kit has been nested in order to start nesting the following kit. On the other hand, the
system will incorporate parts which belong to different kits in the same sheet.
 Use nestings of original kits as modules: Thanks to this parameter if a kit has already
nestings which are very efficient, given the case the measure of the existing sheets and the
number of parts allows it, the previous nestings will be used as modules.
 Part order in nesting: This parameter set how parts will be placed in the nesting. It provides a
drop-down list where the user will be able to select between the following options:
 By area: From the biggest area to the smallest area.
 By rectangular area: Based on external area.
 By perimeter: From the biggest perimeter to the smallest perimeter.
 By length: From the longest to the shortest.
 Group parts with similar order value: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will
prioritize those methods that introduce the highest number of big parts instead of the ones
that place small parts, regardless of their efficiency.
UNITARY
 Sheet margins: Here the user can introduce the required margins for the sheets. These
margins will ensure that the machine does not work outside the sheet as well as leaving
enough material so as to support the parts. The value must be introduced in millimeters.
481
 Ignore open contours: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will not take into
account an open contour (such as, for example, lead-ins) in order to estimate the sheet
required.
 Create the sheet in database: If enabled, whenever creating a new sheet for the unitary
nesting, the system will introduce the sheet in question in the database and therefore, it will
be displayed in the sheets list.
 Prompt for this data: If this parameter is enabled, the system will prompt a window asking
for this data whenever automatic nesting option is selected and prior to executing it so that
the user can select the required parameters in each case.
4.6.14.1.3 Automatic Machining

Refer to 1.24 Automatic Machining section located in this manual.
Draw and Nest
4.6.14.2.1 Auxiliar
Refer to 3.5.16.1.1. Auxiliar section.
4.6.14.2.2 Do All
Refer to 3.5.16.1.2. Do All section.
4.6.14.2.3 Print
Refer to 3.5.16.1.3. Print section.
4.6.14.2.4 Colors
Refer to 3.5.16.1.4. Colors section.
4.6.14.2.5 Display
Refer to 3.5.16.1.5. Display section.
482
Interface
Interface option enables the user to create a new toolbar and change the existing toolbar
1. Click Interface button and the system will display Customize dialog box as shown below:
Figure 413: Customize Quick access
 Quick access
 Hide options
 Shortcut Keys
 Ribbon
483
 In Hide options tab the user will be able to select between Basic, Advanced and Customized
Configurations. On the other hand, in Hide options section, the options available are Current
machine, Machines of same type and All machines.
Figure 414: Customize Hide options
484
Select an application and then introduce the key from the keyboard which the user wants to assign
as New Shortcut key for the previously selected application. Click Assign button and the selected key
will be assigned as shortcut key as well as visualized in Existing keys field. The user can also select an
existing shortcut key from the Existing keys field and click Delete button in order to remove it.
 In Ribbon tab the user can edit the view and the items provided in the Ribbon.
485
groups.
It is not possible to add two separators together, neither at the beginning nor at the end of the
group.
Warning window asking “Do you want to delete all ribbon customizations for this
486
Exit
Exit ( ) option allows abandoning the nesting and returning to the Main module. If the system
detects changes in the job, it will prompt for saving them.
Home
Sheets
New
If New ( ) option is selected, the system will display Sheet selection dialog box as shown below:
Figure 417: Sheet selection dialog box
This window displays the list of sheets applicable to the active job according to some defined
viewing criteria. Between the information displayed the user will find the length, width, quantity,
reference and required user data of the sheet, and will be able to know whether the sheet is a
remnant or it is blocked. In order to select a new sheet, double click on it or select it, click OK button,
and the system will open it.
487
OK button will be disabled if the number of the selected sheet is “0”.
 Add: With this button, the user can add quantities of a previously defined sheet. Just select
the sheet from the list, click the button and input the number of sheets to add.
 Remove: It removes a number of a previously defined sheet. For making this, select the sheet
from the list, click this button and input the number of sheets to subtract to the current
quantity. If the resulting quantity is 0, the system will delete the sheet from the database.
 Blocking: This option allows blocking and unblocking all the sheets of the corresponding
subjob.
If this option is selected, the system will display a window asking if the user wants to block or
unblock the sheets from the list (all sheets will be blocked or unblocked). This functionality is similar
to the one existing in the sheets management window of the Main Module.
It is also possible to carry out this action using a shortcut: pressing Control button while clicking on
the checkbox of a sheet to change its block status. This change will be applied on the rest of the
sheets.
 Create: This option creates a new sheet using the current job´s material and thickness. When
selected, the system will display Create and modify sheets dialog box as shown below:
Figure 418: Create and modify sheets dialog box
488
 Reference: This is the reference for the sheet. The system will show the name given here
always in the sheets list.
 Length and width: The system needs the length and width.
 Quantity: Add the quantity of sheets to include into the database.
 Priority/Block: The system provides two parameters to configure how each sheet will be
used in the automatic process (like in Do All). The user can assign a priority to the sheet.
Those whose priority value is higher will be used the first when doing the Do all process
automatically. If the sheet has been blocked, it will not be used in automatic processes until
is unblocked again. The previous data must be filled for creating the sheet.
 User data (1-3): Data of the sheet. It is possible to navigate to the existing Data list and
select the required element or enter a new element. The new element will be added in the
Data list for future use. Configure this field in Expert – Jobs (CAM) / Start menu /
Configuration / Identifiers tab.
The Current Sheet
4.7.1.2.1 The Current Sheet
By means of The current sheet ( ) option, all the active jobs, subjobs and order of the jobs of the
current sheet can be removed.
4.7.1.2.2 Every Sheet of the Subjob
By means of Every sheet of the subjob ( ) option, the user can delete every sheet of the subjob
that has been created.
4.7.1.2.3 Every Sheet of the Job
By means of Every sheet of the job ( ) option, the user can delete every sheet of the job that has
been created.
Assign Image
Whenever Assign image ( ) option is selected, the system will provide the following two options:
489
4.7.1.3.1 Assign Image
By means of Assign image ( ) option, the user will be able to assign an image to the sheet
background and to know exactly how is the surface where the parts will be nested. This way, the
user will be able to select the best areas, avoiding those that might be damaged.
Whenever this option is executed the system will ask the user to select the file of the image required
to be loaded. Once selected, the system will automatically adjust the size of the image to the sheet
dimensions. The user can re-execute this option as many times required changing the dimensions by
means of the different options provided in the panel, which allow scaling the image.
In addition, it is possible to modify the reference point required to be used to adjust the image to
the sheet. The user can select between the four corners of the sheet or use the same point defined
as FROM point.
4.7.1.3.2 Remove Image
By means of Remove image ( ) option, the user will be able to erase the image assigned to a
sheet.
Previous
With Previous ( ) option it is possible to go back to the previous sheet or remnant used in the
active job.
490
Next
With Next ( ) option it is possible to advance to the next sheet or remnant used in the active job.
Change Data
Change data ( ) option allows modifying the user data, margin and dimensions of the current
sheet, of all the sheets of the subjob or of all the sheets of the job. In order to do it, perform the
following steps:
1. Select Change data option and the system will display the following options:
Figure 419: Change data options
2. Select the required option to specify which sheets to change so that the system displays Change
data dialog box as shown below:
Figure 420: Change data dialog box
3. Introduce the required Length, Width and Remnant margin as well as User data and Description if
required.
4. Click OK button in order to save the modifications and Cancel button in order to discard them.
491
Change Quantity
Change Quantity ( ) option displays Number of sheets dialog box as shown below:
Figure 421: Number of sheets dialog box
This dialog box provides the current amount of sheets and the maximum amount that can be
assigned, depending on the number of sheets left to place and the number of sheets available in
stock. The user will specify the number of equal sheets, taking into account the specified maximum
limit.
If equal sheets can be done, the system will generate a CNC but will increase the times this CNC must
be done in the work sheet.
Click OK to save the changes and update the rest of the quantities.
Go to
Go to ( ) option allows going through the different sheet and remnants used in the active job. It
displays Sheet selection dialog box providing a list with all the sheets used as shown below:
492
 Display drawing: If enabled, the system will show the nesting of the selected sheet.
 New: By means of this option the user can insert a new sheet in the current job.
Nesting
Nesting menu includes the following options:
Do All
By means of Do all ( ) option, once a sheet has been selected and depending on the configuration
previously set on Automatic Nesting configuration, automatically performs all the jobs of the
manufacturing order. It will nest and machine all the parts of every job if the amount of sheets allows
it.
Active Subjob
Active subjob ( ) option allows performing the nesting and machining of the active subjob. If any
sheet was previously machined, the system will allow keeping the previous machining or recording
the previous machining.
493
One Sheet
4.7.2.3.1 One Sheet
By means of One sheet ( ) option, once a sheet has been selected and depending on the
configuration set on the Automatic nesting section of the machine configuration, the system will
insert into the sheet as many parts as possible.
4.7.2.3.2 Redo One Sheet
By means of Redo one sheet ( ) option, it is possible to redo a nesting that was already carried
out in a sheet. In order to enable this option, it is necessary to have at least one part in the sheet.
One Window
Thanks to One window ( ) option the user can perform a nesting inside a window. The system
defines a window from its upper-left and lower-right corners, and the system will make the nesting
of the parts inside. When selecting this option, the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 423: One window
The way this nesting will be done depends on the configuration of the following parameters:
 Type: Select between the following options:
 All: the system will use all the parts of the job for the nesting inside the window.
 Part selection: The system will make the nesting inside the window only with the selected
part.
494
 Nesting method: The user will have to configure here how the nesting will be done inside the
window:
 Rectangular
 True shape
 First point: When creating the window, the system needs two points (upper-left and lower-
right corners). Depending on the option here selected, the first point could be:
 Picked point
 Corner of the sheet
 Corner of the nesting
Unitary
By means of Unitary ( ) option, the system can create automatically sheet with the length of the
part’s exterior rectangle. When selected, the part list will be displayed and once one is selected, the
sheet will be automatically created with the part nested inside.
Delete
4.7.2.6.1 Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting parts nested on a sheet. In order to do it, the user will only have
to select the parts required to remove by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and
click Accept button.
4.7.2.6.2 Delete Every Part
Delete every part ( ) option allows removing all the parts from the current sheet, from all sheets
of the subjob or from all sheets of the job, without removing the sheets. In order to do it, select the
required option between:
 The current sheet
 Every sheet of the subjob
495
 Every sheet of the job
Once selected click OK button in order to delete the parts of the selected option.
Semi-Automatic
By means of Semi-automatic ( ) option, once the user has selected the job sheet, it is possible to
make the automatic nesting part by part every time this option is executed. With this method, the
user can follow the automatic nesting process enabling a better interaction with the parts
placement.
Place
Place ( ) option works like semi-automatic option, except for the fact that the user can select
which part to nest into the sheet. Once the sheet has been selected, the user will have to execute
the option from the menu o click Place button and then select the part to nest from the Part list
provided.
Grid
Grid ( ) option allows selecting the most similar sheet to the part size and placing it on the sheet.
Transform
Collisions
Collisions ( ) option enables and disables the part collision control for manual nesting. If
activated, the user will not be able to nest a part that overlaps an already nested one. The system will
respect the distance between parts in semiautomatic or manual nesting operations. Although the
user tries to place one part inside other, the system will move it until the correct distance.
Figure 424: Collisions example
496
Disabling Collisions control may be useful in cases like when the system does not place the part
automatically because it does not fit in the sheet due to the sheet margins.
Nesting for Common Cut

This option modifies the nesting process to allow automatic common placing of the parts in the
sheet. In order to work automatically properly, the user should configure the same settings on
Nesting for common cut and on Common cut and then execute Automatic nesting option. It is also
possible to place the parts manually on the sheet with Nesting for common cut enabled.
Multihead
Multihead ( ) option will display Multihead data dialog box as shown below:
Figure 425: Multihead data dialog box
The capabilities of each head are shown with the following icons:
The user must configure the number of enabled heads to use. If the icon near the number is in red
color , the system will use that head. The user can disable heads clicking on this icon so that it
becomes black .
The reference torch cannot be disabled.
497
 Automatic distances: If enabled, the system will calculate the optimal distances between
heads for the related nesting, then, in the report it will output them. Given the case it is
disabled; the user can manually introduce the distances. In order to make it easier, and if the
distance is fixed between heads, Equal distances button can be pressed after introducing one
value so that the rest of values are automatically filled in.
 Work with fixed number of heads: If this parameter is enabled, the system will perform the
nesting always trying to use all the active heads at the same time.
Copy
Copy ( ) option allows the user to copy a group of nested parts in a nesting. In order to do it
1. Select Copy option located in Transform menu and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required parts to be copied by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. The system will display Selection options dialog box where the user will have to select the desired
part. When clicking Accept button, Drag options will be displayed so as to move and copy this part.
Advance Copy
Advance copy ( ) option facilitates the copy of the parts of a sheet. The user will only have to
select the required parts to copy, and once the selection has been executed, it will be possible to
start copying. In the case of working without collisions, the system will ask for a point in order to
reference the selected parts. Depending on the Copy type selected, the dialog box displayed will
provide different parameters to fill in.
498
Figure 426: Copies dialog box
 Window: The copies of the selected parts will be place in a user-defined window. If selected,
the following parameters will be activated:
 Visualize: When drawing the rectangle, the system will show the possible result in every
moment if this option is enabled.
 Copy by rectangles: Enabled, the distances will be the separation between the minimal
rectangles of the parts.
 Horizontal and vertical separation: These are the separation between parts that will be
used when making the copies. The meaning of these values will change depending on the
parameter.
 Copy with the part technology on sheet: Using this option, the copies will be made
including the applied technology to the original parts (leads, micro joints, etc.).
 Copy with the part machining on sheet: If this has been enabled, the copies will be made
including the machining.
 Multiple: After selecting the parts to copy the user should point with the mouse where to
place the copies or input the coordinates.
499
 Grid: The user can make copies of the selected parts in a grid disposition starting from the
initial part position, going in the copy direction and making the horizontal and vertical
specified copies (limited by the number of available parts.).
 Copy direction: Select the required copy direction from the drawing provided below.
 Copy by rectangles: Enabled, the distances will be the separation between the minimal
rectangles of the parts.
 Horizontal and vertical copies: Introduce the required number of copies to perform both
horizontally and vertically.
If the Horizontal and Vertical copies value is 0, the system will insert as many parts as possible
until arriving to the sheet limits and there are available parts.
 Horizontal and vertical separation: These are the separation between parts that will be
used when making the copies. The meaning of these values will change depending on the
parameter.
 Multihead: If the machine has been configured as multihead, this option will be enabled. The
system will try to make copies using the maximum number of heads possible.
 Copy direction: The user will have to select between the two copy directions available.
500
 Number of heads: Introduce the number of heads to use.
 Distance between heads: Introduce the required distance between the heads.
 Number of columns: Write down the number columns required.
 Distance between columns: Introduce the required distance between the columns
 Copy with the part technology on sheet: If this has been enabled, the copies will be made
including the technology.
Place Near
From Place near ( ) option the user can access to different manual nesting possibilities which
allow attaching a part to a group of parts with other parts in a specific way. When selected the
system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 427: Place near options
: This option attaches the source and target elements in parallel mode. The system will ask for
the distance between the initial and final elements.
: This option attaches the source and the target elements in perpendicular mode. The system
will prompt for the distance between both elements.
501
: This option is a generalization of the two previous ones. It allows attaching source to a target
element but not only with parallel or perpendicular motion. It literally attaches the top-bottom or
right-left area of the source elements to the top-bottom or right-left area of the target element.
When the user selects the initial and final elements, it is also very important to click the required side
of the geometry. The system will prompt for the distance.
: By means of this option the user can attach two parts, in case of from the sides, it will take
into account the clicked points. In this case, the system will not only get the sides, it will use the
clicked points and the distance given by the user in order to move the parts.
: This option allows attaching a circular element to two target elements that are
perpendicular. This can be done establishing the initial and final element. The user will have to select
the required parts, the tangent element and introduce the distance value.
: This option attaches the imaginary lower-left vertex of the minimum rectangle of the part to
a defined point. The user will have to select the parts required to lean and the destination point.
Move
Move ( ) option allows moving and rotating a group of parts previously nested in a sheet. In order
to move a group of parts perform the following steps:
1. Select Move option located in Transform menu and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required group of parts by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. Select the Reference point by means of the Moving options provided by the system.
4. Select the Insertion point using the mouse and the Dragging options and click Accept button one
more time. The group of parts will be successfully moved.
Fit
Fit ( ) option adjusts a nesting to one of the sides of a sheet. The user must select the side of the
sheet where the adjusting will take place by clicking with the mouse near to the required side. The
nesting will be automatically adjusted to the selected side.
502
Margins
Margins ( ) option allows temporarily deactivating the use of sheet margins when the user
makes a manual nesting of parts. This utility can be useful in case the nesting is better when
exceeding the established margins.
If the user deactivates the use of margins, these margins will disappear and the user will be able to
nest parts exceeding them. When the use of margins is activated again, the system will use the
values that were configured before in the current sheet.
 The user is responsible to make sure that the sheet can be cut without any problem when
exceeding margins.
The use of margins will always be active by default and its deactivation will be temporary: it will not
be saved with the sheet and it will be automatically active when changing sheet or subjob. Besides, it
will be automatically reactivated when making an automatic nesting. The use of margins will always
be active when accessing the Nesting and Machining module.
Remnants
Create Remnant
Create remnant ( ) option generates remnants automatically depending on the configuration

previously made on the machine’s sheet remnant configuration section.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting the remnants generated in a sheet. In order to do it, the user
must select the remnants required to erase by means of Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
Configure
Configure ( ) option the user can configure the parameters of a machine’s Remnant data
section. When the machining of a sheet only takes up a small part of the total area (which normally
happens with the last sheet of a nest) sometimes there is a piece of the sheet the user is interested
503
in keeping for future use, which is referred as a remnant. The system can automatically generate
these remnants and manage them in the database. When selecting Configure option the system will
display Sheet Remnants dialog box as shown below:
Figure 428: Sheet Remnants dialog box
 Generate remnants when you save: Enabling this function, the system will automatically
generate a remnant for the current sheet when saving. There are two ways to generate a
remnant. The first one is to use the original sheet taking away the machined areas. The
second method adds one or more cut lines creating remnants for the remaining areas.
 Generate remnants with the completed sheets: The system will keep on the database the
whole sheet after cutting the parts. Sometimes this is useful if the sheet has been machined
with a few parts and is better not to cut it for remnants. The user can get this sheet for
nesting and machining more parts taking advantage of the remaining space of the sheet.
 Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: This function allows generating
remnants following the options shown in the bitmaps. Each option will generate different
number of remnants with different remnant shapes as well.
504
Figure 429: Cutting line types
Regarding the remnant shape, the system decides what kind of remnant will create depending on
the area value.
All the shapes and cutting lines depend on the values of the offset between the parts and the lines,
the minimum width of hollows and the minimum area of the remnant.
 Minimum X and Minimum Y: The system will not create a smaller remnant than the configure
values for X and Y. If the remnant is smaller, the system will use these values to create the
remnant. This option is only valid for the 6 firsts options on the menu.
 Offset between the parts and the line: This value will determine the distance between the
remnant's cutting line and every part nested on the sheet.
 Minimum width: The value of this parameter is the minimum allowed for using a little space
of the sheet which is between parts in the limit of the remnant's cutting line.
 Round the remnant line and Radius: With this option the user can round the remnant line
automatically when it is generated. The first parameter allows to active this option and the
second one asks the value for the round radius. This option is also available for combined
machines.
 Delete the remnant area around parts: With this parameter disabled, the system will use as
remnant any area of the sheet including those which are inside parts like holes. If the user
doesn't want to use these areas, this parameter must be enabled.
 Minimum area of remnants: The value of this parameter is going to be used to generate
remnants always bigger that the given square meters.
 Consider the auxiliary geometry: If this check is deactivated remnants will be generated
without considering auxiliary geometry. On the other hand, if it is activated remnants will be
generated taking into account auxiliary geometry. This option is configurable so it creates a
contour on auxiliary rectangular geometry so that:
505
 0: The base has a value 10 times linear tolerance.
 Cutter diameter: The base has this value.
 Remnants can be rotated: The remnant will be generated as configured, but with this
parameter enabled, the system will look for the best position of the remnant for placing the
cutting head (from-point) of the machine into the sheet.
 Allow turning over the remnant: If enabled, the system will allow mirroring the remnant
when it comes to loading the sheet remnant in the machine.
 Prompt for references when generating remnants: The system generates a reference
automatically for each remnant. But if this checkbox is enabled, at the moment of generating
a new remnant from the sheet, the system will ask for the reference.
Draw the Edge

Draw the edge ( ) option allows drawing a polylines using dots and arcs in order to limit the
remnant. The polylines must start and finish in the external area of the sheet so that the remnant is
valid. It must also meet some requirements such as minimum area and not trespassing the cutting
margins of the parts. In order to draw the edge, perform the following steps:
1. Select Draw the edge option located in Remnants menu and the system will display Remnant line
drawing options as shown below:
Figure 430: Remnant line drawing options
2. Define it as a dot, as an arc or as a dynamic remnant line.

3. Given the case the remnant line is defined by dots or arcs, follow the instructions given in the status
bar.
4. If Dynamic remnant line option is selected, the system will display Sheet Remnants window, where
the user will have to introduce the following values:
506
Figure 431: Sheet remnants dialog box
 Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
 Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge of
the sheet.
 Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not.
 Horizontal
 Vertical
5. Click Finish option so that the system considers the created line as valid.
Draw the Exact Edge

Draw the exact edge ( ) option enables the user creating a remnant line between parts in
semiautomatic. The remnant is created drawing manually cutting lines between the gaps created
when cutting the parts.
The first and last point of the remnant must be placed out of the sheet. In each part there must be
two points defined, the entry point and exist point.
Automatic Edge
Automatic edge ( ) option creates the cutting line of the remnant automatically depending on the
configuration previously set on the machine’s sheet remnant configuration section.
507
Delete the Edge

Delete the edge ( ) option removes all remnant lines generated in the sheets, if they are not
machined. If the remnant has already been generated, the correct option to delete it is Delete
Remnant.
Remnant Reference
Remnant reference ( ) option allows defining the reference points of the remnant to place on the
machine.
Rotate Remnants
Rotate remnants ( ) option allows flipping a remnant in X or Y axis or rotating it in a defined angle,
which must be multiple of 90º. When selected the system will display Rotate remnants dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 432: Rotate remnants dialog box
Select the Rotation type and click OK button.
In order to be able to execute this action, the sheet must be a remnant and it cannot contain
geometry, otherwise the option will be disabled.
Review
Time and Cost
When selecting Time and cost ( ) option the system will display the dialog box shown below
where the user will be able to visualize the following data:
508
Figure 433: Machine Time and Cost
The user will be provided with the Machine hourly rate, Employee hourly rate, Total time and Cost of
material between other information. The user will get the Cost of material, Cost of machine time,
Employee cost, Cost of consumables and Total cost of the Markup, Sheet, Remnant and Scrap. The
provided quantity and manufactured quantity of each part will be provided together with the time
required. The system will also provide the sheet reference along with its length, width, quantity and
CNC. The user will be able to visualize a drawing of the sheet by activating the check provided.
Between the options available the user will be able to print the part, sheet, part list and sheet list as
well as being able to Create a quotation.
Export Data
Export Data ( ) option allows exporting information from the system to an Excel document. The
information that the user can export is the one related to the time and cost calculation of the
nestings and parts of the current job. This option is protected.
The user will select the template that will be used to export the data, and will define the data to
export as well as an Excel document that will work as a template to define where and how the data
will be exported.
509
When executing the option, the Excel document that works as template will be copied on a directory
and name specified by the user, and the information will be exported on this document copy. By
default, the name will be the one of the current job. If the file already exists in this directory of the
system, the system will ask whether the user wants to overwrite it or not.
Information related to all the parts and nestings or just the one related to the subjob or the
current sheet can be exported.
At the end of the option execution, an Excel program will be displayed to visualize or modify the
generated document.
Figure 434: Export Data dialog box
Figure 435: Excel document example
510
Figure 436: Excel document example 2
4.7.5.2.1 Templates Creation

Apart from the templates defined in the installation (Directory Reports\Export), it is possible to
create customized templates by the user.
In order to do that, the user has to carry out the following steps:
1. Create an Excel file where the design, the format and the formulas the user wants to apply when
exporting information are specified.
2. Create a XML file (cfgx extension) where the information the user wants to export, the
spreadsheet and the cell where each data will be exported are defined.
3. The information that can be exported is the same as the data used by the user when it is defined
the workshop sheet in the nesting printing (Technical documentation: Printing parts and nestings
in boxes).
4. To be able to use the new template it is required to include the references in the following XML
where the template, ExpExcel.cfgx. This new template is placed in the installation folder in
Reports/Export.
511
Access to Points
Access to Points ( ) menu helps the user selecting the particular point required. When selected
the system will display the following drop-down list providing the options detailed below:
Figure 437: Points options
512
 Default snap mode: Go back to the previous snap mode.
View Geometry
View Geometry ( ) option visualizes the measurements of the geometry. The system will display
Selection options toolbar in order to select the required geometry. Once selected click Accept button
and View geometry dialog box will be displayed as shown below:
Figure 438: View geometry dialog box
The dialog box provides the Type of geometry, Point o-ordinates, Number of segments, Number of
circles, Number of arcs, Number of lines, Number of points and Total of segments all of them together
with their Perimeter value. The user will also be able to print all these data by means of Print button.
Distances & Angle
Distances & Angle ( ) button allows visualizing the distance and angle measurements between
two selected points as follows:
1. Click Distances and Angles button and then mark the first point.
513
2. Move the cursor till the desired point and mark the second point. The system will display Review -
Distance and Angle panel on the right side:
Figure 439: Distance and angle dialog box
 D: The distance between the two marked points. It is not possible to edit this field.
 X: The horizontal distance between the two marked points. It is not possible to edit this field.
 Y: The vertical distance between the two marked points. It is not possible to edit this field.
 W: The angle at which the second point is marked with respect to the X. It is not possible to
edit this field.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
514
Angle Between Three Points
Angle between three points ( ) button allows the user to view the angles of three points as
follows:
1. Click Angle between three points button and then mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired points and mark the second and third points. The system will
display Angle between three points dialog box as shown below:
Figure 440: Angle between three points dialog box
3. It is possible to view the interior angle of the three points in ‘a1’ field and the exterior angle of the
three points in ‘a2’ field.
4. Select Cancel button in order to close the dialog box.
Orthogonal
Orthogonal
Orthogonal ( ) option draws vertical and horizontal geometries by means of the Dragging
toolbar. This application is active until clicking this again to disable it.
Press F2 button in order to enable or disable this option.
Macros
Macros ( ) option enables the creation, deletion and execution of application macros. A macro is
an option that enables the sequential execution of several options of the system. This option is
available in Drawing and Nesting and Machining modules. The created macros will only be useful for
515
the module in which they have been created. Macros option contains a drop-down list that displays
the existing macros of the system plus the following two options:
 Macro creation: Click Record a macro and all the options clicked afterwards will form part of
the macro. The order will be defined during the options selection. To stop recording click
Stop recording or press Escape.
 Macro edition: Click Macro and the system will display a window that shows the existing list
of macros with the options corresponding to each. A macro can be created, deleted or
executed from this window.
 Macro execution: In order to execute a Macro, click on Macro drop-down list and select
Macro or execute from edition window. It is possible to add buttons to the options ribbon or
quick access bars. When executing a macro:
 By pressing ESC, the option in execution will stop and the next will be executed.
 By executing another option macro execution will stop.
 By pressing Return when the macro finishes, it will be executed again.
Technology
Lead-in/Lead-outs
Automatic
Automatic ( ) option places a Lead-in/Lead-out automatically in the part.
Figure 441: Automatic Lead-in/lead-outs example
516
Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes the Lead-in/Lead-outs by selection. In order to do it perform the

following steps:
1. Click Delete option and the system will display Selection Toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out to delete by means of the options provided and click Accept
3. The selected lead-in/lead-out will be deleted.
Semi-Automatic
Semi-automatic ( ) option places a Lead-in/Lead-out semiautomatically in the part. When selected

the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 442: Semi-automatic Lead-in/Lead-out
Select the required option and click OK button in order to place the lead-in/lead-outs in the selected
parts.
Configure Automatic
Configure automatic ( ) option configures the parameters of the automatic Lead-in/Lead-outs.

The system will show Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box:
517
Figure 443: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box
The position of the lead, the type of leads to use depending on the different contours and all the
distances must be configured. Find the different fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly
described below:
configuring different values for the lead-in/lead-out when using the automatic assignation. If
enabled, the window will show twelve tabs which are related to each of the twelve available
cutting qualities.
first for placing the lead. It is possible to select different position for exterior contours of
parts and for holes.
518
There are different kinds of contours which system can distinguish. In the following table, there are
two examples for each contour type. All the geometries on red color are those on which the selected
lead-in/out type will be applied:
Figure 444: Contour types
 Modify: By means of this option the user can assign a different lead-in/lead-out for each
contour type. The first type will not assign any lead-in/lead-out to the contour. When selected
519
the system will display Lead-in/lead-out values dialog box as shown below, where the user
will have to specify some particular dimension values per each lead-in/lead-out.
 Piercing radius: This option allows the user to define the piercing radius depending on
quality, thickness, and material. The new radii will replace all the previous piercing radii.
These values can be defined depending on the default piercing radius, as a percentage of it,
or as an absolute value. When one of those values changes, the other value will be updated.
 Lead-in and lead-out minimum length: It is used when the Overlapping test parameter is
enabled with the Shorten option. It defines the minimum length that a lead-in or lead-out can
have when one of them is shortened due to the overlapping.
 Constraints: This describes about the basic parameters/constraints for all the elements of
lead-in and lead-out that are to be placed. When selected the system will display Automatic
Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box as shown below:
520
Figure 446: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box
Introduce the required data and click OK button.
 Change position in sheet: This option allows the user to change the position of the lead-in or
lead-out in the sheet. There are three options: No, Along the cutting sequence, and Avoiding
the oxycut effect.
 Along the cutting sequence: The leads-in/leads-out is modified by selecting this option.
They are placed in the nearest hole in order to avoid them. At the same time, it is also
possible to select only for inside or only for inside and outside option.
 Avoid the oxycut effect: It works as the interrogation mark option. This option places the
lead-ins/leads-out to avoid the warming heating of sheet.
 Overlapping test: It is possible to configure checking the overlaps in the automatic lead-ins.
This test will take into account if there will be a pre-punching or a cycle in order to know if
the lead-in is overlapped or not. In case of overlapping, the system will perform the action
previously selected between the following:
 Shorten: The lead-in/lead-out geometry will be shorten trying to avoid the overlapping. The
value is the maximum shortening allowed.
 Change position: The lead-in/lead-out will be placed in other position, and system will try as
different positions as the number given on Number of attempts.
 Change position and shorten: This solution is a combination of the previous. The system
will try on each position to short the lead-in/lead-out geometries and if this not solved the
overlapping, will change the position.
521
 Change quality: In this case, system will try changing the cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-
out. With this, the configuration for lead-in/lead-out will change getting the values
configured of the new cutting quality.
 Change position and quality: On each position, the system is going to try to change the
cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-out, and if not, change position as many times as
specified attempts.
 Change position, quality and shorten: For each position, the system will try changing the
cutting quality, and shorten the lead-in/lead-out on each position, and if the problem
persists, change position as many times as the value given.
 Change quality and shorten: First, the quality will be changed and if still there are overlaps,
the lead-in/lead-out geometries will be shortened.
 Shortening: This parameter determines the size percentage of the lead-in/lead-out required
to be shortened.
 Number of attempts: Introduce the required number of attempts for the system to perform
the selected Overlapping test.
 Copy: Because there are 12 possible cutting qualities, the same parameters must be
configured many times. To make the data entry easier, system provides this button which
permits to copy the automatic lead-in/lead-out configuration from existing cutting quality
values.
Lead-in/Lead-outs
By means of the following options the user can introduce different lead-in/lead-outs to the parts.
Depending on the Lead-in/lead-out type selected the user will have to introduce different data, given
that the dimensions of each type are different.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 1 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in/Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 2 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 3 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
522
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 4 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 5 ( ): Inclined Lead-in/Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 6 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 7 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 8 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 9 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 10 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on outer corner.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 11 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end path.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 12 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end parallel path.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 13 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on inner corner.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 14 ( ): Special Lead-in/Lead-outs for circular holes.
 Dynamic Lead-in/Lead-outs ( ): Lead-in/Lead-outs by rubber band.
 Custom lead-in/lead-outs ( ): Select this option to introduce a customized lead-in/lead-out.
 Put the Lead-in/Lead-outs in bisector ( ): It puts the Lead-in/Lead-outs in bisector.
 Configuration ( ): It configures the parameters of the Lead-in/lead-outs. The system will

show Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box:
523
1. Here the user will be able to modify the provided parameters as per your requirements and set
them by means of OK button located at the bottom of the window.
 Move point of lead-in or lead-out ( ): It allows moving the point of a Lead-in or Lead-out.
 Put the lead-out like the lead-in ( ): It puts the Lead-out in the direction of the Lead-in.
 Modify tangent arc lead-in by 2 segments ( ): It modifies the tangent arc Lead-in by two
segments.
 Add element ( ): It adds an element to the Lead-in or Lead-out. The system will display
Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box as shown below:
Figure 448: Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box
Here the user will have to select which element or elements to include as well as the direction and
length. Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes and introduce
the new elements.
Micro-Joints
Automatic
Automatic ( ) option inserts micro-joints automatically in the nesting.
Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes the selected micro-joints from the nesting. In order to do it perform the
following steps:
524
1. Click Delete option and the system will display Selection Toolbar.
2. Select the required micro-joint(s) to delete by means of the options provided and click Accept
3. The selected micro-joints will be deleted.
Semi-Automatic
Semi-automatic ( ) option places micro-joints semiautomatically by selecting the required parts of

the nesting. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Select Semi-automatic option.

2. Select the required micro-joint.
3. Place manually with the mouse the required micro-joints in the parts.
Configure Automatic
Configure automatic ( ) option configures the parameters of the automatic micro-joints. The
system will display Automatic Micro-joints values dialog box as shown below:
Figure 449: Automatic micro-joint values dialog box
 Micro-joint types: These are all the micro-joints the system supports automatically. For each
one, there are some parameters to configure as shown on the graphs. Enter D, A, S, and
Radius parameters for lead-ins and lead-outs.
525
 Circles angle: This value is used for system to test positions for placing micro-joints. The
point. For example, if the value is 90, the system will try first the clicked point for placing
micro-joint, then 0, 90, 180, 270 degrees’ position from the first point.
 Distance between micro-joints: This is the minimum distance, the system will not allow to
place one micro-joint at a distance lower than this value.
 Minimum and maximum number of micro-joints for each contour: Using this option, if the
contour has a very big perimeter and the maximum number of micro-joints has been added,
the system will distribute the micro joints halfway (without taking care to the minimum
separation).
If the contour is small and the micro joints are too close, the system will redefine them and will
locate them halfway on the contour. These parameters may affect to machine general configuration
and material-thickness dependent data.
Available Micro-joints
The available micro-joints are the following:
 Micro-Joints 1: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on corner.
 Micro-Joints 2: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint on corner.
 Micro-Joints 3: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint.
 Micro-Joints 4: It introduces an inclined micro-joint.
 Micro-Joints 5: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the right side.
 Micro-Joints 6: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the left side.
Move Point of Lead-in or Lead-out of a Micro-joint
Move point of lead-in or lead-out of a micro-joint ( ) option allows moving the point of a micro
joint. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Click Move point of micro-joint button and select the lead-in/lead-out required to change.
2. Move the cursor till the desired point and mark it.
526
3. The new point of the lead-in/lead-out will be places at the selected point.
Transform to Geometry
Transform to geometry ( ) option converts the selected micro-joints to geometry by means of the
selection bar. Perform the following steps:
1. Click Transform to geometry button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required micro-joint to convert by means of the options provided and click Accept
button.
3. The selected micro-joints will be converted to geometry.
Configure
Configure ( ) option configures the parameters of the micro-joints. The system will display Micro-
joints Values dialog box:
Figure 450: Micro-joints values dialog box
Introduce the required values in the fields provided and click OK button to save the changes.
Loops
Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes loops by selection. The system will display Selection toolbar in order to
select the loop required to erase. Select it by means of the options provided and click Accept button
so that it is deleted.
527
Semi-Automatic
Semi-automatic ( ) option introduces loops semiautomatically in the parts. Select the point(s)
where the loop is required and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 451: Semi-automatic loops
Select between the options given and click OK button, so that the system introduces the loop in the
selected points of the parts.
Loop 1
Loop 1 ( ) option introduces straight loops in the selected parts. Click this option and select a
corner in order to introduce loops to a closed geometry with sides.
Loop 2
Loop 2 ( ) option introduces circular loops in the selected parts. Click this option and then select a
corner in order to introduce a curved loop to a closed geometry with sides.
Configuration
Configuration ( ) option configures the parameters of the loops. The system will display the
following window:
528
Figure 452: Loop values dialog box
Introduce the required value for each type of loop and click OK button to save the information.
Bridges
Automatic
Automatic ( ) option places bridges automatically on the nesting. Bridges will be of the
previously selected type. The parameters that will be used are configured on the Bridge values
section of the machine configuration.
Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes the selected bridges of the nesting. The system will display Selection
options in order to select the bridges required to erase. Once selected click Accept button located in
the same toolbar and the bridges will be deleted.
Semi-Automatic
Semi-automatic ( ) option places bridges automatically on the selected parts of the nesting. It
allows connecting the selected parts on the sheet as follows:
1. Select Semi-automatic option and click the parts on the sheets required to join.
2. Right click on the selected parts to join them with a bridge.
529
Bridge 1
Bridge 1 ( ) option introduces a negative bridge. It defines a bridge in such a way that the
machined part is completely cut. The area of the part where the bridge is defined is machined twice
which is a drawback. Select this option and click the parts required to join, and the system will
introduce the bridge.
Bridge 2
Bridge 2 ( ) option introduces a positive bridge, which keeps the two parts joined after the
machining. Select this option and click the parts required to join, and the system will introduce the
bridge.
Configure
Configure ( ) configures the parameters of the bridges. The system will show Bridge Values dialog
box:
Figure 453: Bridge values dialog box
 a distance: This is the length of the bridge between parts.
530
 Maximum length: This value is the maximum distance allowed to create a bridge between
contours.
 On corners: The bridges will be applied on the parts corners. In the example provided below
there are bridges on corners that allow making all the machining without raising the head:
Figure 454: Bridges on corners example
 Bridge type: There are two possibilities, free and orthogonal. The last one will force the
bridge to be always with straight lines although the clicked coordinates are not orthogonal
between them:
Figure 455: Bridge types
Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save the changes.
Cut Technology
Delete
This option deletes an assigned cut technology as follows:
1. Click Delete ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
531
2. Select the assigned cut technology required to delete by means of the options provided and click
Accept button provided in the same toolbar.
3. The cut technology assigned to the selected element will be erased.
Type of Cut
Type of cut ( ) option allows the user to introduce different technologies to cut a part. When
pointed, the system will display the following dialog box providing the different types of cut
technologies that can be assigned:
Figure 456: Type of cut
The user will be able to select between Oxycut, Plasma, High definition plasma, Laser and Water. Once
selected click OK button in order to apply it.
Marking
This option assigns marking technology to a part as follows:
1. Select Marking ( ) option and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 457: Marking technology
2. Click on the drop-down list provided in Technology field, select between Powder, Drill, Pen or Cut
and click OK button.
532
Figure 458: Marking technology, Make on
4. Select the required option and click OK button.

5. The selected marking technology will be assigned to the selected element(s).
Cut Technology
This option assigns cutting technology of a specified quality to a part as follows:
1. Select Cutting ( ) button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 459: Cutting qualities
2. Select the required type of Cutting quality.

3. When selecting Modify button the system will display Tables of technology dialog box. Here the
user will be able to include, modify or delete the material, thickness and other details. Click OK
button in order to save the changes.
4. The system will display a dialog box where the user will have to select where to apply the changes.
533
5. Select the required option and click OK button.

6. The cutting technology of the specified quality will be assigned to the selected geometry extension.
No Cut
In order to assign No Cut technology to a required geometry, perform the following steps:
1. Click No Cut ( ) button and the system will display Selection options toolbar.
2. Select the extension to which the user wants to apply No cut by means of the options provided and
click Accept button in order to apply it.
3. Right double-click or select Finish option located in the same toolbar in order to finish the
execution of the option.
Text
Find detailed below the different options available under Text section.
Marked Text
Whenever Marked Text ( ) option is selected, the system will display Text definition dialog box as
shown below:
534
1. Introduce the required information in the following fields:
 Text: The text that is assigned. The navigation button provided on the right will display
Text definition dialog box:
On the left hand side of the previous window, the user will find a list with all the Available fields. In
order to mark and define the order of the fields, the user will have to move them to the list located in
the right side called Ordered fields by means of the arrow buttons located in the middle.
The possible types of fields are grouped into the following groups:
 General: It is possible to mark a fixed text, line break or index. The last one will be a text
with a value that will be increased per each part placed in the sheet. The initial value of the
index and number of characters may be configured, as well as if the index is different per
type of part or sheet.
 Time: It is possible to mark the year, month, week and current day, so that the current date
can be marked on the part.
 Part: It is possible to mark those fields related to the part.
 Sheet: It is possible to mark the sheet reference, description and identifiers. The part will
have a different mark text depending on the sheet in which the part is located. In case of
535
working with sheet inventory, it will be possible to mark the information related to the
inventory, such as the tracking number of the sheet.
 Nesting: It is possible to mark the reference or the quantity of the nesting. The part will
have a different mark text depending on the nesting in which it is located.
 Job: It is possible to mark the fields related to the job.
 Size: The font size of the text.
 Orientation: The angle value of the text.
 Technology: The type of technology to mark the text. You can select the required type from
the drop-down list.
 Automatic separation between characters: It indicates whether or not the separation

distance between the character is set automatically. If this check box is not selected, then
the system displays “Horizontal separation between characters” field.
 Horizontal separation between characters: The distance value between characters.
 Thickness: Thickness value of the text. When you enter the thickness value, the system
allows you select the required style for the text. When you select the last two styles, then the
system displays ‘Continuous text’ check box.
 Continuous text: It indicates whether or not continuous style for the text is included. If the
navigation button located on the right side is selected, the system will display Continuous
text dialog box as shown below:
Figure 461: Continuous text dialog box
536
Here the user will have to fill in % Text size (D) and Angle (W) fields. When you select this checkbox,
the system will allow selecting the navigation button in this field to introduce the continuous text
size and angle value for the text.
 Fonts directory: The path of the text font. The user can select navigation button in this field
to select the required directory.
2. In Make on section, indicate in which element is required to insert the text:
 Sheet: The text can be introduced in any position and will not be related to neither a part nor
a remnant. In the case the sheet is erased, the text will also be erased.
 Remnant: The text will be introduced in a remnant and will, therefore, be related to it. Given
the case the remnant is erased; the text will also be erased. Since it is related to the remnant,
the text can indicate data such as reference, length, width, area, weight, material and
thickness. However, the text can also be composed of other fields not related to the
remnant. The system will ask the user to select the point where the text must be inserted. If
the point in question is not located inside a remnant, a system error will occur.
 Part: The text will be introduced in a part and will, consequently, be related to it. Given the
case the part is erased, the text will also be erased. Since it is related to the remnant the text
can indicate data such as reference, length, width, area, weight, material and thickness.
However, the text can also be composed of other fields not related to the remnant such as
general data of the time, sheet, nesting and job.
 The selected part / Identical parts with the same angle / All identical parts: These options
will ask the user to select the point where the text must be inserted and depending on the
option, the text will be introduced in the corresponding parts.
3. Once the required values have been introduced click OK button. The marked text will be displayed.
4. Mark the insertion point and the text will be inserted. The system will also display Move toolbar to
move the text.
537
Written Text
Written text ( ) option allows introducing a written text. The system will display the following
dialog box:
1. Introduce the required information in the following fields:
 Font: Font of the text. Click on the navigation button of this field and the system will display
Font dialog box to select the required font.
 Text: The text that is assigned.
 Orientation: The angle value of the text.
 Vectorize: Enable this checkbox in order to vectorize the text. Once enabled, Number of
tracts for the Beizer curves and Technology fields will become enabled.
2. In Make on section, indicate in which element is required to insert the text:
 Sheet: The text can be introduced in any position and will not be related to neither a part nor
a remnant. In the case the sheet is erased, the text will also be erased.
 Remnant: The text will be introduced in a remnant and will, therefore, be related to it. Given
the case the remnant is erased; the text will also be erased. Since it is related to the remnant,
538
the text can indicate data such as reference, length, width, area, weight, material and
thickness. However, the text can also be composed of other fields not related to the
remnant. The system will ask the user to select the point where the text must be inserted. If
the point in question is not located inside a remnant, a system error will occur.
 Part: The text will be introduced in a part and will, consequently, be related to it. Given the
case the part is erased, the text will also be erased. Since it is related to the remnant the text
can indicate data such as reference, length, width, area, weight, material and thickness.
However, the text can also be composed of other fields not related to the remnant such as
general data of the time, sheet, nesting and job.
 The selected part / Identical parts with the same angle / All identical parts: These options
will ask the user to select the point where the text must be inserted and depending on the
option, the text will be introduced in the corresponding parts.
3. Once the required values have been introduced click OK button. The text will be displayed on the
part.
4. Mark the insertion point and the text will be inserted. The system will also display Move toolbar to
move the text.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows the user erasing any of the marked texts and written texts previously
introduced. The system will display the Selection options so that the user selects the required text to
erase.
Machining
Machining
Machine All
4.9.1.1.1 Machine All
Machine all ( ) option allows machining automatically all the nested parts of all the sub-jobs as
follows:
539
1. Click Machine All option and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 463: Existent machining management
2. Select the required machining management type between the Existing machining management
options:
 Select Keep the machining to retain the machining for the existing machined parts and
machine only those parts that are not machined.
 Select Remake the machining to machine all the parts of all the subjobs including the existing
machined parts.
3. The system will display Machining initialization dialog box and set the required initialization
parameters and click Finish. The parts on all the sheets of all the subjobs will be machined.
4.9.1.1.2 Machine Active Subjob
Machine Active Subjob ( ) allows the user machining automatically all the nested parts on the
sheets of a selected subjob as follows:
1. Click Machine Active subjob option and the system will display Existent machining management
dialog box, as in the previous option.
2. Select the required machining management type between the Existing machining management
options:
 Select Keep the machining to retain the machining for the existing machined parts and
machine only those parts that are not machined.
 Select Remake the machining to machine all the parts of all the subjobs including the existing
machined parts.
540
3. The system will display Machining initialization dialog box and set the required initialization
parameters and click Finish. The parts on all the sheets of the active subjob will be machined.
Automatic
By means of Automatic ( ) option the part will be automatically machined. The machining will be
carried out depending of the options previously configured in Automatic Machining section of the
Machine configuration.
Copy Machining of a Part
 Insert label begin ( ): With this option the user can place a begin label in the desired
machining position.
 Insert label end ( ): With this option the user can place an end label in the desired
machining position.
 Copy machining of a part ( ): With this option the system will copy the machining of the
selected part (if any) to the desired parts. Select a part and the system will display Copy
machining dialog box as shown below:
Figure 464: Copy machining dialog box
 Make on: The selection of this parameter determines in which positions of the clicked part
will be copied the machining: on The selected part, Identical parts with the same angle, or
All identical parts (no matter if they are rotated or not).
541
 Retain the existing machining: Enabled, the system will leave already machined contours of
the parts. It will just copy the machining of the contours that were not machined when the
option has been selected.
 Copy machining of a set of parts ( ): This option will copy more than one part's
machining. For example, if there are two manually machined parts, the user can copy the
machining of them into the others parts:
Figure 465: Copy machining of a set of parts example
As with the previous option, the user can keep the existing machining if required.
Regenerate
Regenerate ( ) option erases all the machining of the parts including the technology geometries:
leads, microjoints, loops, bridges, etc. But the nesting will be kept allowing to start the machining
from the beginning again.
Delete Instructions
In order to erase the desired machining instructions, perform the following steps:
1. Select Delete Instructions ( ) button located in Machining menu.
The image here displayed will correspond to the last option used from the list provided below.
2. Select between the following options:
 Delete current instruction ( ): The current instruction will be erased.
 Delete machining by selection ( ): The user must select the machining to delete.
542
 Delete machining by selection of geometry ( ): The system will display the Selection
options to help the user select which geometry machining is required to be deleted.
 Delete machining of selected parts ( ): The system will display the Selection options to help
the user select which part machining is required to be deleted.
 Delete from-to ( ): The system will display Instruction list dialog box so that the user
selects the instruction or instructions to delete. It will just be necessary to select it/them and
click on OK button.
 Delete all machining ( ): As the name indicates, this option will erase all the existing
machining.
 Configuration ( ): whenever this option is selected the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 466: Delete instructions – Configuration
 Delete the macro as a whole: Disable this parameter and the system will allow erasing the
machining of the sheet framework line by only selecting one of the segments that compose
it. If this option is enabled, it will be necessary to select the whole machining associated to
the sheet framework destruction.
 Machining by selection: This section provides the following parameter:
o Simulate machining selection when mouse is moved: If enabled, whenever the mouse
is moved over the machining, the system will simulate its selection.
3. Select the required option and click OK in order to delete the instructions.
543
Initialize
Initialize ( ) option, as the name indicates, initializes the machining. This operation must always be
done before doing any machining operation. The system will perform several operations which make
possible starting the use of the machine:
 Apply the settings configured on machine´s startup configuration.
 Place the clamps as configured on machine´s sheet clamps configuration.
 Initialize the work zone as set up on machine´s work zone configuration.
 Initialize the from-point as configured on the from point configuration.
 The system will show the upload/download configuration if enabled on machine´s

upload/download sheets configuration.
 Apply the configured cutting parameters.
 Apply the general machining options.
Rapids
A Rapid movement is the displacement of the head without cutting. This option inserts a rapid
movement from the current machining coordinates to the desired point. In order to insert a rapid
movement, perform the following steps:
1. Select Rapids ( ) button and the system will initialize the rapid movement.
2. Select the Destination point and the rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point and
destination point. The user can select as many points as required to insert rapid movements.
Go To
This option allows cutting between the desired points. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Click Goto ( ) button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point and the extension between the initial point and destination point will
be machined. The user can select as many points as required to continue the cut operation.
544
Contours
Manual Contours
In order to cut the selected elements of the contour perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour ( ) option located in Contour menu and the system will display the options
available.
2. Select Manual Contours ( ) option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
3. Select the first element of the contour by means of the options provided.
4. Select the remaining elements of the contour if required.
5. Click Accept button located in the same menu and the selected elements of the contour will be
machined.
Manual Contours by Means of Two Points

By means of this option, the user can machine a contour just giving the input and output points as
follows:
1. Select Manual contours by means of two points ( ) option located in Contours menu.
2. Select the input point of the contour.
3. Select the output point of the contour and the system will display Manual contour by means of two
points dialog box as shown below:
Figure 467: Manual contour by means of two points dialog box
545
Find the fields provided in the previous window briefly described below:
 Lead-in/Lead-out lengths: Lead-ins and Lead-out can be inserted here and will be applied in
the clicked input and output points and set with the values here introduced.
 Cut sense: The system will make the machining from the input to the output points in the
sense here selected:
 Finish the contour: If enabled, the system will force to detect all the contour of the clicked
points and, if possible, it will machine it.
 Lead-ins on the same point: If selected, the lead-ins will be located in the same point.
 Delete auxiliary geometry: If enabled, as the name indicates, the auxiliary geometry will be
erased.
4. Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes.
Manual Contours between Micro-joints
Manual contours between micro-joints ( ) option is used to cut elements which are between
micro-joints. The user will have to select the geometry and the system will insert the machining in the
contour which is between the two micro-joints.
Automatic Contours
In order to cut the contours automatically, perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and the select Automatic contours ( ) option.
2. Select the required contour to machine.
3. The system will automatically machine the contour.
546
Continuous Contours
This option allows executing the whole machining process by means of the mouse. The user will have
to select the required points. If one of these points belongs to the contour of a part, the system will
automatically introduce the machining orders for the part. If the contour does not have lead-in/lead-
out assigned, these will be automatically assigned. In order to assign continuous cut, perform the
following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and the select Continuous contours ( ) option.
2. The system will display Continuous cut dialog box as shown below:
Figure 468: Continuous cut dialog box
3. Select whether deleting cycles on lead-ins is required or not and click OK button in order to save the
changes.
4. Select the required destination points by means of the mouse.
If the button used is the right one, the system will execute the movements as rapid movements
with the head up at a higher speed.
Parts
In order to machine the entire part, perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and select Parts ( ) option.
2. Select the part required to machine and the system will machine the whole part automatically.
Set of Selected Parts

This option will make the machining of a group of selected parts by performing the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and select Set of selected parts ( ) option.
547
Figure 469: Set of selected parts
3. Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes.
4. Select the required set of parts and the system will machine them.
Automatic Cycles on Lead-ins

Select Automatic Cycles on Lead-ins ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to make holes
with drills in those points where the piercings are located and facilitate the cut. Whenever this option
is selected, the system will display Machining initialization window. Once all the required parameters
have been set, proceed to select Finish button so that all the automatic cycle is applied on the lead-
ins.
The lead-ins must be previously placed on the contours so that this option works properly.
All Drill Cycles
Select All Drill Cycles ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to drill all the points on the
contour.
All Marks
Select All Marks ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to machine the contours with mark
technology.
548
All Holes
Select All Holes ( ) option so that all the holes are machined. This option is usually used before
Continuous contour machinings.
All Cut
Select All Cut ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to cut all the contours.
All Contours One Quality

This option will machine all the contours of a specified cutting quality. In order to do it perform the
following steps:
5. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and select All Contours One Quality ( ) option
and the system will display a dialog box displaying the available Cutting qualities.
6. Select the required cutting quality and the system will machine all the contours of the selected
Cutting quality.
Remnant Line
Remnant line ( ) option will machine the remnant contour, given that a remnant has been
previously created.
Remnant Line Manually
Remnant line manually ( ) option allows cutting the selected contour of the remnant line. The
user will have to select a specific point of the cutting line of the remnant and the system will start
cutting from the nearest point to the clicked point.
Compensated Movement
By means of Compensated movement ( ) option the system will show Compensated movement
dialog box asking for the Cutter radius value as shown below:
549
Figure 470: Compensated movement dialog box
The system will place the head in the correct point depending of the Cutter radius. It will machine
taking into account the compensated trajectory for every selected point. Select Make the offset dry-
run parameter in order to machine continuously without rapid movement.
The Sheet Framework (Automatic)
The sheet framework (Automatic) ( ) option makes the machine cut the sheet framework in
horizontal and vertical cuts. The system will display Cut the sheet framework dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 471: Cut the Sheet framework dialog box
550
 Only when the remnant line is cut: If enabled, it will force the script to be cut always after
the remnants have been cut.
 Maximum length in X and Y: It determines the maximum rectangle that will be generated as
scrap.
 Offset in the parts: Minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
 Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge of
the sheet
 Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not.
 Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the segments
will be cut from the middle to one side, then it will go to the center again and to the other
side. It is possible to make a lead-in/lead-out in the middle of other types of cutting
segments which belong to a sheet framework such as In any cut, Cuts between parts, In
cuts outside parts and In all cuts.
 Order: Using this parameter the user can define the sheet skeleton (frame). The user will
have to select between the following three options:
o By Proximity
o Horizontal + Vertical
o Vertical + Horizontal
The Sheet Framework (Manual)

The sheet framework (Manual) option makes the machine cut the scraps in horizontal and vertical
cuts. The instructions will be inserted in the clicked points. When selected, the system will Destroy
the sheet framework dialog box as shown below:
551
Figure 472: Destroy the Sheet framework dialog box
 Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
 Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge of
the sheet.
 Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not. For
example, in the figure if the clicked point:
 Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the segments
will be cut from the middle to one side, then it will go to the center again and to the other
side.
 Direction: Depending on the selection, i.e. Horizontal or Vertical the system will include sheet
framework destroying hits in the clicked points.
 Order: Using this parameter the user can define the sheet skeleton (frame). The user can
configure the three options they are:
 By Proximity
 Left + Right and Right + Left: For horizontal cut
 Up to down and Down to up: for vertical cut
552
Destroy Sheet Holes

This option is for cutting or combined machines with grid. The system will execute a process in order
to destroy the holes on the sheet. The sheet is placed over the table´s grid. Depending on the
distance of the grid´s lines, sometimes when cutting a hole, it may keep on the table instead of falling
down the table. If it keeps in horizontal position there is no problem, but if the sheet inclines
between two grid lines, it should stand out and the head can collide with it resulting in head damage.
In order to prevent this, the system provides this option so that the holes are cut in small parts to be
sure they always fall down the grid. When selected the system will display Destroy sheet holes dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 473: Destroy Sheet holes dialog box
Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the data.
Common Cut between Two Parts

The user will have to click on a part’s segment that is of common cut, and the system will execute the
common cut between the two parts. Once the segment has been selected the system will display
Common cutting parameters dialog box as displayed below:
553
Figure 474: Common cutting parameters dialog box
 Common cut between two parts: This navigation button configures how the common cut
will be executed.
system will leave without cutting when using common cut.
 Continuous cut: If the lead-out of the first part does not coincide with the lead-in of the
second part, then this option allows making that movement cutting or with a rapid
depending on the selected option.
 No: In this case, the movement will always be rapid ones.
 Yes: In this case, the movement will be cutting always.
 If the distance is small: If the distance is the same or lower than the given one, then the
movement will be made cutting, if higher, with a rapid.
 Execution mode: This option allows selecting the common-cut order that the machine will
follow.
554
Common Cut of a Grid

By means of this option, the user can cut a grid of parts with common cut. First, the common cut
elements will be cut, while the external contour of the whole set is cut later. Once this option is
selected the system will display Selection options toolbar in order to select the parts to machine.
Select them through the options provided and click Accept button located in the same toolbar. The
system will display Common cut of a grid dialog box:
Figure 475: Common cut of a grid dialog box
 Common cut: The user can select between Horizontal + Vertical and Vertical + Horizontal.
555
 Islands: The user will be able to select between the following options:
 Show an error if islands are generated
 Cut islands before common cut
 Cut islands during the first stage of common cut
 Cut islands during the second stage of common cut
 Cut islands after common cut
 Outside: The user will also be able to configure how to start the common cut.
 Deal with external elements as internals: If enabled, the system will treat external elements
as if they were internal. It will be possible to cut all horizontal elements first and all the
vertical ones afterwards, both the external and internal elements.
 It is allowed to reverse contours: Select this checkbox to invert the contours and to place
the lead-in.
Linear Cut of Parts

This option allows cutting the parts in a linear way. It is used to cut the semiautomatic contours of a
group of parts. During the cutting process, the vertical contours of the part will be cut first, followed
by the horizontal ones. After each vertical cutting, the sheet between the parts cut will be
evacuated. The system will display Selection options toolbar in order to select the parts to machine.
Select the ones required by means of the options provided and click Accept button located in the
same toolbar. The system will display Linear cut of parts dialog box as shown below:
556
Figure 476: Linear cut of parts dialog box
 Vertical: It is possible to choose from which corner of the sheet the machine starts to cut to
the sense of the cuts.
 Horizontal: It allows choosing where the cut starts and the sense of them.
 Inside: The cutting of segments takes place in three ways: first, it cuts the holes inside the
parts and then it cuts the external contours. The machining of the cutting parts is done both
in vertical and horizontal way. In horizontal direction, the cut takes place part by part and
inside the cut takes place line by line.
 Only cut the parts: By selecting this option, the sheet framework will not be cut but the
system will cut the vertical elements from the sheet's edge or from one part to another one.
This option will only cut the parts and evacuate them separately.
 Evacuate the scrap as soon as possible: If enabled, the system will proceed to evacuate the
scrap as soon as possible.
 Maximum length of horizontal cut among several parts: Introduce the required maximum
length of horizontal cut.
557
 Lengthen elements from the cutting radio: This option allows avoiding lengthening of
elements so that some elements will not be cut and so they will be jointed to the sheet.
 Avoid piercing on common cut: If this option is selected, the system tries to avoid the
piercings in those places where the elements have been already cut and they are not vertex
of other cut elements. This option tries to prevent the notches from the piercings. The
system does two passes for that element and avoids those marks.
 Maximum longitude of horizontal cut among several parts: If the system finds several
segments from different parts which are on the same level, it will try to cut one after another
and the number of segment cut will be defined by this parameter.
Repositions by Zones
Repositions by zones ( ) option is available whenever there is no machining and it executes the
machining of the whole sheet. It divides the sheet in a Number of zones (horizontal), which is
configurable in the option itself. The option machines the zones completely from top to bottom and
from bottom to top depending on the initial point of the machining. In each zone it machines the
parts located inside it. In order to do so, sometimes it is necessary to break those parts located
between different repositions. Therefore, it is essential to configure this parameter in order to allow
cutting contours partially in the zone.
Cycles
Cycle menu contains the following options:
Simple Cycle
This option allows machining with a center punch the machining points by inserting rapid
movements between the selected points. In order insert simple cycles perform the following steps:
1. Select Simple Cycle button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point. A rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point and the
selected point. The user will be able to insert as many points as required by selecting more points.
558
Linear Cycle
This option allows the user to machine the part by inserting punching machining points in a
sequence. When selected, the system will display the following options:
Figure 477: Linear cycle options
 Beginning point and distance: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting the
punching machining points in a sequence at a specified angle and distance as follows:
1. Select Beginning point and distance button and then mark the first punching machining point.
Figure 478: Beginning point and distance
 n: The number of machining points.
 a: The angle at which the punching machining points are to be placed.
 d: The distance between the punching machining points.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The machining will be carried out by inserting
machining points at the specified angle and distance.
 Ends and number of points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting
punching machining points in a sequence between specified initial and end points as follows:
1. Select Ends and number of points option and select the initial and end points.
559
Figure 479: Ends and number of points
3. Introduce the number of punching machining points required in n field.

4. Click OK and the part will be machined inserting the specified number of punching machining
points between initial and end points.
 Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting
three punching machining points in a sequence as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the first machining point.
2. Mark the second and destination points and the part will be machined along the selected
machining points.
Circular Cycle
Circular cycle option allows the user to machine a part by inserting a circular punching machining
sequence. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 480: Circular cycle options
 Centre and angles: Select this option in order to machine by inserting a circular sequence of
punching machining points at a specified angle as follows:
1. Select Centre and angles option and mark the center point.
560
Figure 481: Centre and angles
 r: Distance value from the center point.
 n: Number of machining points.
 a: Angle value between the machining points.
 ai: Initial angle value of the first machining point in the circular sequence.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined by inserting a circular
sequence of punching machining points.
 Centre and beginning point: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a
circular sequence of punching machining points form a specified initial point as follows:
1. Select Centre and beginning point and mark the center and initial points.
Figure 482: Centre and beginning point
3. Introduce the required values in “n” (number of punching machining points) and “a” (angle
between machining points) fields and click OK button.
561
4. The part will be machined by inserting a circular sequence of the machining points with an initial
point and at a specified angle.
 Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting the
initial and end punching machining points as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the Initial point.
2. Mark the second and end points.
3. The part will be machined from the initial point to the end point.
 Arc: Select this option in order to machine an arc by inserting a specified number of punching
machining points as follows:
1. Select Arc button and select the arc required to machine.

Figure 483: Arc
3. Introduce the number of machining points required in “n” field and click OK button.
4. The arc will be machined with the specified number of machining points.
Grid Cycle
This option allows machining a part by inserting punching machining points in two different
directions if the form of a grid.
Figure 484: Grid cycle options
 Corner and number: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid at a
specified angle and distance as follows:
562
1. Click Corner and number button and then mark the initial point from where the user wants to
machine the part.
Figure 485: Corner and number
 n1: Number of machining points in the first direction.
 n2: Number of machining points in the second direction.
 a: Angle value in which the machining is done.
 d1: Distance value between the consecutive machining points in the first direction.
 d2: The distance value between the consecutive machining points in the second direction.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined in the form of a grid.
 Corner and distances: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid with
five points at a specified distance as follows:
1. Select Corner and distances option and select or mark an origin point.
2. Select or mark initial and end points in X axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an exact
multiple of the initial point in X axis.
3. Select or mark initial and end points in Y axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an exact
multiple of the initial point in Y axis.
4. The part will be machined with the five points at the specified distances.
563
Irregular Cycle
This option allows machining a part by inserting a cycle on a lead-in/lead-out or on the points of
different selected elements. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 486: Irregular cycle options
 Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle
on the existing lead-in or lead-out as follows:
1. Select Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out by means of the options provided and click Accept button
located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created in the selected lead-in/lead-out.
 Cycles on points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle on selected
points of existing elements as follows:
1. Select Cycles on points option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required points of the existing elements by means of the options provided and click
Accept button located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created within the selected points.
Modify
Micro-Joints
Micro-joints ( ) option allows introducing micro-joints in the parts after the machining process
has been done. When selected the system will display Micro-joints dialog box as shown below:
564
Figure 487: Micro-joints dialog box
Introduce the Width value of micro-joint, which is the distance that will be left as micro-joint in the
clicked parts. Depending on the clicked point and the option selected here, the micro-joint can be
inserted in different sections of the contour which comprehend Middle, End and Picked point. This
change can be executed in more than just the clicked part depending on the option selected in Make
on section. The user will be able to select between The selected part, Identical parts with the same
angle and All identical parts.
Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour
Automatic micro-joints at the end of contour ( ) option allows placing automatic micro-joints at
the end of the contour. When selected, the system will display Automatic micro-joints at the end of
the contour dialog box as shown below.
565
Figure 488: Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour dialog box
1. Select By quality checkbox in order to base the micro-joints on cut quality. If it is not selected, the
system will display Width value of micro-joint field to be filled by the user with the required value.
2. In Apply in contours section, select the required size of inside and outside contours to introduce the
micro-joints.
3. Introduce the Maximum length and Maximum width of small contours, as well as the Minimum
length and Minimum width of big contours.
4. After introducing the required data, click OK button in order to introduce the micro joints at the
end of the contour automatically.
Delete Micro-joints
Delete micro-joints ( ) option allows deleting the selected micro-joints without erasing the rest of
the machining of the part. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Delete micro-joints option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required micro-joint(s) by means of the options provided and click Accept button so that
the system will automatically deletes it.
3. Click Finish button in order to disable this option.
Cut Micro-Joints after Cutting of Contours

Cut micro-joints after cutting of contours ( ) option allows cutting the micro-joints and the
elements with no cut technology after machining the sheet. Whenever this option is selected, the
566
system will display a panel on the right side of the window. On this panel, the user can configure the
following parameters:
Figure 489: Modify – Cut Micro-joints after Cutting of Contours
 By contours: If enabled, the cutting of the micro-joints will be after cutting each contour.
 Also on No Cut: If enabled, the cutting of the micro-joints will be after cutting each working
zone.
 Maximum Distance of No Cut: Here the user can determine the micro-joints to be cut with a
smaller length than the one here introduced.
 By multihead: By means of this checkbox the user can decide whether the system will use a
multihead or not.
 Position: Here the user can decide the position of the cut between the Beginning (on the
part´s contour), the Middle of the micro-joint or the End of the micro-joint.
Beginning End Middle
567
Order Machining
Once the machining has been executed, Order machining ( ) option allows modifying the order in
which the parts will be machined. When this option is selected the system will display Order cut
sequence the following four options:
Figure 490: Order Machining options
The dialog box displayed will vary depending on the selected option as shown below:
 Order Cut Sequence: By means of a sequential selection the system orders a set of machining
instructions.
Figure 491: Order cut sequence dialog box
 Order Cut Sequence by Window: Using the selection by window the system orders a set of
machining instructions.
Figure 492: Order cut sequence by window dialog box
568
 Order the Cut of the Parts: By means of a sequential selection, the system orders a set of
parts.
Figure 493: Order the cut of the parts dialog box
 Order the Cut of the Parts by Window: Using the selection by window the system orders a
set of parts.
Figure 494: Order the cut of the parts by window dialog box
 Order Cut Sequence in a Common Cut Grid: Using this option the user can change the cutting
order after executing Common Cut Grid option. It allows the user to select vertical and
horizontal cuts to set them in the required order. First of all, the base contour must be
selected, followed by the next contours to order.
Move Special Text
Move special text ( ) option allows moving the written text in the different parts of the nesting.
When selected, the system will display INKJET dialog box as shown below:
Figure 495: INKJET dialog box
569
 If Automatic checkbox is not enabled, the system will do it manually. On the other hand, if
enabled, new fields will be displayed in the dialog box.
 The user will have to introduce the Correct position of the Offset and Search step in X and Y
dimensions (mm).
 Delete the text if it does not fit in the part parameter, as the name indicates, deletes the text
that does not fit in the part.
 Once all parameters have been set as required, click OK button in order to move the selected
text.
Real References of the Remnant
Real references of the remnant ( ) option provides a solution to the differences between
references when a remnant is generated. The system will display Real references of the remnant
Figure 496: Real references of the remnant dialog box
Modify Initialization
This option allows modifying the following initialization parameters of the machine:
 Start up ( ) option enables the configuration of parameters of the Initialization section of

a machine.
 Place the clamps with the keyboard ( ) option allows modifying the amount of clamps, as
well as the distance between them, all of it by means of the keyboard.
 Place the clamps with the mouse ( ) option allows modifying the position of the clamps
using the mouse. The user must select the points where the clamps will be located. The same
number of points must be entered as the number of clamps the machine contains.
570
 From point ( ) option enables the configuration of the parameters of the From points
section of a machine. The From point defines the default values of the initial coordinates
relative to the position of the cutting head.
 Move the from point interactively ( ) option allows changing the from point of the
machining by means of the mouse.
 Sheet parameters ( ) option enables the user to configure the Sheets parameters for a
machine.
 Upload/download sheets ( ) option enables the user to configure the Sheet

loading/unloading parameters of a machine.
 Cutting parameters ( ) option allows configuring the general cutting parameters together
with the auxiliary parameters, contour attributes and compensations by quality.
 Postprocessor data ( ) option allows configuring the system to ask for some values which
will be used by the postprocessor in order to generate the CNC code. By means of this
option, the user can change the data of these parameters before the postprocessor is
executed.
Do not pass over the clamps

Do not pass tool over the sheet clamps ( ) option makes sure that no process will exceed the
clamps at any moment during the machining process.
Labels Treatment
Labels treatment ( ) option allows modifying the labels. The user can also create labels to generate
subprograms, which is useful l to define them with the needed instructions.
 Insert label begin ( ): With this option the user can place a begin label in the desired
machining position.
 Insert label end ( ): With this option the user can place an end label in the desired
position.
571
 Create label ( ): With this option the user can create labels to generate subprograms. The
system allows the user creating labels regardless of whether other labels already exist for
the selected instructions. If the system detects labels related to one of the selected
instructions, it will display a dialog box asking the user whether it is required to delete the
related labels in order to add the new one. If so, the related labels will be erased and the new
one added. On the contrary, the system will display a message indicating that it has not been
possible to add the new label. The system will detect those instructions associated to the
ones selected in order to include them inside beginning and end labels. The location of labels
will be based on the following two principles:
 Prior to the first instruction, the system will search for the following types of instructions:
tool load, compensation, corrector, beginning of subprogram, etc. So that they are placed
right after the beginning of the label.
 After the last instruction, the system will search for instructions such as evacuation and end
of subprogram, between others, so that they are placed before the end label.
Regarding the selection mode of the machining instructions, the system will display as pre-selected
the instructions comprised between the two selected. Once the first instruction has been selected,
those instructions hovered over will become highlighted so that the user has a clear picture of what
is being selected.
 Delete labels by selection ( ): With this option the user can delete the selected labels.
 Delete inner labels ( ): With this option the user can delete only the inner labels.
 Delete outer labels ( ): With this option the user can delete only the outer labels.
 Delete all labels ( ): With this option the user can delete all labels.
572
Subprogram Treatment
When the machining is repetitive and involves a considerable number of parts, performing the
calculation automatically can take a long time. With Subprogram treatment ( ) options, machining
is defined for only one part and then the information is copied for the rest of the parts.
4.9.4.11.1 Rectangular Subprogram
Rectangular subprogram ( ) option allows to execute a part in a subprogram. It will prompt for
the number of executions, and if the user wants to order the machining or to execute it part by part.
4.9.4.11.2 Delete All Subprograms
Delete all subprograms ( ) option enables the cancellation of all the definitions and performances
of the subprograms that have already been machined. This option deletes all the generated
subprograms.
Modify Extraction
Modify Extraction ( ) option enables the user modifying the chute cycles by means of Selection
toolbar.
Delete Extraction
Delete Extraction ( ) option allows deleting the required chute cycles by means of the options
provided in Selection toolbar.
Modify Lead-in/Lead-outs
Modify lead-in/lead-outs ( ) option allows setting the required lead-in/lead-outs for your parts.
The user will be able to modify their position and data, as well as applying a gap and offset.
573
EcoPierce
This new machining mode reduces the number of required piercings to cut the parts of a nesting. By
means of this mode, whenever cutting a part, the system performs a series of cuts (EcoPierce) on
the sheet framework so that the cutting of the rest of the parts starts from these cuts. This avoids
having to make a complete piercing on these parts, since the cut starts on the material that has been
already cut. In these cases, as the cutting starts in a zone without material, the piercing will be much
faster and reduce the consumable consumption, thereby saving time and costs.
Find detailed below the options related to the new machining mode:
 Automatic EcoPierce ( ): In a nesting with machined parts, this option will generate
automatically the possible EcoPierce between parts to avoid the highest number of
piercings. The system will automatically check between which parts it would be best to insert
an EcoPierce as well as the insertion position. Whenever this option is executed the system
will ask the user the geometrical data of the EcoPierce together with a series of parameters
to control its placement:
 Maximum distance: It refers to the maximum distance between two parts to be able to
place an EcoPierce between them.
 Lead-in minimum length: It refers to the minimum distance between the cut (EcoPierce)
and the part in which the lead-in is executed. If the system does not obtain a position that
respects this minimum lead-in length, the corresponding EcoPierce will not be generated.
574
 Apply in contours: It specifies whether it is only possible to apply it between external

contours or if it is possible to generate EcoPierce between internal and external contours.
 Manual EcoPierce ( ): This option allows introducing an EcoPierce manually between two
contours selected by the user. In addition to this, the user will also be able to specify the
position where the EcoPierce is required to be inserted. In order to execute this option, the
user will be asked the following parameters:
 Automatic position: If enabled, the system will search for the best position to introduce the
EcoPierce between the two selected contours. In order to do this, the user must specify
the Maximum distance and Minimum lead-in length detailed in the previous section.
 Move only orthogonally: If disabled, the position of the EcoPierce will be directly defined by
the two pints selected by the user. On the other hand, if enabled, the position of the
EcoPierce will be modified over time to try that wherever possible the lead-in is
perpendicular to the first cutting element of the part.
 Overlapping test: If enabled, the system will check whether there is overlapping between
the EcoPierce and the parts. Given the case there is overlapping, the EcoPierce will not be
introduced.
575
In the event that there is already an EcoPierce between the selected contours, this option will
delete the existing EcoPierce and introduce the new one with the data and position specified by the
user. This way, by means of this option the user will be able to modify the EcoPierce between two
contours.
 Delete EcoPierce ( ): This option allows deleting the EcoPierce selected by the user. In
order to select the required EcoPierce the user will be provided with the usual selection
options: element selection, by window capture, by trap, all and invert selection. Whenever an
EcoPierce is deleted, all its elements will also be deleted. That is to say, the cuts on which the
piercing must be executed and the lead-in element related to those cuts.
576
Avoid Any Holes Already Cut

Avoid any holes already cut ( ) option helps the user avoiding the collision of the head with the
holes that have been already cut.
Modify the Head Management

Modify the head management ( ) option allows the user adjusting the head management
manually.
Delete Every Head Up/Down Instruction
Delete every head-up/down instruction ( ) option cancels and deletes every head-up/down
instruction that has been previously generated.
Modify Head Management of Rapids
Modify head management of rapids ( ) option allows introducing head-up/down instructions in

rapid movements of the machining.
Continuous Cut Automatically
Continuous cut automatically ( ) option will change the rapid movements into cutting
movements. In other words, the displacements will be executed cutting.
Continuous Cut Semiautomatically
Continuous cut semiautomatically ( ) option, as the previous option, converts the rapid
movements to continuous cutting. The difference consists in the fact that it is executed
semiautomatically.
Modify Movements
Modify movements ( ) option, as the name indicates, allows modifying the movements of the
machining. This option is very useful to avoid the turrets that pass over a dangerous zone.
Modify Compensation
Modify compensation ( ) option allows the user defining the compensation type that will be used
for all the machining process and which is located in the Automatic machining section of the machine
577
configuration. It allows modifying applied compensation parameters for the contours of all the parts
that have been nested on the sheet.
Modify Compensation of a Contour

Modify compensation of a contour ( ) option allows modifying the existing compensation
parameters of a contour taking into account both System compensation and CN compensation.
Quality Dependent Compensations
Quality dependent compensations ( ) option allows applying system compensation and control
corrections depending on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of cut. This option enables
defining a different compensation for each one of the twelve cutting qualities.
Copy Machining of a Part
Copy machining of a part ( ) option allows copying the machining of a parts that has been already
executed to equal parts in the sheet. It is very useful when the user makes the machining of a part in
a very specific way and wants to make the rest of the parts following the same process.
Delete Machining of Selected Parts
Delete machining of selected parts ( ) option will automatically delete all the machining of the
parts selected by means of Selection options.
Modify the Reposition Point
Modify the reposition point ( ) option makes the system ask for the reposition point once the
machining has been executed. It is used for changing the place where the head or the pistons have
been lower for reposition.
Modify the Zero Point of the Sheet
Modify the zero point of the sheet ( ) option modifies the reference point of the sheet by placing
a point on the required place.
Replace Head with Another
Replace head with another ( ) option allows the user giving in just one instruction a set of
instructions.
578
Group Cycles on Lead-ins
Group cycles on lead-ins ( ) option allows the user grouping cycles on lead-ins. This helps to
optimize and reorder and allows the user setting he maximum distance between cycles, among
other options.
Figure 497: Group cycles on lead-ins window
 Generation of labels: This parameter indicates if the user is going to generate labels and of
which type. It is possible to generate labels By parts or By group.
 Orthogonality tolerance: It indicates the maximum tolerance (respecting the X or Y axis)

between two parts.
Options
Optimize
4.9.5.1.1 Optimize Corrector Changes

Refer to section 3.8.5.1 Optimize corrector changes.
Speed Rates
Refer to section 3.8.5.2 Speed Rates.
Postprocessor Words
Refer to section 3.8.5.3 Postprocessor Words.
Contour Attributes
Refer to section 3.8.5.4 Contour Attributes.
CN Compensation
Refer to section 3.8.5.5 CN Compensation.
579
System Compensation
Refer to section 3.8.5.6 System Compensation.
Change Cutting Direction

Refer to section 3.6.4.12 Change Cutting Direction.
Contour Ordering
Refer to section 3.6.4.13 Contour Ordering.
Component Removal
Part Extraction
Refer to section 3.8.6.1 Part Extraction.
Assign Extractions
Refer to section 3.8.6.2 Assign Extractions.
Assign Boxes
Refer to section 3.8.6.3 Assign Boxes.
View
View CNC
View CNC ( ) option shows the CNC code of the sheet. The nesting has to be saved in order to
generate the CNC code.
Current Status
Refer to section 3.8.7.1 Current Status.
580
System Efficiency
System Efficiency ( ) option displays System efficiency dialog box as shown below:
Figure 498: System efficiency dialog box
The previous dialog box provides information about the use of sheets for the performed task and the
number of machined sheets.
Clamps and Work Zone
Clamps and Work zone ( ) option will display Clamps and work zone dialog box. This dialog box
provides the following information:
 Clamps: Locations and zone, and whether the fixed position of the clamps will be shown or
not.
 Work Zone: Length and Width, Minimum and Maximum X and Y coordinates in the current
part reposition, ant the added reposition which is the sheet´s cutting point of origin.
Verify the Machining

Refer to section 3.8.7.2 Verify the machining.
Verify Unstable Contours
As the name indicates, Verify unstable contours ( ) option checks whether the contours are
stable or not. This option is related to the Grid configuration (refer to 1.2. Grid section) and will only
be useful whenever there is a grid configured. The system will display Verify unstable contours dialog
box as shown below:
581
Figure 499: Verify unstable contours dialog box
 Do only with cut parts: It verifies unstable contours only with cut parts.
 Apply micro-joints in machined unstable contours: This option applies the micro-joint to
parts that fall or may fall off the grid. It is possible to apply it by quality or to introduce a
determined width value for the micro-joint.
 Display parts with unstable contours: This option allows the visualization of the parts
situation whether it may fall or not. The image represents the shape in which the part is
going to be scratched taking into account the color used. If special visualization is selected, it
will not appear when applying this option, as it would be useless (the scratching will not be
seen). For some reason if the parts have to be moved on the sheet, this option should be re-
selected to update the scratch type. This is a temporary option, and will no longer be
visualized once the sheet has been changed.
Multihead
Multihead ( ) option displays the list of heads along with the capabilities and distances of each
one. The system will display Multihead data dialog box as shown below:
582
Figure 500: Multihead data dialog box
The capabilities of each head are shown with the following icons:
Sheet
Reposition
Reposition ( ) option allows the user carrying out hand-operated repositions. The user must
select the positioning point of the pistons, headstock or shear as well as a positioning point for the
operation area.
Move Clamps
Move clamps ( ) option allows fixing the sheet with the turret head or with the piston while
moving clamps.
Sheet Turn Over
Sheet turn over ( ) option enables the configuration of the parameters located in Sheet turn
over section of the machine. The system will display Sheet turn over dialog box as shown below:
583
Figure 501: Sheet turn over dialog box
 Turn over type: The user will be able to select between the following three options:
 Manual rotation of 180º
 Manual rotation of 90º
 Manual symmetry
 Cancel reposition when executing the turn over: Using this option the user can cancel
reposition. If there were any reposition before the turnover of a sheet, after making the
turnover, all the reposition will be cancelled keeping the working zone as it was at the
beginning.
 Offset of the work zone after the turn over: With this option, after the turnover of the
sheet, the system will apply an offset to the working zone, which means that the working
zone will be a little bit displaced from its position before the turnover.
This parameter is only useful if the contact point of the sheet and the machine pin are not coincident
with the initial sheet border. In this case the sheet will be separates in X from its initial position.
584
View
Display
Nesting Explorer
Nesting explorer ( ) button allows visualizing a tree structure by subjobs, nestings and nested
parts of a job. When selected, the system will display Nesting explorer window at the left hand side.
This window visualizes the active job, the nesting and the most important information related to
them, as well as all the nested parts in each nesting. It displays the name of the sheet, dimensions of
the sheet, quantity of parts and number of equal sheets in the bracket.
Information related to subjobs, nestings and parts is displayed in three different ways attending to
their position in the tree, their icons or the text each element shows. They are as follows:
1. Position: Elements in level 1 of the tree are always subjobs, those in level 2 are nestings and those in
level 3 are parts:
2. Icons: The list of icons that are included here divided into three parts, such as:
 Subjobs: This includes both active and non-active jobs. The subjobs show information about
the active jobs, available machine, material and its thickness. To make changes in the sheet,
right-click on the sheet of the subjob that allows the user to delete, block, open, automatic
nesting/machining, and view the properties of the sheet part.
 Nestings: Those parts that are displayed under nesting are: In design, Available, In workshop,
Finished and Multiprogram and so on.
Nesting Viewer
Nesting viewer ( ) option shows the subjob part in thumbnails mode. It is possible to view or
hide a part that has to be nested and machined. When selected the system will display or hide
Nesting viewer window next to Nesting explorer on the left hand side of the window.
The user is provided with nested parts, reference, quantity, dimensions, use percentage, CNC, sheet
and weight of the nested sheet.
585
Machining Window
Machining window ( ) option visualizes information about the Machining instructions and the
Parts. Machining instruction section provides data such as type of contour, compensation, length and
corrector. On the other hand, Part section provides the length, width and angle, as well as the part
parameters.
Modules Viewer
Modules viewer ( ) option allows the user to add, delete, insert and block the desired modules in
a very handy way. This panel can be activated and deactivated from the View tab located in the
Ribbon (Ribbon controls). The user will find the option Modules viewer between the options
Machining window and Part viewer. When right-clicking on Modules viewer, the following options
are displayed:
Figure 502: Modules viewer options
 New: Through this option the user will be able to create customized modules selecting the
parts or the modules given in a sheet. Once the parts that will form the new module are
selected, the selection will be accepted and the module will be displayed in the panel. It is
located in the contextual menu and is always visible.
 Create modules: Through this option the user will be able to create modules based on the
ones already created. It is possible to have modules with different geometry.
 Semi-automatic: This option will select the module that better suits the sheet and will
introduce it, without giving the option to select it or position it. It is located in the contextual
menu and is always visible.
 Explode: Once the modules are introduced in a sheet they work as a single entity, which is
not always the most convenient option. By means of this option a complete module becomes
a group of independent parts. This option only takes effect in the module placed in the sheet,
586
having no impact on the modules created in the panel. It is located in the contextual menu
and is always visible.
Part Viewer
Part Viewer ( ) option shows the list of parts of a subjob in thumbnails mode. It is possible to
view or hide a part that has to be nested and machined. The system will display or hide Part Viewer
window at the bottom of Nesting and Machining window.
It indicates the nested parts, blocked parts, selected parts with available quantity, nested quantity
and blocked quantity between other details. Whenever the cursor is hovered over the image of any
element of the view or the list, the system will display an enlarged image along with a number of
textual information. This way, the identification process of elements becomes much easier. The
enlarged image can be enabled or disabled and the position of the screen in which it should appear
can be set by the user. In addition, it is also possible to configure the visualization time as well as the
image to display. Find below a table that details the existing part statuses as well as their graphic
information:
Figure 503: Part statuses and graphic information table
587
Part List
Part List ( ) option shows the list of parts to be machined in a job. The user will visualize the
Reference of the part together with the Labor ticket, Pending quantity, Nested quantity and
Dimensions.
When the user drags the mouse on any part in the part list window as shown above, the part name
and part dimensions will be displayed in the tool tip. If the system is in mm, the system will display 3
decimal positions and if the system is in inches, the system will display 5 decimal positions.
The user can access to the contextual menu clicking with the right button of the mouse over the part
list. The available options are:
 New: The system will open the drawing module allowing to create a new part which will be
automatically inserted into the job.
 Open: The selected part will be edited in the drawing module
 Block: The part will appear blocked and will not be used for the nesting until is unblocked
again.
 Delete: The part will be deleted from the job, but not from the database.
 Import: The user will be able to import pending parts of manufacturing orders list, import
parts from database and import DXF files.
 Quantity: The user can increase the quantity of available parts from this part list.
 Priority: When doing automatic nesting process, the system will try to place first the parts
with higher priority.
 Properties: From the part list it is possible to edit the part properties using this option.
 Group/Block: The user can BLOCK or UNBLOCK several parts together. By activating this
option, the selected part will change their status.
588
 View: With this option the user will be able to select Large icon (existent mode) and List.
Using this list mode, the parts will be displayed on a grid with the part reference and an icon
showing the status of the part. The possible statuses are the following:
Pending quantity > 0< Blocked part
Pending quantity = 0 Closed part
Pending quantity < 0 Wrong part
 Order: The order the parts are shown in the part list can be changed from here
 Size: In the part list there is a bitmap representation of each part, the size of this small draw
can be changed here.
Filler Parts Viewer

The Nesting and Machining module has two different panels in order to differentiate whether the part
is a filler part or a normal one. This treatment intends to transform those filler parts available in the
database into normal parts, due to the fact that the manufacturing of a certain number of those
parts is required.
Filler parts have an unlimited number by default, which can be modified at any time. This treatment
allows having the same part twice in a same job, both as normal and as a filler part which is very
useful in those cases in which only a particular number of parts is necessary, but would be useful to
have more if possible.
Filler Parts Viewer List

It is possible to visualize the filler part in the form of a list. There are the following details:
 Reference: It shows the reference of the associated part.
 Labor ticket: This is a part numbering system for database identification.
 Pending quantity: Number of parts which have not been nested.
 Nested quantity: It shows the parts which are already nested.
 Dimensions: It indicates the minimum rectangular dimension to nest the parts.
589
Simulation Window
Simulation Window ( ) option shows the Simulation window of the machined part where the
user can set the speed and view the cutter radius between other options:
Find the different sections provided in the previous window briefly described below:
 In the first section it is possible to set the Speed percentage.
 Operation section displays the cutting quality, cutting operation with respect to X axis, Y axis,
and the cutter radius.
 The next section provides information on heads used and their positions, compensation
system and control.
 Use the arrow buttons to view the required simulation process.
 Use the other buttons at the bottom of the window to pause, stop the operation, fast
forward the simulation, move to the previous operation, current operation, and so on.
This window provides information regarding the cutting quality only when the machining
operation is executed.
Multihead Window
Multihead Window ( ) option shows the Number of heads (up to 20 heads at the same time. of
the active machine and the Distance between them in millimeters. Here you will be able to apply
Automatic distances or modify the previous data and save it.
590
There is an option related to the way parts corresponding to multihead are placed together. The user
will be able to indicate whether the distance between the heads is free or automatically established.
In case of being free type, the distance is established in the window. On the contrary, in case of being
automatic, the distance between them is minimized. Apart from these two options, it is also possible
to adjust the parts to the sheet.
By means of the second option, the user can indicate the system to make use of the current
configuration in Multihead window of Automatic nesting. Thanks to this it is possible to introduce
some parts manually to a determined distance and complete the sheet maintaining that distance
regardless of what has been previously configured in Multihead data window. If this option is
enabled, the user will be able to activate Work with fixed number of heads parameter, which will use
the number set in the window. The number of heads can also be variable; therefore, it is possible to
make use of the configured number of heads or less.
Sheet Simulation
Sheet Simulation ( ) option simulates the sheet of the part. This application will be active until
the user clicks it again to disable it.
It is also possible to press F12 key on the keyboard to use this application.
Special Display
Special Display ( ) option allows visualizing parts with filling colors to facilitate associating the
parts nested on the sheet with those on the part viewer.
Figure 505: Special display
591
In order to visualize the parts with filling in the Part Viewer it is possible to activate Special
Display option located in View tab of the Nesting and Machining Module.
It is also possible to modify the size property in the Part Viewer by right clicking on it and selecting
Size option.
For further information on the existing statuses of parts and their graphic information refer to the
table provided in 4.10.1.5. Part Viewer section.
Redraw
Select Redraw ( ) option in order to visualize the drawing of the machined part.
It is also possible to press the F9 key on the keyboard to use this application.
Zoom
Zoom All
Select Zoom all ( ) option to zoom the part to the maximum size of the screen
It is also possible to press F8 key on the keyboard to use this application.
Zoom Window
Select Zoom window ( ) option in order to zoom the selected part as follows:
1. Select Zoom window button and mark the first point of the window to select the part that has to
be enlarged.
2. Move the cursor till the desired end point and mark the end point of the window.
3. The selected part will be enlarged.
592
It is also possible to press F4 key on the keyboard in order to use this application.
Zoom Previous
Select Zoom previous ( ) option to go back to the previous screen.
It is also possible to press F7 key on the keyboard in order to use this application.
Zoom Dynamic
Select Zoom Dynamic ( ) option to zoom the part to a required size as follows:
1. Select Zoom dynamic button and the system will display a window on the part.
2. Click and move the cursor until getting the desired window size and click.
3. Repeat the previous steps until the desired size is reached and right click. The part will be enlarged
to view based on the window size.
Zoom Scale
Select Zoom Scale ( ) option in order to zoom the part based on proportionate values as follows:
1. Select Zoom Scale button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 506: Zoom scale values
2. Introduce the required proportionate values and click OK button.

3. The part will be enlarged based on the proportionate values previously specified.
593
Full Screen
Full screen ( ) option allows visualizing the full drawing screen without the toolbars. The system
will display Full screen button on the drawing window, which the user will have to select in order to
return to normal screen.
Simulation
Refer to section 3.10.1 Simulate.
Program
Refer to section 3.10.1.1 Program.
ISN Position
Refer to section 3.10.1.2 ISN Position.
Mouse Positioning
Refer to section 3.10.1.3 Mouse Positioning.
Begin
Refer to section 3.10.1.4 Begin.
Previous
Refer to section 3.10.1.5 Previous.
Next
Refer to section 3.10.1.6 Next.
End
Refer to section 3.10.1.7 End.
Run
Refer to section 3.10.1.8 Run.
Previous Tool
Refer to section 3.10.1.9 Previous Tool.
594
Next Tool
Refer to section 3.10.1.10 Next Tool.
Previous Reposition
Previous reposition ( ) option allows navigating in the simulation program to the previous
reposition.
Next Reposition
Next reposition ( ) option allows navigating in the simulation program to the next reposition.
Previous Multihead
Previous multihead ( ) option the user can go back to the last change of head in the machining
program.
Next Multihead
Next multihead ( ) option the user can go back to the next change of head in the machining
program.
Previous Chute
By means of Previous chute ( ) option the simulation program will be placed just after the
previous extraction or chute movement.
Next Chute
By means of Next chute ( ) option the simulation program will be placed just after the next
chute or extraction movement.
Simulate CNC
CNC Simulation ( ) option carries out a 3D CNC simulation of the active job.
595
Applications
Assign Palletization Suction Cups
Assign Palletization suction cups ( ) option enables the user assigning suction cups to parts to
be palletized. This application is managed by the following four commands:
 Automatic ( ): Automatic assignment of suction cups.
 Delete ( ): Deletes all the suction cups assigned by Automatic and Modify options.
 Modify ( ): Allows modifying the assignment manually.
 Configure ( ): Allows defining the configurations to use while executing Automatic option.
Assign Download Point to Pallet
Assign download point to pallet ( ) option allows the user fixing a predefined stacking position
to a part option protected-pallet information. It will assign to sheared parts or remnants the
download point to pallet. It will display the position, stacking position and information to recognize
if it is symmetry of the original part.
Machining of a Part with 2 Heads
Machining of a part with 2 heads ( ) protected option determines whether the contours that
can be cut with one single head are going to be cut using multiple heads, in other words, whether
the contours will be cut simultaneously or not. This option is
Machining of the Out of a Part with Multihead
Machining of the out of a part with multihead ( ) option allows the user defining the order of
cutting. Select the part to machine and the system will display Machining of the out of a part with
multihead dialog box as shown below:
596
Figure 507: Machining of the out of a part with multihead dialog box
 Contours machining order: Select the desired contour direction.
 Left & right cut direction: Select the required cut direction.
 Horizontal cut direction: Select the required cut direction.
 Use system compensation in generated open contours: Select this checkbox in order to use
the system compensation in generated open contour.
Common Cut with Multihead
Common cut with multihead ( ) option allows machining different lines of rectangular parts of
different width and length nested in common cut with multihead. By means of this option, all the
horizontal cuts of the parts will be machined with multihead using all the heads needed to cut them
in one go. Vertical cuts will be carried out with only one head.
Select the part to machine and the system will display Common cut with multihead dialog box as
shown below, which provides the same information as in the previous option:
Figure 508: Common cut with multihead dialog box
597
Linear Common Cut with Multihead
Linear common cut with multihead ( ) option allows common cutting of linear elements of
different parts with multihead. All the necessary cuts will be machined with multihead using the
required heads. In order to activate this option, the common cut with several parts has to be
activated with the parts nested.
Parts Evacuation by Lift after Machining
Parts evacuation by lift after machining ( ) option allows evacuating parts by lift on cutting
machines after performing the machining. This option is protected and Lift option will have to be
disabled in the machine configuration in order to be able to run it. When selected the system will
display a drop-down list providing the following options:
 Automatic ( ): The system will perform the evacuations automatically, testing all the
available pressing points defined by the testing grid. The system will decide the best
evacuation point for each part depending on the best gravity center, the maximum number
of active suction cups…etc.
 Delete ( ): Deletes the evacuation previously defined. In order to select the evacuation,
the user must select the Lift point. Select the chute cycle to delete by means of the options
provided in Selection toolbar provided by the system.
 Configure ( ): This option displays the configuration window in order to define the suction
cups carriage, suction cups, stripes… and all the headed parameters to evacuate. The most
important difference to the Standard lift is the pressing point.
598
Figure 509: Configure parts evacuation
If More button is selected, the system will display Lift dialog box as shown below:
Figure 510: Lift dialog box
599
If the Navigation ( ) button is selected, the system will display Suction cups carriage data dialog
box:
Figure 511: Suction cups carriage data dialog box
Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save it.
 Manual ( ): The user can define the evacuations interactively, selecting the part to be
evacuated, the strip positions and the active suction cups by means of the options provided
in Selection toolbar.
 Move ( ): This option allows moving interactively a previously defined evacuation. In order
to select the evacuation to modify, the user must select the required Lift point.
 Modify ( ): This option allows modifying interactively a previously defined evacuation. In

order to select to evacuation to modify, the user must select the required Lift point.
 Copy ( ): This option allows copying all the data of a previously defined evacuation to any
other equal part. In this case, to user must also select the required Lift point.
 Display ( ): The system will display the parts that have already been evacuated, which will
help the user identify the ones not evacuated.
Evacuation of All the Parts by Lift after Machining
Evacuation of all the parts by lift after machining ( ) option enables the assignation of joint
download of all machined parts. This option is protected and will only enabled once sheet machining
has been done. In order to use this application, the evacuator suction cups must be previously
600
defined in a file. These are defined by indicating the number of suction cup grids the lift has, where
the grids have a defined number of rows and columns. The point where the lift must be placed also
requires definition. All this is configured in LiftSCups.cfg file.
When selected the system will display a drop-down list with the following options:
 Automatic ( ): This option performs evacuations automatically, testing all the available
pressing points defined by testing the grid. The system will decide which is the best
evacuation point for each part, taking into account the best gravity center and the maximum
number of active suction cups.
 Modify ( ): Thanks to this option the user can define the evacuations interactively,
selecting the part to evacuate, the strip positions and the active suction cups.
 Visualize ( ): This option allows visualizing all the suction cups.
Remnant to Part
Remnant to part ( ) option is very useful for a better sheet usage and efficient material waste
management. Once all parts have been placed on the sheet, automatic nesting has been carried out
and the user has been left with unused material portion, this option is a powerful solution to avoid
material waste and achieve profit. This option will convert the remnant into a part.
Utilities
Open Drafting
Open drafting ( ) option will open the drafting module without closing the drawing/nesting
ones. If the system detects changes in the machining when selecting this option, it will prompt the
user to save them. If the user performs changes in the drafting module, the system will ask to save
them before going back to the drawing/nesting module. The system will return to the previous state
when returning to the drawing module.
601
Dragging Options
Refer to section 3.13 Dragging Options.
Selection Options
Refer to section 3.14 Selection Options.
602
Cutting Example
5 CUTTING EXAMPLE
Find below an example of a simple cutting process in order to practice your skills:
1. Home / Utilities / Databases / New
The user will visualize a Loading window. Once the Database has been created, the system will direct
the user to Home Jobs (CAM) window.
2. Jobs / Jobs / New
Figure 513: Job dialog box
603
Cutting Example
The reference will be automatically generated by the system. Introduce the required Name. The user
can also introduce various User data and a Description if necessary. Click OK button in order to save
the changes.
Figure 514: Job explorer tree
3. Manage / Components / Machines / New
Figure 515: Machine definition dialog box
Install a new cutting machine as follows:
Figure 516: Install: Machines dialog box
604
Cutting Example
The list on the left lists the Available machines while the one on the right provides the Installed ones.
Make use of the arrow ( , ) buttons in order to move the required machines from the available
list to the Installed one and click OK button.
The selected machine will appear on Machine definition dialog box, where the user can introduce the
required name.
Click OK button and the selected machine will be displayed in Configure: Machines dialog box.
Select close button to come back to Home module.
4. Manage / Materials
Figure 517: Materials dialog box
Select the required material from the list of the Standard Materials located on the left and make use
of the arrow ( , ) buttons in order to add them to the Database materials list, which is located on
the right side.
5. Home / Modules / Drawing module ( )
Lantek Expert Drawing window will be visualized.
6. Home / Draw / Rectangles 2 points ( )
Select the first and second points and a rectangle will be drawn based on the points selected.
605
Cutting Example
Figure 518: Rectangles example
7. Home / Draw / Circles – Centre and radius ( )
Create a full circle defined by its center and radius.
Select the circle center and input the circle radius in Value field provided in the dialog box displayed.
Figure 519: Circles example
8. Home / Modify / Fillets ( )
Fillet a corner by selecting the first and second elements and input the Radius value in the dialog box
displayed by the system. Execute the same action twice.
606
Cutting Example
Figure 520: Fillets example
9. Home / Modify / Bevel ( )
Bevel a corner by introducing d1 and d2 values in the dialog box displayed. Afterwards, select the first
and second elements and the system will bevel them.
Figure 521: Bevel example
10. Home / Transform / Copy ( )
Select the required geometry to copy by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar. In this
case select the whole geometry and rotate it 180º by means of the Dragging options. Place it next to
the initial geometry symmetrically and click Finish in order to exit from this application.
607
Cutting Example
Figure 522: Copy example
11. Home / Transform / Union ( )
Select base contour and the second contour, the system will unify the selected elements.
Figure 523: Union example
12. Save the part ( )
608
Cutting Example
Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the part.
The system will direct the user back to Jobs (CAM) window.
13. Home / Modules / Nesting and machining

14. Home / Sheets / New
The system will display Sheet selection dialog box as shown below:
609
Cutting Example
Select the required sheet from the list and click OK button in order to open it.
15. Home / Nesting / One sheet
Figure 526: One Sheet example
The system will automatically nest on the current sheet, always looking for the best part
combination and sheet usage.
610
Cutting Example
16. Home / Remnants / Configure ( )
The system will display Sheet remnants dialog box as shown below:
Figure 527: Sheet Remnants dialog box
Select the required type of remnant and introduce the required data. If Create the cutting line of the
remnant automatically parameter is enabled, the system will create the remnant automatically when
One sheet option is executed. Click OK button in order to save the information and create the
remnant.
17. Home / Remnants / Create remnants ( )
The system will generate the remnant automatically, based on the data previously introduced in
Sheet remnants dialog box.
The user will visualize the nesting as follows:
611
Cutting Example
Figure 528: Automatic remnant creation example
18. Technology / Lead-in/Lead-out / Automatic
The system will place the Lead-in/Lead-outs automatically on the parts as it is possible to see in the
following image:
Figure 529: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-outs example
19. Machining / Machining / Automatic
The system will display Machining initialization window as shown below:
612
Cutting Example
Figure 530: Machining initialization window
Introduce the required data in the different sections provided and click Finish button in order to
execute the machining.
Figure 531: Machining example
20. Machining / View / Verify the Machining ( )
613
Cutting Example
By means of this option the system will test if the machining process has been done properly looking
if:
 All the parts and contours are machined
 There is no overlapping between parts
 There are no leads, micro-joints, loops, etc. that overlap with other elements
If any of the previous situations is given, the system will display the following completion message:
“All machining on the sheet has been executed”.
Figure 532: Verify the machining completion message
The dark grey color in the contours means that the test has been successful:
Figure 533: Verified machining example
21. Start menu / Save
Save the nesting in order to generate the CNC code.
22. Machining / View / View CNC
614
Cutting Example
View CNC ( ) option shows the CNC code of the sheet:
Figure 534: CNC code example
615
www.lanteksms.com

Expert Cut Reference Manual (EN) PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Expert Cut Reference Manual (EN) PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

CUT

Parque Tecnológico de Álava reproduction, distribution, public communication

MULTIHEAD DATA ................................................................................................ 13

Tables of Technology................................................................................... 102

2 JOBS (CAM) MODULE ..............................................................................................165

JOBS ........................................................................................................... 165

Exit ......................................................................................................... 217

DRAWING WINDOW ............................................................................................. 263

Save ........................................................................................................ 269

Display ..................................................................................................... 417

4 NESTING AND MACHINING MODULE ............................................................................444

TITLE BAR ....................................................................................................... 444

View ..................................................................................................... 453

Contours ................................................................................................... 545

Evacuation of All the Parts by Lift after Machining .................................................. 600

5 CUTTING EXAMPLE ................................................................................................603

Configure Cutting Machines and Tools

Jobs (CAM) Module

Nesting and Machining Module

1 CONFIGURE CUTTING MACHINES & TOOLS

Figure 1: Configure Machine window

Figure 2: Multihead data configuration

Figure 3: Heads table

The capabilities of each head are shown with icons:

Figure 4: Heads positions dialog box

Figure 5: Grid configuration

The parameters to configure are 2D Points and Continuous Line/Arc.

 X and Y: the coordinates of the first point.

 n1 and n2: the number of horizontal and vertical points respectively.

 Maximum length of the hole

 Minimum length of the hole

 Maximum width of the hole

 Minimum width of the hole

Figure 6: Problematic holes example

 Automatic micro-joints in unstable contours: It is possible to configure automatic micro-

 No: Do not place any micro-joint.

 Both: Both previous options will be selected.

Figure 7: Sheet clamps – Position configuration

 Positions: Positions indicate the distance between different clamp positions.

 Number of positions: Total number of positions of the linear turret.

Figure 8: Sheet clamps position distance example

Figure 9: Sheet clamps – Clamp zone configuration

 Clamp zone: It is possible to set up the measurements of the clamp zone.

Figure 10: Clamp zone simulation

Figure 11: Sheet Clamps – Auxiliar configuration

 Apply clamp check: Select this checkbox to apply clamp check.

Figure 12: Fixtures dialog box

Figure 13: Extractions configuration

Figure 14: Lift/Grip configuration

Figure 15: Lift dialog box

 Pressing position: X position where the lift picks the sheet.

Figure 16: Upload/Download Sheets configuration

Figure 17: Work zone configuration

Figure 18: From Point configuration

Figure 19: Reposition – General configuration

 Speed in Y: The feed rate applied to the back off move.

 Fit to the edge of active work zone

Figure 20: Reposition – Advanced configuration

 Y minimum position: This configuration parameter, which defines Y minimum position,

Figure 21: Reposition – Device configuration

Figure 22: Reposition – Strategy configuration

 Normal: Standard one for the machine.

Figure 23: Sheet Parameters configuration